WO2003064991A2 - Method and apparatus using a nonlinear optical technique for detection of probe-target interactions in a field - Google Patents

Method and apparatus using a nonlinear optical technique for detection of probe-target interactions in a field Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2003064991A2
WO2003064991A2 PCT/US2002/022681 US0222681W WO03064991A2 WO 2003064991 A2 WO2003064991 A2 WO 2003064991A2 US 0222681 W US0222681 W US 0222681W WO 03064991 A2 WO03064991 A2 WO 03064991A2
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
nonlinear
binding partners
test molecule
active
physical properties
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/US2002/022681
Other languages
French (fr)
Other versions
WO2003064991A3 (en
Inventor
Joshua S. Salafsky
Original Assignee
Salafsky Joshua S
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by Salafsky Joshua S filed Critical Salafsky Joshua S
Priority to AU2002365214A priority Critical patent/AU2002365214A1/en
Publication of WO2003064991A2 publication Critical patent/WO2003064991A2/en
Publication of WO2003064991A3 publication Critical patent/WO2003064991A3/en

Links

Classifications

    • B—PERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B82—NANOTECHNOLOGY
    • B82Y—SPECIFIC USES OR APPLICATIONS OF NANOSTRUCTURES; MEASUREMENT OR ANALYSIS OF NANOSTRUCTURES; MANUFACTURE OR TREATMENT OF NANOSTRUCTURES
    • B82Y30/00—Nanotechnology for materials or surface science, e.g. nanocomposites
    • B—PERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B82—NANOTECHNOLOGY
    • B82Y—SPECIFIC USES OR APPLICATIONS OF NANOSTRUCTURES; MEASUREMENT OR ANALYSIS OF NANOSTRUCTURES; MANUFACTURE OR TREATMENT OF NANOSTRUCTURES
    • B82Y15/00—Nanotechnology for interacting, sensing or actuating, e.g. quantum dots as markers in protein assays or molecular motors
    • G—PHYSICS
    • G01—MEASURING; TESTING
    • G01N—INVESTIGATING OR ANALYSING MATERIALS BY DETERMINING THEIR CHEMICAL OR PHYSICAL PROPERTIES
    • G01N33/00—Investigating or analysing materials by specific methods not covered by groups G01N1/00 - G01N31/00
    • G01N33/48—Biological material, e.g. blood, urine; Haemocytometers
    • G01N33/50—Chemical analysis of biological material, e.g. blood, urine; Testing involving biospecific ligand binding methods; Immunological testing
    • G01N33/53—Immunoassay; Biospecific binding assay; Materials therefor
    • G01N33/543—Immunoassay; Biospecific binding assay; Materials therefor with an insoluble carrier for immobilising immunochemicals
    • G01N33/54366—Apparatus specially adapted for solid-phase testing
    • G01N33/54373—Apparatus specially adapted for solid-phase testing involving physiochemical end-point determination, e.g. wave-guides, FETS, gratings
    • G01N33/5438—Electrodes
    • G—PHYSICS
    • G01—MEASURING; TESTING
    • G01N—INVESTIGATING OR ANALYSING MATERIALS BY DETERMINING THEIR CHEMICAL OR PHYSICAL PROPERTIES
    • G01N2333/00—Assays involving biological materials from specific organisms or of a specific nature
    • G01N2333/435—Assays involving biological materials from specific organisms or of a specific nature from animals; from humans
    • G01N2333/705—Assays involving receptors, cell surface antigens or cell surface determinants
    • G01N2333/72—Assays involving receptors, cell surface antigens or cell surface determinants for hormones
    • G01N2333/726—G protein coupled receptor, e.g. TSHR-thyrotropin-receptor, LH/hCG receptor, FSH

Definitions

  • the present invention relates to a method for detecting interactions between biological components using a nonlinear optical technique.
  • the sample comprises probes and targets which can be poled by an applied force field - an electric, magnetic, or fluid flow, for example - resulting in a non-centrosymmetric region capable of generating nonlinear optical radiation, and used in the present invention to measure probe-target binding reactions or their effects.
  • probe-target binding is measured in homogeneous phase (i.e., in the bulk, not at an interface).
  • Another preferred embodiment of the invention is the application of an electric field at an interface to study effects of the field on a probe-target reaction - for example, with voltage-gated ion channels as probes, in which the state or properties of the ion channels is modulated by the field.
  • the probes, targets or both can be labeled with nonlinear-active moieties, or modulators of the properties of these moieties.
  • nonlinear- active decorators can be used instead of nonlinear-active labels and probe-target binding detected in the homogeneous phase (i.e., the bulk) or at an interface.
  • a molecular beacon (MB) probe is well known in the art as a hairpin-loop, single-stranded oligonucleotide comprising a probe sequence embedded within complementary sequences that form a hairpin stem. The loop portion of the molecule can form a double-stranded DNA in the presence of complementary nucleic acid.
  • a fluorophore is covalently attached to one end of the oligonucleotide, and a nonfluorescent quencher is covalently attached to the other end.
  • the stem keeps these two moieties in close proximity to each other, causing the fluorescence of the fluorophore to be quenched by energy transfer.
  • the rigidity of the probe-target duplex forces the stem to unwind, which causes the separation of the fluorophore and the quencher and the restoration of fluorescence. This permits the detection of probe-target hybrids in the presence of unhybridized probes.
  • Van Schie RC Marras SA, Conroy JM, Nowak NJ, Catanese JJ, and de Jong PJ (2000) Semiautomated clone verification by real-time PCR using molecular beacons. Biotechniques 29, 1296-1306. Vet JA, Majithia AR, Marras SAE, Tyagi S, Dube S, Poiesz BJ, and Kramer FR (1999)
  • the Mycobacterium tuberculosis IdeR is a dual functional regulator that controls transcription of genes involved in iron acquisition, iron storage, and survival in macrophages. Molecular Microbiology 42, 851-866.
  • Yamamoto R, Baba T, and Kumar PK (2000) Molecular beacon aptamer fluoresces in the presence of Tat protein of HIV-1. Genes Cells 5, 389-396.
  • the present invention is based on the use of a nonlinear optical technique to detect probe-target interactions in an external applied force field.
  • the external applied field can be electric, magnetic, fluid flow or other types of applied force.
  • the present invention provides advantages over fluorescence-based detection, such as reduced background, ability to detect interactions in homogeneous phase, reduced photobleaching, simplified optical detection, and no need for labor- or time-consuming washing steps. These advantages are due to the low background of the nonlinear optical techniques and the fact that the method is a scattering rather than an abso ⁇ tion process.
  • the present invention is also based on the use of a nonlinear optical technique to detect probe-target interactions in an external applied force field in a homogeneous phase or at an interface in the presence of one or more nonlinear active label or decorators.
  • the present invention can also be used to detect changes in orientation or conformation of the probe, target, or both probe and target, in an external applied field, that are a consequence of the probe-target binding reactions.
  • the invention also discloses methods for screening modulators of the probe-target binding interaction in an external applied force field, and for determining the degree or extent of binding in an external applied force field through the conformational change the binding induces.
  • the invention provides a method for screening one or more candidate binding partners for binding to a test molecule comprising:
  • step (c) measuring one or more physical properties of a nonlinear optical light beam emanating from said sample; wherein a change in the value of said one or more physical properties measured in step (c) relative to a value for said one or more physical properties measured in the absence of exposure of said test molecule to said one or more candidate binding partners indicates that said one or more candidate binding partners bind said test molecule.
  • the method further comprises comparing the value of the one or more physical properties measured relative to a value for the one or more physical properties measured in the absence of exposure of said test molecule to said one or more candidate binding partners.
  • the invention provides a method for screening one or more candidate binding partners for binding to a test molecule comprising:
  • step (c) measuring one or more physical properties of a nonlinear optical light beam emanating from said sample; wherein a change in the value of said one or more physical properties measured in step (c) relative to a value for said one or more physical properties measured in the absence of exposure of said test molecule to said one or more candidate binding partners indicates that said one or more candidate binding partners bind said test molecule.
  • the method further comprises comparing the value of the one or more physical properties measured relative to a value for the one or more physical properties measured in the absence of exposure of said test molecule to said one or more candidate binding partners.
  • the invention provides a method for screening one or more candidate modulator molecules for the ability to modulate an interaction between a test molecule and its binding partner comprising:
  • step (b) measuring one or more physical properties of a nonlinear optical light beam emanating from said sample; wherein a change in the value of said one or more physical properties measured in step (c) relative to the value for said one or more physical properties measured in the absence of exposure to said one or more candidate modulator molecules indicates that said one or more candidate modulator molecules modulate the interaction between said test molecule and its binding partner.
  • the method further comprises comparing the value of said one or more physical properties measured relative to the value for said one or more physical properties measured in the absence of exposure to said one or more candidate modulator molecules.
  • the invention provides a method for screening one or more candidate modulator molecules for the ability to modulate an interaction between a test molecule and its binding partner comprising:
  • step (c) measuring one or more physical properties of a nonlinear optical light beam emanating from said sample; wherein a change in the value of said one or more physical properties measured in step (c) relative to the value for said one or more physical properties measured in the absence of exposure to said one or more candidate modulator molecules indicates that said one or more candidate modulator molecules modulate the interaction between said test molecule and its binding partner.
  • the method further comprises comparing the value of said one or more physical properties measured relative to the value for said one or more physical properties measured in the absence of exposure to said one or more candidate modulator molecules.
  • the invention provides a method for detecting a conformational change in a test molecule upon binding of the test molecule to a binding partner comprising:
  • test molecule contacting said test molecule with one or more candidate binding partners, wherein the test molecule or the one or more candidate binding partners is labeled with a nonlinear-active moiety that is not native to the test molecule or the one or more candidate binding partners, respectively; (b) applying an external force field to said contacted test molecule; (c) illuminating said contacted test molecule with one or more light beams at one or more fundamental frequencies; and
  • step (d) measuring one or more physical properties of a nonlinear optical light beam emanating from said sample; wherein a change in the value of said one or more physical properties measured in step (d) relative to the value for said one or more physical properties measured in the absence of said one or more candidate binding partners indicates that at least one of said one or more candidate binding partners bind to said test molecule and that said binding induces a conformational change in said candidate binding partners, in said test molecule, or in both said candidate binding partners and said test molecule.
  • the method further comprises comparing the value of said one or more physical properties measured relative to the value for said one or more physical properties measured in the absence of said one or more candidate binding partners.
  • the invention provides a method for detecting the degree or extent of the conformational change induced by binding between a test molecule and one or more candidate binding partners comprising:
  • test molecule or the one or more candidate binding partners is labeled with a nonlinear-active moiety that is not native to the test molecule or the one or more candidate binding partners, respectively;
  • step (d) measuring one or more physical properties of a nonlinear optical light beam emanating from said sample; wherein the extent of the change in the value of said one or more physical properties measured in step (d) relative to the value for said one or more physical properties measured in the absence of said one or more candidate binding partners indicates the degree or extent of the conformational change that said binding induces.
  • the method further comprises comparing the value of said one or more physical properties measured relative to the value for the one or more physical properties measured in the absence of said one or more candidate binding partners.
  • Fig. 1 depicts one embodiment of the apparatus in which the mode of generation and collection of the second harmonic light is by reflection off the substrate with surface-attached probes.
  • Fig. 2 depicts one embodiment of an apparatus in which the mode of generation and collection of the second harmonic light is by total internal reflection through a prism.
  • the prism is coupled by an index-matching material to a substrate with surface-attached probes.
  • Fig. 3 depicts one embodiment of an apparatus in which the mode of generation and collection of the second harmonic light is by total internal reflection through a wave-guide with multiple reflections as denoted by the dashed line inside the wave-guide.
  • Figs. 4A-D depict one embodiment of a flow-cell for delivery and removal of biological components and other fluids to the substrate containing attached probes.
  • Figs. 5A-C depict three embodiments of an apparatus in which the mode of generation and collection of the second harmonic light is by transmission through a sample.
  • the second harmonic beam is co-linear with the fundamental.
  • the second harmonic is collected from a direction orthogonal to the fundamental ('right-angle collection').
  • the second harmonic light is collected by an integrating sphere and a fiber optic line.
  • Fig. 6 depicts an embodiment of the transformation, using a series of optical components, of a collimated beam of the fundamental light into a line shape suitable for scanning a substrate.
  • Figs. 7A-B depict an embodiments patterned in an array format.
  • Fig. 7A depicts an embodiment of a substrate surface (containing attached probes) which has been patterned into an array format (elements 1-35).
  • Fig. 7B depicts one element of a substrate array in which each element is a well with walls, with surface-attached probes, and the well is capable of holding some liquid and serves to physically separate the well's contents from adjacent wells or other parts of the substrate.
  • Fig. 8 depicts one embodiment of a surface chemistry used to attach oligonucleotide or polynucleotide samples to the substrate surface.
  • Figs. 9A-B depict an embodiment of a substrate containing multiple wells.
  • Fig. 9A depicts the substrate containing multiple wells (1-16), each of which contains surface- attached probes as depicted in Fig. 9B.
  • Fig. 10 depicts an embodiment of the apparatus substrate with the use of an aminosilane surface-attached layer on top of a reflective coating.
  • the reflective coating underneath the aminosilane layer improves collection of the nonlinear optical light.
  • the aminosilane layer is suitable for coupling biomolecules or other probe components to the substrate.
  • Figs. 11 A-B depict an embodiment of an apparatus in which the mode of generation and collection of the second harmonic light is through a fiber optic.
  • Fig. 11 A depicts the use of a bundle of fiber optic lines and
  • Fig. 1 IB depicts the use of beads coupled to the end of a fiber for attaching probes.
  • Figs. 12A-C depict three embodiments of an apparatus in which the mode of generation and collection of the second harmonic light is by transmission through a sample.
  • Fig. 12A depicts both the fundamental and second harmonic beams travelling co-linearly through a sample.
  • Fig. 12B depicts the fundamental and second harmonic beams being refracted at the top surface (top surface contains attached probes) of a substrate with this surface generating the second harmonic light.
  • Fig 12C depicts a similar apparatus to Fig. 12B except that the bottom surface (bottom surface contains attached probes) generates the second harmonic light.
  • Figs. 13 A-B depict two embodiments of an apparatus in which second harmonic light is generated by total internal reflection at an interface.
  • the points of generation of the second harmonic light are denoted by the circles.
  • a dove prism is used to guide the light to a surface capable of generating the second harmonic light (bottom surface of prism but can also be another surface coupled to the prism through an index-matching material).
  • a wave-guide structure is used to produce multiple points of second harmonic generation.
  • Figs. 14A-C depict three embodiments of an apparatus in which second harmonic light is generated using a fiber optic line (with attached probes at the end of the fiber).
  • Fig. 14A depicts an apparatus in which both generation and collection of the second harmonic light occur in the same fiber.
  • Fig. 14B depicts the use of a bead containing surface-attached probes at the end of the fiber.
  • Fig. 14C depicts an apparatus in which the second harmonic light is generated at the end of the fiber optic (containing attached probges) and collected using a mirror or lens external to the fiber optic.
  • Figs. 15 A-B depict two embodiments of an apparatus using an optical cavity for power build-up of the fundamental.
  • Figs. 16A-C depict three embodiments of an apparatus in which the mode of generation and collection of the second harmonic light uses reflection of the light from an interface.
  • Fig. 17 depicts one embodiment of the sample cell with an applied electric field.
  • the sample cell (5) is open and is depicted side-on and filled with solution (10) containing probes and targets.
  • the fundamental beam enters the sample cell to the right (15) and passes through transparent electrodes (20) separated by a spacer of 1-3 mm (25).
  • the electrodes are connected to a source of voltage (30). When voltage is applied, the targets and probes become partially oriented, thus producing the nonlinear optical light (e.g., second harmonic light).
  • the nonlinear optical light e.g., second harmonic light
  • Fig. 18 depicts an apparatus for measuring probe-target interactions in suspended cells.
  • a source of fundamental light from a Ti:Sapphire femtosecond laser (1000) operating at 800 nm is directed through a filter (RG-645, CVI Laser) that blocks 400 nm light (second harmonic).
  • the fundamental is then focused using plano-convex lens 1200 (100 mm focal length, Melles Griot) into sample holder 1300 containing a suspension of biological cells.
  • the second harmonic light is collected parallel to the fundamental direction using a 80 mm diameter plano-convex collimating lens (1400) (120 mm focal length, Melles Griot) that is positioned to have its focus at the focus of lens 1200.
  • the light is sent through a color filter (BG-39, CVI Laser) to block the fundamental light and pass second harmonic light on to a second plano-convex lens 1600 (120 mm focal length) Melles Griot which focuses the light through a monochromator slit and onto its grating (1700).
  • a photomultiplier is attached to the monochromator and detects the second harmonic light.
  • the signal from the photomultiplier is sent on to photon counting electronics (SR400, Stanford Research Systems) and then passed to a computer 1900 for storage and analysis of the data.
  • Figs. 19A-C depict various embodiments of the present invention.
  • receptors embedded in a membrane surface are exposed to ligands or particles for which they have an affinity. After the binding interaction occurs, the ligands or particles are bound to the membrane-associated receptors.
  • cells are attached (or 'plated') to a surface or . substrate to form approximately a monolayer of cells (e.g., -100% confluent cells); cells can also be stacked to form multilayers at a substrate or surface.
  • incident fundamental light can be transmitted through the substrate or surface, run parallel to the surface and through the multilayer or monolayer of cells, coupled to the cell layer evanescently, or some combination thereof.
  • 19C depicts a conformational change process.
  • Receptors in a membrane surface e.g., a host cell
  • nonlinear-active labels which, on average, possess an orientation with respect to the surface plane, specifically an angle of ⁇ of the hype ⁇ olarizability with respect to the surface plane; binding and subsequent activation of the receptor by ligands causes the labels to shift orientation to angle ⁇ .
  • Small shifts in angle can cause a substantial change in a physical property of the measured nonlinear optical light (e.g., intensity of the light).
  • Figs. 20A-B depict a molecular beacon that has been modified to form a nonlinear- active analogue.
  • a single strand of nucleotides is coupled to a nonlinear-active dye (gray-hatch) and an enhancer (open circle).
  • the dye and enhancer are separated by the conformational change, leading to a measurable change in the nonlinear response of the dye.
  • the amount of the change can be made quantitative with the amount of probe-target hybridization.
  • SEQ ID NO: 5 an example of a particular oligonucleotide sequence with attached dye and enhancer (Au particle) is shown (SEQ ID NO: 5).
  • the sequences of various targets SEQ ID NOs: 1 - 4, respectively) used for testing the degree of hybridization to this probe are also shown.
  • the present mvention uses a nonlinear optical technique to detect probe-target interactions involving a conformational change.
  • nonlinear optical technique include but are not limited to second-harmonic generation, sum-frequency generation, difference-frequency generation, third-harmonic generation and hyper-Rayleigh scattering HRS).
  • the present invention can be used with any of the nonlinear optical techniques, however many embodiments describe the use of the second-order techniques (e.g., second- harmonic generation and hyper-Rayleigh scattering).
  • Nonlinear optical light is any light that results from a nonlinear transformation of light beams at one or more fundamental frequencies (also referred to herein as fundamental beam(s)).
  • a nonlinear optical technique is capable of transforming the physical properties, such as frequency, intensity, etc., of one or more incident light beams, called the fundamental beams.
  • the nonlinear beams emanating from the sample are the higher order frequency beams, e.g. second or third harmonic, etc., or the beams at the sum or difference frequencies.
  • SHG second harmonic generation
  • a nonlinear optical technique is also referred to herein as a surface-selective nonlinear optical technique.
  • Second harmonic generation (SHG) and other surface-selective nonlinear optical techniques are directly related to the orientation of the nonlinear-active species in a sample, because the fundamental and nonlinear beams have well-defined phase relationships, and the wavefronts of the nonlinear beam in a macroscopic sample (within the coherence length) are in phase. Any change in the orientation of the nonlinear-active species can be detected by measuring one or more physical properties of the nonlinear optical beam emanating from the sample.
  • These coherency properties of the nonlinear optical technique offer a number of advantages useful for surface or high-throughput studies in which, for example, either a single surface or a microarray surface is examined.
  • the coherent nature of the nonlinear optical beam emanating from the sample also allows discrimination among more than one nonlinear optical beam emanating from a sample.
  • assays can be conducted where multiple fundamental light beams at one or more frequencies, incident with one or more polarization directions relative to the sample, can be used, with the resulting emanation of at least two nonlinear beams.
  • An apparatus using nonlinear optical suface-selective-based detection, such as with second harmonic generation requires minimal collection optics since generation of the nonlinear light only occurs at the interface (in the absence of an applied field) and thus, in principle, allows extremely high depth discrimination and fast scanning.
  • ⁇ (2) Ns ⁇ (2) >
  • ⁇ (2) is the nonlinear susceptiblity
  • N s is the total number of molecules per unit area at the interface
  • ⁇ (2) > is the average over the orientational distribution of the nonlinear hype ⁇ olarizabilities - ⁇ (2) - in these molecules.
  • ⁇ and P are, respectively, the induced molecular and macroscopic dipoles oscillating at frequency 2 ⁇
  • ⁇ and ⁇ (2) are, respectively, the hype ⁇ olarizability and second-harmonic (nonlinear) susceptibility tensors
  • E( ⁇ ) is the electric field component of the incident radiation oscillating at frequency ⁇ .
  • the macroscopic nonlinear susceptibility ⁇ (2) is related by an orientational average of the microscopic ⁇ hype ⁇ olarizability.
  • the next order term in the expansion of the induced macroscopic dipole describes other nonlinear phenomenon, such as third harmonic generation.
  • the third order term is responsible for such nonlinear phenomena as two-photon fluorescence.
  • the driving electric fields (fundamentals) oscillate at different frequencies (i.e., (0 and ⁇ ) and the nonlinear radiation oscillates at the sum or difference frequency an ⁇ ⁇ 2 ).
  • the intensity of SHG is proportional to the square of the nonlinear susceptiblity and is dependent on the amount of oriented nonlinear-active species in a sample, and thus to changes in this orientation, both at an interface and species aligned in the bulk (the latter through an electric field-poled mechanism, for example).
  • conformational change in receptors can be detected using a nonlinear-active label or moiety wherein the label is attached to or associated with the receptor; a conformational change leads to a change in the direction (orientation) of the label with respect to the surface plane (or applied field direction) and thus to a change in a physical property of the nonlinear optical signal.
  • the techniques are intrinsically sensitive to these changes at an interface and can be made sensitive to them in the bulk as well, by applying an electric field to pole molecules or simply by detecting that fraction of the ensemble which produce hyper-Rayleigh scattering (HRS) due to fluctuational changes in their number density or orientation as is well known to one skilled in the art.
  • HRS hyper-Rayleigh scattering
  • HRS hyper-Rayleigh scattering
  • the fluctuations of nonlinear-active molecules lead to instantaneous departures from centrosymmetry, and thus allow for a low amount of second-harmonic emission to occur, although this emission is incoherent.
  • HRS can be used to discriminate an unbound molecule in solution from the same molecule bound to one or more binding partners (also referred to herein as probes).
  • Thermal energy drives the fluctuations required for HRS, however, an external force can also be applied to induce or amplify the fluctuations, thus increasing the HRS signal.
  • a flow-field can be used to transiently orient molecules in solution by injecting a burst or stream of fluid into it. Pulsed and alternating electric fields applied to the sample can also increase the HRS signal.
  • HRS to measure beta (hype ⁇ olarizability) of nonlinear optical molecules.
  • the present invention extends the use of HRS to detect binding interactions and to screen for test molecules (also referred to herein as targets) or modulators (described below) capable of binding or modulating probe-target interactions.
  • Electric field induced second harmonic is technique well known in the field of nonlinear optics that can be used according to the invention to render a system nonlinear- active that is not normally so, such as a homogeneous phase (i.e, a bulk phase), through the application of an electric field that breaks the symmetry of the bulk phase.
  • the EFISH technique can be used to measure the hype ⁇ olarizabilty of molecules in solution by using a dc field to induce alignment in the medium, and allowing nonlinear-activity (such as SHG) to be observed. This is sometimes called the reorientational mechanism.
  • EFISH is a third order nonlinear optical effect, with the polarization source written as:
  • the polarization is the result of the application of two optical fields and a static (dc) field.
  • dc static
  • the electrodes used to apply the electric field can be spatially patterned (periodically patterned) to achieve quasi-phase matching.
  • Quasi-phase matching is a well known technique for increasing the effective nonlinear path length in a nonlinear-active material, by alternating the nonlinear susceptibility of a material with a period of a coherence length.
  • the following references (and references therein) describe this technique:
  • the electrodes used to apply the external electric field in the EFISH technique can assume a variety of shapes, forms and compositions as, for example, are found in the prior art. For instance, the electrodes can be angled or pointed to increase the electric field strength that results in these cases.
  • the electrodes can be oriented in a variety of ways to the sample; for example, the electrodes can be placed (e.g., patterned lithographically, printed, etched, etc.) on a substrate which itself is in contact with the liquid sample containing the targets and probes; or, for example, the electrodes can lie at the bottom and top of a thin cavity in which the sample containing targets and probes is flowing or is held.
  • a non-random orientation is a necessary condition for generation of the surface- selective nonlinear optical signal. Only the non-centrosymmetric region of a system, is capable of generating non-linear light.
  • a molecule or material phase is centrosymmetric if there exists a point in space, called the 'center' or 'inversion center,' through which an inversion (x,y,z) -> (-x,-y,-z) of all atoms can be performed that leaves the molecule or material unchanged. For example, if the molecule is of uniform composition and spherical in shape, it is centrosymmetric. Centrosymmetric molecules or materials have no nonlinear susceptibility or hype ⁇ olarizability, necessary for second or higher harmonic, sum frequency and difference frequency generation. A non-centrosymmetric molecule or material lacks this center of inversion, and therefore can be nonlinear-active.
  • Non-centrosymmetric regions can be at surfaces, e.g. arrays, substrates, etc., or in bulk phase, e.g. solutions, however, a bulk phase, also referred to herein as a homogeneous phase, may require the application of a force field, e.g., an electric field, a magnetic field, or fluid flow, to break the symmetry of the region and render the bulk phase nonlinear-active (such as in the EFISH technique).
  • a force field e.g., an electric field, a magnetic field, or fluid flow
  • a magnetic field can be applied, also possibly in the presence of exogenous magnetic species, to break the symmtery and render the system nonlinear active.
  • the forces can also cause some alignment of a system, such as is observed, e.g., for elongated objects flowing through a narrow flow channel.
  • the forces exerted by fluid flow e.g. a laminar flow, or a narrow channel, can render the system non-centrosymmetric and thus nonlinear active.
  • the present invention exploits the property that any non-random orientation of targets, probes or target-probe complexes in an external force field applied to a homogeneous phase, can lead to a nonlinear optical signal, wherein the external force field can be caused by an electric field, a magnetic field, fluid flow or some combination thereof. In a specific embodiment the external force field is not an electric field.
  • the present invention also exploits the property that any non-random orientation of probes bound to one or more nonlinear active labels or decorators in an external force field with respect to a surface to which they are attached or localized leads to non-random orientation of targets when these targets bind to the probes, wherein the force field is caused by fluid flow or combinations thereof.
  • one or more nonlinear active labels or one or more decorators are bound to the probe and/or target, and the sample is not nonlinear active in the absence of the one or more nonlinear active labels or the one or more decorators.
  • a magnetic field, fluid flow or some combination thereof can also be applied.
  • a nonlinear optical technique can be used to monitor, e.g., the binding activity at the surface. Any change in the non-random orientation of the system, such as due to a conformational change on occurrence of a binding event, would modify the nonlinear optical signal.
  • Verification that a change in the detected nonlinear optical signal is due to a conformational change can be accomplished using controls known to one skilled in the art including, for example, measuring binding of a blocking compound to the receptor - where the blocking compound is known not to produce a conformational change in the receptor.
  • Homogeneous phase assays for binding between biological components are sought after because they comprise only a single phase with no separation steps, and no solid surface that may introduce non-native artifacts into the measurements.
  • a homogeneous phase i.e., a bulk phase system
  • a homogeneous phase is not normally non-centrosymmetric, which is a requirement for generation of the surface-selective nonlinear beams.
  • this requirement is met by the use of cells or liposomes in a medium (comprising a cell or liposome-liquid interface) or a solid surface or substrate (with a solid-liquid interface).
  • the present invention discloses the use of an external electric field to a sample, e.g., comprising biological components, which poles (orients) the components, thus creating the non-centrosymmetric region.
  • the biological components can comprise probes and targets which can bind to each other; the identity and type of either can vary widely.
  • Targets or probes can be labeled with a nonlinear-active (e.g., second harmonic-active) label, as disclosed in the prior art (Joshua S.
  • the complementary binding partner of the targets or probes can be labeled with a moiety which alters the nonlinear optical properties of the label: referred to herein as a 'modulator'; when the targets and probes bind to each other or are in close proximity, the presence of the complementary binding partner, or the modulator attached to it, can change the nonlinear optical properties of the label on the other, and this change can be detected optically as a signal for probe-target binding while under the application of an external electric field.
  • one aspect of the present invention is to provide a method for detection of binding reactions in homogeneous phase.
  • nonlinear-active species can be introduced into the system to render the system nonlinear-active.
  • species that affect the one or more nonlinear-active beams emanating from a sample comprising probes and targets include labels, decorators, indicators, modulators, inhibitors, and enhancers, as described below.
  • labels or decorators the non-random orientation of the target produces a non-random label or decorator orientation and this leads directly to an increase in surface- selective nonlinear optical signal (e.g., intensity).
  • Non-specific interactions of the targets with attached or localized probes e.g., non-specific binding to probes
  • targets to regions on the surface where no probe is present e.g., non-specific binding to substrate or solid support
  • a non-random probe orientation also leads to an increase in the surface-selective nonlinear optical signal since the surface charge density close to the surface plane will be larger than if the probes are randomly oriented which results in a lower surface electric charge density.
  • a label for use in the present invention refers to a nonlinear-active moiety, particle or molecule which can be bound, either covalently or non-covalently, to a molecule, particle or phase (e.g., lipid bilayer) in order to render the resulting system more nonlinear optical active.
  • Labels can be employed in the case where the molecule, particle or phase (e.g., lipid bilayer) is not nonlinear-active to render the system nonlinear-active, or with a system that is already nonlinear-active to add an extra manipulation parameter into the system.
  • the exogenous labels can be pre-attached to the molecules or particles, and any unbound or unreacted labels separated from the labeled entities before a measurement is made.
  • the nonlinear-active moiety is attached to the target or probe molecule in vitro.
  • the labels can be left in solution with probes and targets and allowed to adsorb to some particle (e.g., an enhancer) or surface to yield a different nonlinear-active response (i.e., hype ⁇ olarizability or second order susceptibility) from the bound labels.
  • some particle e.g., an enhancer
  • EFISH or Hyper-Rayleigh scattering can be used to determine if a candidate molecule or particle is nonlinearly active according to techniques well known in the art, where appropriate controls and background measurements are made in the absence of access to the candidate nonlinear-active species.
  • the labeling of probes with nonlinear-active labels and/or modulators of the labels allows a direct, optical means of detecting probe-target binding reactions in the cases where the binding reaction results in a change in orientation or conformation of the probe using a surface-selective nonlinear optical technique.
  • At least two distinguishable nonlinear- active labels are used.
  • the orientation of the attached two or more distinguishable labels would then be chosen to facilitate well defined directions of the emanating coherent nonlinear light beam.
  • the two or more distinguishable labels can be used in assays where multiple fundamental light beams at one or more frequencies, incident with one or more polarization directions relative to the sample, are used, with the resulting emanation of at least two nonlinear light beams.
  • One means of determining whether a particular molecule or particle can be used as a nonlinear-active label is by studying it using second harmonic generation at an air-water interface. For instance, in the case of particles, if the particles assemble at the air-water interface in a manner which gives a net orientation of the particles (on a length scale of the coherence length) the layer of particles can generate second harmonic light. Another means of doing this is by measuring a sample of a suspension of the particles and detecting the hyper-rayleigh scattering. Yet another means comprises the use of EFISH to determine if a candidate molecule or particle is nonlinearly active.
  • the effect can be used to measure the hype ⁇ olarizabilty of molecules in solution by using a dc field to induce alignment in the medium, and allowing SHG to be observed.
  • This type of measurement does not require that the particle themselves be ordered at an interface, but does require that the particles be nonlinear-active and thus non-centrosymmetric.
  • metal nanoparticles and assemblies thereof are modified to create biological nonlinear-active labels.
  • the following references describe the modification metal nanoparticles and assemblies:
  • nonlinear-active labels can be constructed according to well known procedures in the art to be photoactivated or photomodulated with a beam of light such that, upon irradiation of the sample with a selected beam of light, the labels become nonlinear optical active (or more or less nonlinear optical active).
  • the beam of light can, for example, cleave a chemical bond (e.g., using UV light), well known in the art as 'caged' compounds.
  • linkers couple the label to the targets.
  • the linkers can be made long enough so that the orientation of the targets at the interface (i.e., when bound to the probes) does not significantly effect the orientation of the label. Because the intensity of the nonlinear light generated depends on the net orientation of the labels at the interface - and the orientation of the targets at an interface can be difficult to control (i.e., the targets may even be randomly oriented at the interface) - the use of linkers can separate the labels sufficiently from the targets so that the orientation of the latter does not necessarily determine the orientation of the former. In cases where this is less important, for example with integral membrane proteins in supported lipid bilayers on glass, where the orientation of the membrane protein presented to the targets is generally uniform, this aspect of the linkers can be less important.
  • linking moieties and methodologies for attaching molecules which can be nonlinear-active labels to the 5' or 3' termini of oligonucleotides there are many linking moieties and methodologies for attaching molecules which can be nonlinear-active labels to the 5' or 3' termini of oligonucleotides, as exemplified by the following references: Eckstein, editor, Oligonucleotides and Analogues: A Practical Approach (IRL Press, Oxford, 1991); Zuckerman etal., Nucleic Acids Research, 15: 5305- 5321 (1987) (3' thiol group on oligonucleotide); Sharma et al., Nucleic Acids Research, 19: 3019 (1991) (3' sulfhydryl); Giusti et al., PCR Methods and Applications, 2: 223-227 (1993) and Fung et al., U.S. Pat.
  • Modulators include any substance (e.g., moiety, molecule, biological component or compound) that alters the nonlinear response of a nonlinear-active species when the modulator is in proximity to the nonlinear-active species, or alters the kinetic or equilibrium properties of probe-target interactions (e.g., binding reaction). Modulators may change the rate of probe-target binding, the equilibrium constant of probe-target binding or, in general, enhance or reduce probe-target interactions. Examples of modulators are the following: inhibitors, drugs, small molecules, agonists and antagonists and Au particles. Candidate modulators can be tested for their ability to perform as modulators, e.g., in a screening process.
  • target-probe interactions can be measured in the presence of some modulator of the interactions — the modulator being, for example, a small molecule, drug, or other moiety, molecule or particle which changes in some way the target-probe interactions (e.g., has some affinity for the probe and blocks or inhibits target binding).
  • the modulator can be added before, during or after the time in which the probe-target interactions occur.
  • Inhibitors decrease or prevent probe-target interactions.
  • Inhibitors can be any substance, e.g., moiety, molecule, compound or particle. Preferably the inhibitor competes with a known binding interaction between target and probe.
  • Inhibitors are a form of modulator. Inhibitors are also referred to herein as blocking agents or blockers.
  • compounds that are potential inhibitors of an agonist to a receptor are screened by testing for removal of a conformational change induced by the agonist when the receptor and agonist are also in the presence of an inhibitor candidate (the agonist can be a natural molecule, synthetic, etc.).
  • a decorator refers to a nonlinear-active substance (e.g., molecule or particle) which can be bound to targets, probes or target-probe complexes, and allow detection and discrimination among them. Ideally, a decorator should not appreciably alter or participate in the target-probe reaction itself.
  • a decorator is distinguished from a nonlinear-active label, such as a SHG-active label, in that it possesses a specific binding affinity for the target, probe, or the target-probe complex, while an SHG-label can be attached to, for example a biological component, via specific chemical bonds or non-specific (e.g., electrostatic) means.
  • a decorator can be used to detect probe-target complexes by its specific binding affinity (in some art, 'molecular recognition') to the targets, probes or the target-probe complexes and to thereby discriminate among targets, probes and target-probe complexes in a surface-selective nonlinear optical technique.
  • a decorator which has a stronger affinity (larger binding constant) to double-stranded DNA than single-stranded DNA can be used to detect hybridization with surface-attached probes since the amount of oriented decorator can increase as hybridization proceeds between single-stranded targets and probes.
  • decorators are constructs of a nonlinear-active species and another species, where the other species is a biological component (protein, antibody, etc.) and where the construct has a differential binding affinity among probes, targets and probe-target complexes to allow discrimination among them using a surface-selective nonlinear optical technique.
  • Decorators can also be a non-natural molecules (e.g., synthetic chemical molecule, drug, etc.) with a nonlinear activity and which binds specifically (recognizes) targets, probes or target- probe complexes, and has a differential binding affinity among the three to allow for discrimination among them using a surface-selective nonlinear optical technique.
  • the decorator is dissolved or suspended in a solution or aqueous phase containing the target component.
  • Exemplary decorator molecules or particles include, but are not limited to, a biological component, a nucleic acid, protein, small molecule, biological cell, virus, liposome, receptor, agonist, antagonist, inhibitor, hormone, antibody, antigen, peptide, receptor, drug, enzyme, ligand, nucleoside, polynucleoside, carbohydrate, cDNA, hormone, allergen, cDNA, hapten, oligonucleotide, biotin, streptavidin, polynucleotide, oligosaccharide, peptide nucleic acid (PNA), or nucleic acid analog.
  • a biological component a nucleic acid, protein, small molecule, biological cell, virus, liposome, receptor, agonist, antagonist, inhibitor, hormone, antibody, antigen, peptide, receptor, drug, enzyme, ligand, nucleoside, polynucleoside, carbohydrate, cDNA, hormone, allergen, cDNA, hapten, oligonucleo
  • decorators comprise a moiety in the family of, or that is, psoralen, ethidium bromide, methane phosphonate, phosphoramidate, propidium iodide, acridine, 9- aminoacridine, acridine orange, chloroquine, pyrine, echinomycin, 4',6-diamidino-2- phenylindole, dihydrochloride (DAPI), succinimidyl acridine-9-carboxylate, chloroquine, pyrine, echinomycin, 4',6-diamidino-2-phenylindole, dihydrochloride (DAPI), single-strand binding protein (SSB), tripyrrole peptides, flavopiridol, or pyronin Y.
  • DAPI single-strand binding protein
  • SSB single-strand binding protein
  • tripyrrole peptides flavopiridol, or pyronin
  • Indicators include nonlinear- active molecules or particles whose nonlinear optical properties or orientation near a surface or interface is modulated as the electric charge polarization, charge density or potential of the surface is modulated.
  • the charge or potential of an interface is modulated by the binding of a target to probes immobilized on the surface.
  • the surface electric potential of a cell is changed by a change in the ion channel properties - an opening, closing, increase or decrease in ionic permeability in response to target (ligand) binding, for instance.
  • an indicator serves as a marker for imaging pu ⁇ oses, e.g., to image cells or tissues.
  • An indicator preferably does not appreciably alter or participate in the target-probe reaction itself.
  • the indicator can be dissolved or suspended in the liquid, medium, solution or aqueous phase containing the target component.
  • An indicator preferably does not translocate into the lipid bilayer of vesicles or cells.
  • An indicator preferably possesses freedom of movement to respond to changes in surface electric charge density or potential.
  • Measuring the nonlinear optical response of a glass-solvent or glass- water interface, in the presence of dissolved or suspended indicators in the water or solvent, is one means of assaying whether a candidate molecule would function as an indicator. Since glass carries a net negative charge, a candidate molecule can function as an indicator if the intensity of the nonlinear optical radiation generated at the interface in the presence of the molecule is greater than the background signal in its absence.
  • Another means of assaying for a candidate molecule's ability as an indicator is by measuring the intensity of nonlinear optical radiation generated by a semiconductor-liquid interface as a function of applied voltage (and hence surface electric charge density) between the semiconductor and the bulk of the liquid.
  • Yet another means is to measure the hyper-rayleigh scattering (HRS) from a solution or suspension of the indicator candidates, since if HRS is generated and the candidate itself is charged or dipolar, it should serve as an indicator.
  • HRS hyper-rayleigh scattering
  • Oxazole dye 4-[5-methoxyphenyl)-2-oxazolyl]pyridinium methanesulfonate also known as 4PyMPO-MeMs
  • 4PyMPO-MeMs is an indicator that can be used, that is strongly second harmonic- active and chemically stable at neutral pH (Salafsky and Eisenthal, Chemical Physics Letters 2000, 319, 435-439). Furthermore, the Stokes shift of the fluorescence which results from two-photon abso ⁇ tion is large so that the second harmonic beam can readily be separated from the fluorescence.
  • Other dyes in this family have similar properties (J.H.
  • R is a hydrogen atom, methyl group, ethyl group or other akyl group.
  • Stilbenes fiidodicarbocyanines Hemicyanines
  • a solid microparticle or a nanoparticle of size nanometers to microns in scale including, but not limited to, a sphere (latex, polystyrene, silica, etc.) or a strip, offers a surface area which can be derivatized with a nonlinear-active moiety via chemical or electrostatic means so that the entire object has a much higher hype ⁇ olarizability than can be obtained otherwise.
  • nonlinear-active dyes can be ordered on silica bead surfaces via electrostatic interactions (dye is positively charged, silica surface is negatively charged) and the entire bead, if derivatized with target-reactive linkers, can then function as an indicator.
  • the nonlinear-active moieties can be aligned on the solid surface so that phase interference between moieties is small, the overall hype ⁇ olarizability would scale nonlinearly (eg., quadratically) in their number.
  • the solid particle can vary in shape and its size can range from nanometers to microns in scale. Examples of the particles to be used include, but are not limited to, polystyrene beads and silica beads, both readily commercially available.
  • the solid particles to be used as indicators can be surface-derivatized using a variety of chemistries available in the prior art.
  • Nonlinear-active moieties can be covalently coupled either to the solid particles or to a derivatized layer.
  • polystyrene beads can be derivatized with dextran, lactose or amines (the latter case for example, via chloromethyl groups with ethylenediamine).
  • Silica can be derivatized using organofunctional silanes, for example using trichlorosilanes or other functional silanes (such as methoxy, amine, or other functional groups), to produce surfaces with a variety of chemical functionalities.
  • the surfaces of the derivatized beads can then be reacted with a nonlinear-active moiety via appropriate chemistry to produce the indicator.
  • Nonlinear-active moieties can also be electrostatically bound to a micron- or nanometer-sized particle surface to produce indicators with large hype ⁇ olarizabilities.
  • a charged nonlinear- active moiety an organic dye for example, can be oriented at a counter-charged microparticle surface, thus allowing for a net hype ⁇ olarizability of the object when using an appropriate geometry.
  • An example of an appropriate geometry is a microparticle sphere where the diameter is approximately the wavelength of the fundamental light, i.e. from tens of nanometers to microns so that destructive phase interference between nonlinear-active moieties on opposing faces of the sphere is mimmized.
  • the hype ⁇ olarizability of each dye at the spheres 's surface, when integrated across the entire surface of the sphere of -wavelength of light size, is large and positive.
  • Silica beads (-200 nm, roughly spherical) are reacted with a low concentration of 3-aminopropyltrimethoxysilane or 3-aminooctyltrimethoxysilane so that only -5-10% of the surface silanols become covalently coupled to the silane agent.
  • amine-reactive homobifunctional crosslinker disuccinimidyl glutarate DSG, Pierce Chemical
  • amine-reactive linkers on ⁇ 5-10% ⁇ of the bead surface.
  • the beads are then incubated with 4-[5-methoxyphenyl)-2- oxazolyljpyridinium methanesulfonate (also known as 4PyMPO-MeMs), a positively charged dye which binds electrostatically to the charged silanols on the surface and orients to some degree. The excess dye is removed from the beads by centrifugation.
  • the electrostatic adso ⁇ tion can be sufficiently high in some cases to immobilize the charged dye, even in the absence of a bulk concentration of it.
  • Bithiophenes hi evaluating whether a species may be nonlinear-active the following characteristics can indicate the potential for nonlinear activity: a large difference dipole moment (difference in dipole moment between the ground and excited states of the molecule), a large Stokes shift in fluorescence, an aromatic or conjugated bonding character.
  • an experimenter can use a simple technique known to those skilled in the art to confirm the nonlinear activity using, for example, detection of SHG from an air-water interface or from EFISH in the absence and presence of the species in question in a medium.
  • the species can be conjugated, if desired, to a species with specificity to a biological target to produce a targeting construct used in the surface-selective nonlinear optical detection or imaging technique.
  • An enhancer as used herein refers to a substance (e.g., moiety, molecule or particle) which can enhance (increase) the cross-section of a nonlinear-active substance (e.g., moiety, molecule or particle) when placed near to it (e.g., increase the intensity of second harmonic radiation generated).
  • a nonlinear-active substance e.g., moiety, molecule or particle
  • Enhancement of the nonlinear-active cross-section moiety, molecule or particle can occur via a resonance with an electronic transition or plasmon resonance of the enhancer.
  • an enhancer onto, or near to, a molecule or surface can result in the enhancer coupling to the molecule or surface, e.g., covalently, electrostatically, non-covalently, etc., or the enhancer is not coupled directly to the molecule or surface, but rather is near to the molecule or surface, e.g., enhancer adso ⁇ tion on to a cell surface, causing the enhancer to increase the nonlinear response of the label on the probes.
  • resonance-enhancing or surface-enhancing species serves to increase the nonlinear-active cross-section of samples.
  • resonance-enhancing species in the art are the following: metal or metallic (e.g., gold and silver) nanoparticles or colloidal particles, metal-coated particles (e.g., silver-coated latex nanospheres), aggregates or clusters of any of the aforementioned, rationally-designed clusters, chains or aggregates of the aforementioned (e.g., for symmetry-breaking: non-centrosymmetric aggregates, particles or clusters), etc.
  • metallic or semiconductor particles can be coupled to an SHG-active particle (such as oxazole, a stryrl dye, or some other molecule or particle).
  • SHG-active particle such as oxazole, a stryrl dye, or some other molecule or particle.
  • SHG-active particle such as oxazole, a stryrl dye, or some other molecule or particle.
  • these resonantly enhancing particles are not themselves generating the nonlinear light, they can be centrosymmetric or non-centrosymmetric. They are preferably close enough to the SH-active moiety to create the resonant enhancement effect, which occurs through a dipole-dipole interaction; the distance between the two species is typically on the order of angstroms to nanometers.
  • the general resonance enhancement effect on nonlinear optical phenomena is discussed in the context of roughened silver surfaces (G. Boyd, T. Rasing, R. Leite, Y. Shen (1984) Phys. Rev. B 30, 519-526, C. Chen, T.F. Heinz, D. Richard, Y. Shen (1981) Phys. Rev. Lett. 46, 1010-1012).
  • the resonantly enhancing particles are available commercially with a variety of surface chemistries amenable to coupling to an SH-active molecule such as oxazole (succinimidyl ester, maleimide, etc. offered by Molecules Probes, Eugene, OR).
  • an SH-active molecule such as oxazole (succinimidyl ester, maleimide, etc. offered by Molecules Probes, Eugene, OR).
  • the particle-nonlinear-active moiety complex can be constructed according to a number of schemes available in the prior art.
  • experimentation may be required to determine the optimal labeling strategy and/or use of enhancers or decorators for a given measurement.
  • the coupling chemistry, reaction conditions, etc. may be adjusted empirically to determine the optimal labeling strategy.
  • Candidates for an enhancer can be tested for their effect on a nonlinear-active species by measuring, for example, the SHG intensity of a nonlinear-active species in the absence and presence of the candidate enhancer (the enhancer can be attached to the nonlinear-active label, through a linker if necessary; or the enhancer can be brought into proximity to the label, e.g. by virtue of the probe-target reaction).
  • the enhancer's effect on a nonlinear-active label can be made at an interface (e.g., air-water or solid-liquid) or in bulk phase under the application of an electric field (EFISH).
  • EFISH electric field
  • the nonlinear activity of a system can also be manipulated through the introduction of nonlinear analogues to molecular beacons, that is, molecular beacon probes that have been modified to inco ⁇ orate a nonlinear-active label (or modulator thereof) instead of fluorophores and quenchers.
  • nonlinear optical analogues of molecular beacons are referred to herein as molecular beacon analogues (MB analogues or MBA).
  • MB analogues to be used in the invention can be synthesized according to procedures known to one of ordinary skill in the art.
  • the MB analogue probes can be used according to the present invention as hybridization probes that can report the presence of complementary nucleic acid targets without having to separate probe-target hybrids from excess probes in hybridization assays and without the need to label the targets.
  • Target labeling is not only time-consuming, but it can change the levels of targets originally present in a sample.
  • MB analogue probes can also be used for the detection of RNAs within living cells, for monitoring the synthesis of specific nucleic acids in sealed reaction vessels, and for the construction of self-reporting oligonucleotide arrays. They can be used to perform homogeneous one-tube assays for the identification of single-nucleotide variations in DNA and for the detection of pathogens or cells immobilized to surfaces for interfacial detection.
  • Figures 20A and 20B illustrate an embodiment of a MB analogue probe.
  • a species with a hype ⁇ olarizability capable of generating nonlinear optical radiation in response to illumination with one or more fundamental beams is attached to one end of a probe or at one location (e.g., a dye molecule, see Fig. 20B).
  • a species capable of increasing or decreasing the nonlinear optical radiation generated by a nonlinear-active label when the two species are in proximity is attached (e.g., a 10 nm gold particle, see Fig. 20B).
  • the attachment can be via a covalent bond or through some other well known means in the art.
  • the nonlinear-active label is an organic dye with a hype ⁇ olarizability such as the well known oxazole dyes and their derivatives.
  • the oxazole dyes and their derivatives are commercially available from Molecular Probes (Eugene, OR) for attachment to a variety of probes including nucleic acids using amine and sulfhydryl chemistries.
  • a species such as a gold nanoparticle, well known for its ability to enhance the nonlinear optical radiation generated by a nonlinear-active species to which it is in proximity, can be used as the species capable of modulating the nonlinear optical radiation generated by the label.
  • the MB analogue probes can be immobilized to a solid surface such as a planar glass surface or to the surface of microspheres, or the MB analogue probes can be used in homogeneous solution and detected using an applied electric field in an EFISH measurement. If the MB As are immobilized to a surface, the nonlinear-active species becomes at least partially oriented at the surface and satisfies the non-centrosymmetric condition required for surface-selective nonlinear optical techniques.
  • the Au nanoparticle can enhance the intensity of nonlinear optical radiation, such as second harmonic generation scattered by the oxazole dye by several orders of magnitude when the nanoparticle and oxazole dye are in proximity to each other.
  • the intensity of the nonlinear optical radiation decreases and this decrease can be quantitatively related to the amount of probe-target hybridization.
  • the sensitivity of the technique is determined by, among other factors, the background nonlinear optical signal before hybridization occurs.
  • the sequences of various targets used for testing the degree of hybridization to the probe in Fig. 20B are Target 1 - 4 in Figure 20 (SEQ ID NOs: 1 - 4 respectively).
  • the present invention can be used for detection of single nucleotide polymo ⁇ hisms (SNPs) in target samples because the MBA probes are highly selective in their binding of targets and a one base pair difference in sequence between probes and targets yields a much reduced hybridization affinity compared with a target that is perfectly complementary.
  • the MBA probe can act also as a label.
  • the present invention relates to a method for detecting interactions between biological components in an applied external force field using a nonlinear optical technique. In one aspect of the present invention this relates to detection of binding between probes and targets that result in a conformational change.
  • the invention discloses methods for screening one or more probes in an applied external force field.
  • the invention also discloses methods for screening modulators of the probe-target binding interaction, and for determining the degree or extent of binding in an applied external force field through the conformational changes the binding induces.
  • test molecules are also referred to as "targets”
  • candidate binding partners are also referred to herein as "probes.”
  • Probe-target binding in an external force field i) Probe-target binding an external force field that results in a conformational change in the probe, target or both, ii) Probe-target binding an external force field that results in a change in the dipole moment of a nonlinear-active species, said species being the probe, target or both, as a result of probe-target binding.
  • Probe-target binding an external force field can also result in a combination of both conformational and dipole moment changes.
  • probe-target interactions can occur at an interface, in bulk phase (homogeneous phase), or in regions that comprise a combination of interface and bulk.
  • the external field can be used to produce a non-centrosymmetric region of oriented nonlinear-active molecules or particles at an interface, in homogeneous phase, or some combination thereof.
  • the external field can be an electric field, a magnetic field (if the nonlinear-active molecules or particles possess a magnetic susceptibility), or a fluid flow field (the flow friction acts to partially orient the nonlinear active molecules or particles), for example.
  • the probes and targets may not need to be derivatized with labels or modulators for use with the present invention, so that a label-less, homogeneous assay can be achieved, based on the intrinsic hype ⁇ olarizability and nonlinear modulating properties of the probes and targets.
  • the present invention can be applied to an ensemble of molecules or to a single molecule - i.e., ensemble reaction measurements or a single-molecule reaction measurement.
  • the target is a G protein-coupled receptor (GPCR).
  • GPCRs are one class of proteins that undergo a conformational change when activated by a ligand and are thus amenable to study using the present invention.
  • the GPCR is not intrinsically nonlinear-active, the protein is labeled using a nonlinear-active label, and the conformational change is detected or queried for via a change in the orientation of the nonlinear-active label.
  • the GPCRs can be attached to a surface and the conformational change that results when a ligand activates the receptor causes a change in the orientation of the label and thus a change in properties of the nonlinear optical beams (e.g., second harmonic generation) such as intensity, wavelength or polarization.
  • a background signal can be measured before exposure of the sample to a ligand, if desired.
  • binding of a component to a receptor can lead to a change in measured nonlinear optical properties even though the receptor is not activated. For example, this can be due to an interaction between the component and the receptor in the bound complex which alters the orientation of a label attached to the receptor.
  • a control can be performed, if desired, to assign measured changes in nonlinear optical properties to binding or activation of components to a given receptor.
  • a component which is known to bind to a given receptor but not to produce a conformational change can be used as a control of the label reaction; if any measured change in label orientation is due only to receptor activation, the position of the label can be changed by changing the conjugation chemistry of the label and/or genetically modifying the receptor to introduce new labeling sites.
  • receptors can be labeled with a nonlinear-active label that possesses, on average, an orientation (or orientation of hype ⁇ olarizability) of some angle ⁇ with respect of the surface plane (e.g., host cell membrane).
  • the average label angle can shift to angle ⁇ with respect to the surface plane.
  • Even small shifts in angle as a result of receptor binding or activation can cause substantial changes in a property of the measured nonlinear optical light (e.g., intensity of the nonlinear light).
  • the percentage change of intensity upon a shift is: [cos( ⁇ )/cos( ⁇ )] 2 with the nonlinear intensity dependent quadratically on the normal component of the hype ⁇ olarizability.
  • the nonlinear optical intensity will decrease about 9%.
  • some experimentation may be required to determine the optimal labeling strategy and/or use of enhancers or decorators for a given measurement.
  • the coupling chemistry, reaction conditions, etc may need to be adjusted empirically to determine the optimal labeling strategy.
  • the target molecules can be solubilized and, using their intrinsic dipole moments, poled in solution (i.e., homogeneous) phase by an electric field, magnetic field or as a result of fluid flow; if the target possesses a hype ⁇ olarizability (i.e., is nonlinear-active, either intrinsically or made so by attachment of a nonlinear-active label), a nonlinear optical signal can be generated, e.g, via the EFISH technique, and this signals serves as the background.
  • a ligand i.e., a probe
  • a conformational change will occur.
  • this conformational change does not result in an appreciable dipole moment change in the target molecule, the number and net orientation of the target molecules will not change appreciably. If, however, this conformational change is passed to the nonlinear-active moiety, its overall orientation will change, resulting in a change in measured nonlinear optical properties. If the binding of a ligand to the target molecules results in an appreciable dipole moment change of the nonlinear-active target molecule, the number of aligned target molecules in the applied field will change, resulting in change in measured nonlinear optical properties. The number of aligned molecules in an applied external field, e.g, and electric field magnetic field or as a result of fluid flow, in solution is dependent on the dipole moment of the molecules.
  • N N 0 exp(- ⁇ E/kT) where N is the number of aligned species, ⁇ is their dipole moment, E is the electric field magnitude parallel to the dipole moment, No the number of molecules exposed to the field, k is the Boltzmann constant and T is the temperature in Kelvin. Changes in dipole moment as a result of probe-target interactions can lead to large changes in the number of aligned molecules and thus large changes in the intensity of nonlinear optical light generated by the molecules.
  • a probe with a nonlinear-active label and a given dipole moment binds to a target; the resulting probe-target complex with a larger or smaller dipole moment leads to a change in intensity of the generated nonlinear light.
  • Measured changes as a result of binding can also be used to calculate binding conformations between molecules if the position and amount of charge is well known on each molecule (e.g., as is often the case with proteins, whose crystal structure is known).
  • targets and probes can both be DNA oligonucleotides.
  • the target strand is labeled with a second harmonic-active label and the probe (complementary) strand with a modulator, a gold nanoparticle, for instance.
  • An external field e.g. electric field, magnetic field, or as a result of fluid flow, is applied to a sample containing targets, resulting in a nonlinear optical signal as background.
  • the probe oligos are added to the sample and when the probe strands hybridize to the target strands, the gold nanoparticle will change the nonlinear optical properties of the label - for example, the hype ⁇ olarizability of the label can be decreased or increased, or the frequency response of the label can be shifted, thereby allowing for detection in intensity or a shift of the nonlinear optical spectrum of the sample.
  • dipole moment direction and magnitude can change after the binding reaction.
  • One oligonucleotide is labeled with a nonlinear-active label; the complementary strand is unlabeled.
  • An external electric field is applied to the labeled strand, producing a background nonlinear optical signal.
  • the dipole moment of the labeled complex is changed and, through interaction with the electric field, causes a change in the number of oriented and labeled species and thus a change in the physical properties of the nonlinear optical light (e.g., intensity).
  • probes are detected using a surface-selective nonlinear optical technique by application of an electric field.
  • fatty acids in a flow-through cell passing through an electric field become partially oriented by the electric field, leading to a change in the nonlinear optical response within the affected region, and in turn leading to a detectable change in nonlinear optical properties of this region.
  • the nonlinear optical light can be placed transverse to the applied electric field to probe for the presence and amount of some probe (analyte) of interest in the flow-through cell.
  • the probes can be pre-labeled with a nonlinear-active label (for instance, a label specific for the chemical nature of the analyte: e.g., a fatty acid-specific nonlinear-active label) - in the case of using labels, the label contributes a hype ⁇ olarizability and a nonlinear susceptibility (when oriented by the applied electric field) leading to quantitative detection of the analyte.
  • a nonlinear-active label for instance, a label specific for the chemical nature of the analyte: e.g., a fatty acid-specific nonlinear-active label
  • the analyte can be detected directly without the need for labels due to intrinsic hype ⁇ olarizability, or detected indirectly through the use of indicators present in the probe region which become oriented in the presence of oriented analytes, i.e., the net orientation of the indicators is changed by the presence of oriented analytes.
  • probe-target interactions comprising an ion channel as a probe are studied via a surface-selective nonlinear optical technique as a function of applied electric field.
  • cells, membranes, vesicles or other phases contaimng ion channels are exposed to drugs, signalling molecules, neurotransmitters or other targets which modulate or otherwise affect the ion channel properties or states; the sample is placed in an electric field - for example, using a sandwich structure using two indium tin oxide elctrodes separated by a spacer (Fig. 17). Ion channel properties can be monitored using labels, indocators, polarization of water or solvent molecules.
  • Indicators can be used to detect changes in cell surface potential and charge density (in real time) due to ion channel dynamics - in response to binding of drugs directly to an ion channel receptor or to a second messenger in the membrane, for example.
  • Advantages of the use of indicators are that, 1) unlike the fast- response dyes used in fluorescence detection, the nonlinear properties of the sample are determined mainly by orientation effects - not by changes in transmembrane potential and 2) slow-response dyes used in fluorescence detection of ion channel properties exhibit their changes in fluorescence much more slowly - and therefore potentially important information about transient ion channel states is not accessible.
  • the change in fluorescence is small; the nonlinear optical technique of the present invention offers both fast time response (real time) and large changes and without the need for staining of the membrane.
  • the intrinsic effect of an external electric field on the signal of indicators in the nonlinear optical technique of the present invention is smaller than that on the fluorescence-based dyes - due in part because the polarization of water molecules, indicators, etc. to changes in surface potential and charge density is due to ionic current effects rather than to direct interactions with the applied electric field - in contrast to the case with the dyes used in fluorescence-based detection of ion channel properties.
  • an electric field can be applied across a surface to discriminate between targets which have bound to surface-attached probes from non-bound targets wherein targets, probes or both are labeled with a nonlinear-active moiety.
  • a surface holds attached probes and targets are examined for binding against the surface-attached probes using, for example, nonlinear active labels attached to the targets (patent pending, J. Salafsky) or indicators in the target medium.
  • An electric field can enhance the amount of oriented labels or indicators near a surface: in one embodiment of this, targets labeled with nonlinear active labels are examined for studying probe-target binding at an interface; an electric field placed across the interface is pulsed in time.
  • a brief increase in the intensity of the nonlinear optical radiation is observed due to an increase in orientation of the labels; this will be rapidly followed by a randomization of the labels not attached to a probe-bound target (giving a reduction in the nonlinear optical radiation intensity); a slower randomization process will occur for those labels attached to probe- bound targets at the surface.
  • detection of surface-bound targets can be temporally separated from the non-bound targets.
  • cells containing receptors of interest are cultured on a solid surface.
  • a nonlinear optical indicator is placed in the buffer in contact with the cells.
  • An electric field is applied across the surface, producing a background nonlinear optical signal.
  • a ligand which binds to and causes a signaling response in a cell-surface receptor (e.g., an ion channel)
  • the net orientation of the indicators changes, thus causing a change in the intensity of the measured nonlinear optical signal.
  • Ion channel proteins are examples of another important class of proteins that undergo conformational change in response to activation and are also amenable to study using the present invention.
  • Nonlinear optical techniques are also coherent techniques, meaning that the fundamental and nonlinear beams have well-defined phase relationships, and the wavefronts of a nonlinear beam in a macroscopic sample (within the coherence length) are in phase. These properties offer a number of advantages useful for surface or high-throughput studies in which, for example, either a single surface or a microarray surface is examined.
  • An apparatus using nonlinear optical suface-selective-based detection, such as with second harmonic generation requires minimal collection optics since generation of the nonlinear light only occurs at the interface and thus, in principle, allows extremely high depth discrimination and fast scanning.
  • Probe-target interactions - in homogeneous phase or at an interface - or their effects can be correlated, for example, to the following measurable information using the present invention: i) the intensity of the nonlinear or fundamental light.
  • the advantages of the present invention are enumerated as follows: i) Sensitive and direct dependence on the orientation and/or dipole moment of the nonlinear-active species in a sample, useful for detection of conformational changes in probes and binding that results in an appreciable change in the dipole moment of the nonlinear-active species (i.e., probe, target or both), ii) Higher signal to noise (lower background) than fluorescence-based detection since surface-selective nonlinear optical light is generated only at surfaces that create a non- centrosymmetric situation, or in homogeneous phase under application of an electric field to induce the non-centrosymmetry.
  • Nonlinear optical light detection of a surface has a very narrow 'depth of field' .
  • Sources of fluorescence in fluorescence-based detection schemes include that from materials in the field of view but not in the focal plane, autofluorescence, and contamination of the emitted fluorescence with stray excitation light; these are not sources of background nonlinear optical radiation.
  • the nonlinear optical technique is useful when the presence of a liquid solution is required for the measurement, i.e. where the binding process can be obviated or disturbed by a wash-away step.
  • This aspect of the invention can be useful for equilibrium measurements (free energy, binding constants, etc.), which require the presence of bulk species or kinetics measurements with measurements made over a period of time, iv) Lower photobleaching and heating effects than those that occur in fluorescence - the two-photon abso ⁇ tion cross-section is much lower than the one-photon cross-section in a molecule and the nonlinear optical technique comprises scattering, not abso ⁇ tion. v) A minimum of collection optics is needed and higher signal to noise is expected since the fundamental and nonlinear beams (e.g.,, second harmonic) have well-defined incoming and outgoing directions with respect to the interface.
  • fundamental and nonlinear beams e.g., second harmonic
  • arrays can be constructed according a plurality of methods found in the art.
  • most are prepared with one of three non-standard approaches (S.C. Case-Green et al., Curr. Opin. Chem. Biol. 2 (1998), 404): Affymetrix, Inc. probe anays are prepared using patterned, light-directed combinatorial chemical synthesis (S.A. Fodor, Science 277 (1997), 393); spotted anays can be made according to D.H. Duggan et al., Nature Genet. 21 (Suppl.) (1999), 10; M. Schena et al., Science 270 (1995), 467; P.O. Brown and D.
  • ink-jet techniques can also be used to synthesize oligonucleotides base by base through sequential solution- based reactions on an appropriate substrate (A.P. Blanchard et al., Biosens. And Bioelectron. 11 (1996) 687- relevant portions of all of which references are inco ⁇ orated by reference herein).
  • nucleic acid, oligo- or nucleotide anays can be constructed according to Pat. No. 6,110,426, Pat. No. 5,143,8546,110,426- relevant portions of which are inco ⁇ orated by reference herein, Pat. No. 5,143,854- relevant portions of which are inco ⁇ orated by reference herein or Fodor et al., "Light-directed Spatially-addressable Parallel Chemical Synthesis," Science, 1991, 251, 767-773.
  • Soluble protein anays can be constructed according to R. Ekins, F.W. Chu, Trends in Biotechnology, 1999, 17, 217, relevant portions of which are inco ⁇ orated by reference herein.
  • Membrane proteins arrays can be constucted by micropatterning of fluid lipid membranes according, for example, to the method of Groves, J.T., Ulman, N., Boxer, S.G., "Micropatterning fluid bilayers on solid supports", Science, 1997, 275, 651-3 (relevant portions of which are inco ⁇ orated by reference herein).
  • the array substrate can be composed of glass, silicon, indium tin oxide, or any other substrate known in the art.
  • the surface anay under study can contain physical barriers between elements so that the elements (and their biomolecules) can remain in isolation from each other during a chemical reaction step.
  • the anay locations can consist of different probes, the same probes everywhere, or some combination thereof.
  • the array can also be constructed on the underside of a prism allowing for total internal reflection of the beam and evanescent generation of the nonlinear light. Or an anay substrate can be brought into contact with a prism with the same result.
  • An electrophoretic system can also be used in conjunction with the surface anay, for example to deliver reagents or biological components to one or a plurality of locations using flow channels or microcapillaries.
  • the sample can include an anay of microcapiUary channels, each distinct from the other and each allowing a target-probe reaction to occur; the imaging technique would then consist of anay elements, each one a microcapiUary channel or reaction chamber into which the channel feeds or drains.
  • the polarization of the fundamental and nonlinear beams can be selected with polarizing optics elements.
  • Detection can be accomplished with the use of multiple internal reflection plates (NJ.
  • oligonucleotides are targets or probes
  • a nonlinear-active label is attached to the 5' or 3' termini.
  • linking moieties and methodologies for attaching molecules which can be nonlinear-active labels to the 5' or 3' termini of oligonucleotides as exemplified by the following references: Eckstein, editor, Oligonucleotides and Analogues: A Practical Approach (IRL Press, Oxford, 1991); Zuckerman etal., Nucleic Acids Research, 15: 5305-5321 (1987) (3' thiol group on oligonucleotide); Sharma et al., Nucleic Acids Research, 19: 3019 (1991) (3' sulfhydryl); Giusti et al., PCR Methods and Applications, 2: 223-227 (1993) and Fung et al., U.S.
  • linking moieties are employed that can be used to a label to an oligonucleotide during synthesis, e.g., available from Clontech Laboratories (Palo Alto, Cafil.).
  • rhodamine and fluorescein dyes can be conveniently attached to the 5' hydroxyl of an oligonucleotide at the conclusion of solid phase synthesis by way of dyes derivatized with a phosphoramidite moiety, e.g., Woo et al., U.S. Pat. No. 5,231, 191; and Hobbs, Jr., U.S. Pat. No. 4,997,928, relevant portions of which are inco ⁇ orated by reference herein.
  • the oligonucleotides are present on arrays.
  • Protein arrays can be used to determine whether a given target protein binds to the immobilized probe protein on the surface; these anays can also be used to study small molecule binding to the probe proteins.
  • Protein anays can be prepared by the method of G. MacBeath and S.L. Schreiber, "Printing Proteins as Microanays for High-Throughput Function Determination", Science 2000, 289, 1760-1763, for example, to determine whether a given target protein binds to the immobilized probe protein on the surface.
  • the surface on which the probes are formed may be composed from a wide range of material, either biological, non-biological, organic, inorganic, or a combination of any of these, existing as particles, strands, precipitates, gels, sheets, tubing, spheres, containers, capillaries, pads, slices, films, plates, slides, etc.
  • the surface may have any convenient shape, such as a disc, square, sphere, circle, etc.
  • the surface is preferably flat but may take on a variety of alternative surface configurations.
  • the surface may contain raised or depressed regions on which a sample is located.
  • the surface and its surface preferably form a rigid support on which the sample can be formed.
  • the surface and its surface are also chosen to provide appropriate light-absorbing characteristics.
  • the surface may be a polymerized Langmuir Blodgett film, functionalized glass, Si, Ge, GaAs, GaP, Si x Oy, Si x N y , modified silicon, or any one of a wide variety of gels or polymers such as (poly)tetrafluoroethylene, (poly)vinylidenedifluoride, polystyrene, polycarbonate, or combinations thereof.
  • gels or polymers such as (poly)tetrafluoroethylene, (poly)vinylidenedifluoride, polystyrene, polycarbonate, or combinations thereof.
  • Other surface materials will be readily apparent to those of skill in the art upon review of this disclosure.
  • the surface is flat glass or silica.
  • the surface of the substrate is etched using well known techniques to provide for desired surface features. For example, by way of the formation of trenches, v-grooves, mesa stractures, or the like, the synthesis regions may be more closely placed within the focus point of impinging light.
  • the surface may also be provided with reflective "minor" structures for maximization of emission collected therefrom.
  • the chemical identity of the probes can vary from site to site across the solid surface, or the same probe can uniformly cover the surface.
  • Targets can be of a single identity or a combination of targets with different identities.
  • the kinetics of probe-target binding reactions are measured as a function of target concentration.
  • the time course of the intensity and/or spectrum of the nonlinear optical light are measured.
  • the measured information is converted into a time course of bound target concentration (e.g., probe-target concentration in mM/s or ⁇ M/s).
  • Drugs or modulators of the probe-target binding equilibrium or kinetic rate of formation can be used so as to compare the effect of the added substance on the probe- target reactions.
  • targets are labeled with nonlinear active moieties are examined for binding against surface-attached probes.
  • an external force field e.g., an electric field, magnetic field or as a result of fluid flow, is applied, causing the labels associated with targets both bound and non-bound to transiently orient and therefore causing a measurable change in a physical property of the nonlinear radiation (e.g., intensity of the light).
  • the return to a more random orientation of the labels will be different for the population that is bound to surface-attached probes compared with those targets not bound in the bulk — this is because the binding of the targets to probes at the nterface reduces conformational freedom and thus restricts the rate at which labels can re-randomize in orientation.
  • the signals due to (the labels of) probe- bound targets can be temporally separated from those due to non-bound targets.
  • a delta function in external electric field is applied across the interface at some instant To (or at many instants) during the probe-target reaction.
  • Patent 6,124,102 for a substrate containing an anay of attached probes and for the analysis of scans to determine kinetic and equilibrium properties of a binding reaction between probes and targets; Kain et al., U.S. Patent 5,847,400 for laser scanning of a substrate; King et al., U.S. Patent 5,432,610 for an optical resonance cavity for power build-up; Walt et al., U.S. Patent 5,320,814, Walt et al., U.S. Patent 5,250,264, Walt et al., U.S. Patent 5,298,741, Walt et al., U.S. Patent 5,252,494, Walt et al., U.S. Patent 6,023,540, Walt et al, U.S.
  • Patent 5,814,524 Walt et al., U.S. Patent 5,244,813 for fiberoptic-based apparatus; Fiekowsky et al., U.S. Patent 6,095,555 for imaging and software- based analysis of images; Stern et al., U.S. Patent 5,631,734 for data acquisition; Stimson et al., U.S. Patent 6,134,002 for confocal imaging techniques; Sampas, U.S. Patent 6,084,991 for CCD-based imaging techniques; Stern et al., U.S. Patent 5,631,734 for photolithographical preparation of probes attached to surfaces; Shalon et al., U.S.
  • Patent 6,110,426 for methods and apparatus for creating attached probes on a surface
  • Slettnes U.S. Patent 6,040,586 for position-based scanning techniques
  • Trulson et al U.S. Patent 6,025,601 for methods of imaging probe-target binding on a surface.
  • the photoresist in the unmasked areas is removed.
  • the entire photolithographically defined surface is uniformly coated with a hydrophobic substance such as an organosilane that binds both to the areas of exposed glass and the areas covered with the photoresist.
  • the photoresist is then stripped from the glass surface, exposing an anay of spots of exposed glass.
  • the glass plate then is washed with an organosilane having terminal hydrophilic groups or chemically reactable groups such as amino groups.
  • the hydrophobic organosilane binds to the spots of exposed glass with the resulting glass plate having an anay of hydrophilic or reactable spots (located in the areas of the original photoresist) across a hydrophobic surface.
  • the array of spots of hydrophilic groups provides a substrate for non-specific and non-covalent binding of certain cells, including those of neuronal origin (Klienfeld et al., J. Neurosci. 8:4098-4120, 1988).
  • Reactive ion etching has been similarly used on the surface of silicon wafers to produce surfaces patterned with two different types of texture (Craighead et al., Appl. Phys. Lett. 37:653, 1980-relevant portions of which are inco ⁇ orated by reference herein; Craighead et al., J. Vac. Sci. Technol. 20:316, 1982-relevant portions of which are inco ⁇ orated by reference herein; Suh et al. Proc. SPIE 382:199, 1983-relevant portions of which are inco ⁇ orated by reference herein).
  • photoresist stamping is used to produce a gold surface coated with protein adso ⁇ tive alkanethiol.
  • the bare gold surface is then coated with polyethylene-terminated alkanethiols that resist protein adso ⁇ tion.
  • a cell-binding protein found in the extracellular matrix living hepatocytes attach uniformly to, and grow upon, the laminin coated islands (Singhvi et al. 1994).
  • More specific uniform cell-binding can be achieved by chemically crosslinking specific molecules, such as proteins, to reactable sites on the patterned substrate (Aplin and Hughes, Analyt. Biochem. 113:144-148, 1981).
  • Another elaboration of substrate patterning optically creates an anay of reactable spots.
  • a glass plate is washed with an organosilane that chemisorbs to the glass to coat the glass.
  • the organosilane coating is inadiated by deep UV light through an optical mask that defines a pattern of an anay. The inadiation cleaves the Si- -C bond to form a reactive Si radical. Reaction with water causes the Si radicals to form polar silanol groups.
  • the polar silanol groups constitute spots on the anay and are further modified to couple other reactable molecules to the spots, as disclosed in U.S. Pat. No. 5,324,591 , inco ⁇ orated by reference herein.
  • a silane containing a biologically functional group such as a free amino moiety can be reacted with the silanol groups.
  • the free amino groups can then be used as sites of covalent attachment for biomolecules such as proteins, nucleic acids, carbohydrates, and lipids.
  • the resulting anay of cells or surface-attached cell layer is uniform, since the biochemically specific molecules are bound to the micro-patterned chemical anay uniformly.
  • cells bind to the anay of hydrophilic spots and/or specific molecules attached to the spots, which, in turn, bind cells.
  • cells bind to all spots in the array in the same manner.
  • cells bind to the array of spots of free amino groups by adhesion. Methods for attaching a variety of cell types to the same substrate for simultaneously binding against these cell types also exist and can be used.
  • Nucleic acid arrays are useful in a number of biological and clinical studies in which one or more genes are analyzed in parallel using the anay. Genetic disease is often caused by genes that are inappropriately transcribed ⁇ either too much or too little — or which are missing altogether. Such defects are especially common in cancers, which can occur when regulatory genes are deleted, inactivated, or become constitutively active. Unlike some . genetic diseases (e.g. cystic fibrosis) in which a single defective gene is always responsible, cancers that appear clinically similar can be genetically heterogeneous. For example, prostate cancer (prostatic adenocarcinoma) may be caused by several different, independent regulatory gene defects even in a single patient. In a group of prostate cancer patients, every ⁇ one may have a different set of missing or damaged genes, with differing implications for prognosis and treatment of the disease.
  • prostatic adenocarcinoma may be caused by several different, independent regulatory gene defects even in a single patient. In a group of prostate cancer patients, every
  • Comparative hybridization can serve two pu ⁇ oses in studying cancer: it can pinpoint the transcription differences responsible for the change from normal to cancerous cells, and it can distinguish different patterns of abnormal transcription in heterogeneous cancers. Understanding the diverse basis of a cancer is crucial for inventing therapies targeted to the different varieties of the disease, so that each patient receives the most appropriate and effective treatment. Cancers are common examples of genetically heterogeneous diseases, but they are by no means the only ones. Diabetes, heart disease, and multiple sclerosis are among the diseases for which genetic risk factors are known to be heterogeneous.
  • peptide nucleic acids or oligomers which are analogs of nucleic acids in which, for example, the peptide-like backbone is replaced with an uncharged backbone, can be used with the present invention.
  • PNAs are well known in the art. References below give extensive reviews of the use of these nucleic acid analogs in a wide range of applications, including surface and anay-based hybridization wherein PNAs are attached to surfaces and allowed to bind with sequence-complementary DNAs or RNAs.
  • oligomers of PNA can be used as the surface-attached probe components instead of DNA oligomers.
  • a key advantage to using PNAs is that the hybridization reaction with DNAs or RNAs, for example, (containing charged phosphate groups) is only weakly dependent (eg., the melting temperature) on ionic strength because there is much less charge repulsion as found with conventional DNA-DNA, etc. hybridization. Thus, one can use the surface-selective nonlinear optical technique to follow a probe-target hybridization at any desired ionic strength.
  • the PNAs are commercially available (for instance via Applied Biosystems, Foster City, CA) or other analogs of DNA can be synthesized and used. The following references are broad reviews of the use of PNAs:
  • PNA protein nucleic acids
  • PNAs protein nucleic acids
  • PNA Peptide Nucleic Acid
  • PNA protein nucleic acid
  • PNA protein nucleic acid
  • Figure 1 illustrates an embodiment wherein second harmonic light is generated by reflecting incident fundamental light from the surface.
  • Light source 5 provides the fundamental light necessary to generate second harmonic light at the sample. Typically this will be a picosecond or femtosecond laser, either wavelength-tunable or not tunable, and commercially available.
  • Light at the fundamental frequency ( ⁇ ) exits the laser and its polarization is selected using, for example a half-wave plate 10 appropriate to the frequency and intensity of the light (eg., available from Melles Griot, Oriel or Newport Co ⁇ .).
  • the beam is then focused by lens 15 and passes through a pass filter 20 designed to pass the fundamental light but block the nonlinear light (eg., second harmonic).
  • This filter is used to prevent back-reflection of the second harmonic beam into the laser cavity which can cause disturbances in the lasing properties.
  • the beam is reflected from a minor 25 and impinges at a specific location and with a specific angle ⁇ on the surface.
  • the minor 25 can be scanned if required using a galvanometer-controlled minor scanner, a rotating polygonal minor scanner, a Bragg diffractor, acousto-optic deflector, or other means known in the art to allow control of a minor's position.
  • the sample surface 30 can be mounted on an x-y translation stage 35 (computer controlled) to select a specific location on the surface for generation of the second harmonic beam.
  • the surface can be glass, plastic, silicon or any other solid surface that reflects the fundamental or second harmonic beams.
  • the sample surface can be enclosed and the surface in contact with liquid.
  • the sample 30 can be fed or drained by microcapiUary or other liquid-transporting channels (not shown), pumps or electrophoretic elements, and these devices can be computer-controlled.
  • the fundamental and the second harmonic outgoing beams (at specific angles with respect to the surface, i.e. ⁇ - they are typically nearly colinear in direction) then reflected from the surface and the fundamental is filtered using a pass-filter 45 for the second harmonic beam, leaving only the harmonic beam (2 ⁇ ).
  • the second harmonic is reflected from minor 40, its polarization selected if necessary by polarizing optic 50, and is focused using a lens 55 onto a detector 60.
  • the lenses 15 and 55 can also be any combination of lenses known in the art for focusing or beam shaping. If required, a monochromator 60 can also be used to select a specific wavelength within the spectral band of the second harmonic beam.
  • the detector can be a photomultiplier tube, a CCD anay, or any other detector device known in the art for high sensitivity. For instance, a photomultiplier tube operated in single-photon counting mode can be used. At the detector, the light generates a voltage proportional to its intensity. Data is recorded for each location on the anay surface as it is translated by the stage, scanned (or a combination thereof) and an image is built up of the second harmonic intensity generated from each region on the surface.
  • Applicant envisions the use of sum or difference frequencies, where an apparatus set- up similar to Fig. 1 could be used, with the single light source 5 replaced by two light sources with two fundamental light beams at frequencies ⁇ l5 and ⁇ 2 .
  • a single element or more than one in parallel can be addressed with the fundamental light.
  • detection can be made on a single element or many in parallel depending on the specific apparatus set-up.
  • Figure 2 illustrates an embodiment in which total internal reflection (evanescent wave generation) is used to generate the second harmonic light.
  • Fundamental light ( ⁇ ) is directed on to the surface of a prism element 70.
  • the beam is refracted at position (a) and passes through the prism, through an index matching film 75 and impinges on substrate 80.
  • Prism 70 and substrate 80 are made of optically transparent materials and are preferably of the same type.
  • Prism 70 can be a Dove prism or any other element which can support evanescent fields (eg., waveguides, fibers and thin metallic films).
  • the refractive index matching film 75 can be an oil, but is preferably a compressible optical polymer such as those disclosed by Sjodin, "Optical interface means", PCT publication WO 90/05317, 1990.
  • the prism 75 and the substrate 80 can also be a unitary, integral piece made of the same material (i.e, without the index matching film).
  • An evanescent wave is generated at the interface between 80 and the medium in sample compartment 85 according to the indices of refraction in 80 and 85 and the angle of incidence of the beam at their interface.
  • the electric field amplitude decays exponentially away from the substrate surface with a 1/e length ranging from nanometers to microns depending on several factors, including the surface electric potential, the counterion density in the sample compartment (if any).
  • the sample compartment can be filled with air, a gas, or a liquid such as a solution or water.
  • the 'x' marks on the surface of 80 facing the sample compartment emphasize that the sample of interest (eg., fabricated probes) are placed on this side.
  • Substrate 80 can be a 'chip' which can be slid out between 75 and 85, allowing for measurement of different substrates.
  • Element 90 in the drawing refers to a port in the sample compartment for drawing liquid or gases in and out of the compartment, for instance by pumps, electrostatic means, etc.
  • the entire sample assembly can be mounted on an x-y translation stage 95 if necessary.
  • Figure 3 illustrates an embodiment in which a slab-dielectric waveguide is used to deliver the fundamental light to the sample surface (the light beams are generated, directed and detected as in Drawing I with elements 1-5 and 8-13).
  • a parallel plate or dielectric waveguide can be used to couple the fundamental light into a waveguide propagating mode.
  • the drawing shows two slabs (110 and 115) and region (120). If the indices of refraction of slab 115 and region 120 are less than the index of refraction of the light (for both fundamental and second harmonic), a waveguiding mode can be developed. This mode produces multiple internal reflections at the substrate which can be used to increase the amount of second harmonic light generated by the interface.
  • the fundamental beam 100 can be coupled into the waveguide 110 using a diffraction grating 105 scribed or embossed on the top surface of the waveguide, for example.
  • the fundamental is propagated along the length of the waveguide and makes multiple total internal reflections at the top and bottom surfaces.
  • the 'x' marks on substrate 110 denote the surface sample to be measured (i.e., containing the probes). If this interface generates significantly more second harmonic light than the interface between materials 110 and 115, the light intensity can be neglected.
  • SH-labeled targets are bound to immobilized probes at the 'x' locations and the atomic structure at the interface between 110 and 115 is epitaxially matched, the interface 110/120 will generate much more second harmonic light than the interface 110/115.
  • a planar waveguide structure 110 is used for the solid substrate ( Figure 3).
  • a thin layer of high index of refraction material 115 (the waveguide), such as TiO 2 or Ta 2 O 5 , is deposited on top of the substrate 110
  • Second harmonic light can be collected using lenses and filters and detected with either a PMT-type device or a CCD camera.
  • Figs. 4A-C illustrate an embodiment of a flow cell for ca ⁇ ying out probe-target reactions.
  • the flow cell is 3220 is shown in detail.
  • Fig. 4A is a front view
  • Fig. 4B is a cross sectional view
  • Fig. 4C is a back view of the cavity.
  • flow cell 3220 includes a cavity 3235 on a surface 4202 thereon.
  • the depth of the cavity for example, may be between about 10 and 1500 .mu.m, but other depths may be used.
  • the surface area of the cavity is greater than the size of the probe sample, which may be about 13 x 13 mm.
  • the refrigerated bath circulates water at a specified temperature into and through the cavity.
  • a plurality of slots 4208 may be formed around the cavity to thermally isolate it from the rest of the flow cell body. Because the thermal mass of the flow cell is reduced, the temperature within the cavity is more efficiently and accurately controlled.
  • a panel 4205 having a substantially flat surface divides the cavity into two subcavities.
  • Panel 4205 may be a light abso ⁇ tive glass such as an RG1000 nm long pass filter.
  • the high absorbance of the RG1000 glass across the visible spectrum substantially suppresses any background luminescence that may be excited by the incident wavelength.
  • the polished flat surface of the light-absorbing glass also reduces scattering of incident light, lessening the burden of filtering stray light at the incident wavelength.
  • the glass also provides a durable medium for subdividing the cavity since it is relatively immune to conosion in the high salt environment common in DNA hybridization experiments or other chemical reactions.
  • Panel 4205 may be mounted to the flow cell by a plurality of screws, clips, RTV silicone cement, or other adhesives.
  • subcavity 4260 which contains inlet port 4220 and outlet port 4230, is sealed by panel 4205. Accordingly, water from the refrigerated bath is isolated from cavity 3235.
  • This design provides separate cavities for conducting chemical reaction and controlling temperature. Since the cavity for controlling temperature is directly below the reaction cavity, the temperature parameter of the reaction is controlled more effectively.
  • Substrate 130 is mated to surface 4202 and seals cavity 3235.
  • the probe array on the substrate is contained in cavity 3235 when the substrate is mated to the flow cell, hi some embodiments, an O-ring 4480 or other sealing material may be provided to improve mating between the substrate and flow cell.
  • edge 4206 of panel 4205 is beveled to allow for the use of a larger seal cross section to improve mating without increasing the volume of the cavity.
  • a groove 4211 is optionally formed on surface 4202.
  • the groove for example, may be about 2 mm deep and 2 mm wide.
  • groove 4211 is covered by the substrate when it is mounted on surface 4202.
  • the groove communicates with channel 4213 and vacuum fitting 4212 which is connected to a vacuum pump.
  • the vacuum pump creates a vacuum in the groove that causes the substrate to adhere to surface 4202.
  • one or more gaskets may be provided to improve the sealing between the flow cell and substrate.
  • FIG. 4D illustrates a specific technique for mating the substrate to the flow cell.
  • a panel 4290 exerts a force that is sufficient to immobilize substrate 130 located therebetween.
  • Panel 4290 may be mounted by a plurality of screws 4291, clips, clamps, pins, or other mounting devices.
  • panel 4290 includes an opening 4295 for exposing the sample to the incident light. Opening 4295 may optionally be covered with a glass or other substantially transparent or translucent materials.
  • panel 4290 may be composed of a substantially transparent or translucent material.
  • panel 4205 includes ports 4270 and 4280 that communicate with subcavity 3235.
  • a tube 4271 is connected to port 4270 and a tube 4281 is connected to port 4280.
  • Tubes 4271 and 4281 are inserted through tubes 4221 and 4231, respectively, by connectors 4222.
  • Connectors 4222 may be T-connectors, each having a seal 4225 located at opening 4223. Seal 4225 prevents the water from the refrigerated bath from leaking out through the connector. It will be understood that other configurations, such as providing additional ports similar to ports 4220 and 4230, may be employed.
  • Tubes 4271 and 4281 allow selected fluids to be introduced into or circulated through the cavity.
  • tubes 4271 and 4281 may be connected to a pump for circulating fluids through the cavity.
  • tubes 4271 and 4281 are connected to an agitation system that agitates and circulates fluids through the cavity.
  • a groove 4215 is optionally formed on the surface 4203 of the flow cell.
  • the dimensions of groove may be about 2 mm deep and 2 mm wide.
  • surface 4203 is mated to the translation stage.
  • Groove 4211 is covered by the translation stage when the flow cell is mated thereto.
  • Groove 4215 communicates with channel 4217 and vacuum fitting 4216 which is connected to a vacuum pump. The pump creates a vacuum in groove 4215 and causes the surface 4203 to adhere to the translation stage.
  • additional grooves may be formed to increase the mating force.
  • the flow cell may be mounted on the translation stage by screws, clips, pins, various types of adhesives, or other fastening techniques.
  • a suspension of beads, cells, liposomes or other objects comprise the probes (130) as shown in Figures 5A-C.
  • the scattered nonlinear light from such a sample eg., an isotropic sample in which each individual beads or other objects are about a coherence length or farther apart - is generated in various directions with some distribution in intensity.
  • Fundamental light is transmitted through the suspension (130) and the nonlinear radiation collected.
  • a number of modes of collecting the scattered nonlinear light is available. For example, collection of the second harmonic can be in the forward direction (A), at a right angle to the fundamental light (B), or using an integrating sphere approach (C). Part C shows an integrating sphere 165 with the sample 150 placed inside.
  • Fundamental light enters the entrance port (170), passes through the sample (150), undergoes a reflection at the sphere wall, and is stopped by baffle (175).
  • the scattered second harmonic light is collected from the sphere surface through exit port (155) and coupled out of the sphere by a fiber optic line (160).
  • Cells are a convenient and natural system of study for conformational changes in receptors, cell surface molecules and other biological components. Beads can support phospholipid bilayers (eg., with membrane proteins) or probes such as proteins or nucleic acids can be attached to their surface. The beads provide a large amount of distributed surface area in the sample and can be a useful alternative to planar surface geometries, especially when the fundamental and nonlinear light is used in the transmission mode.
  • the excitation light is tranformed from a pointlike shape into some other shape using various optics.
  • the point-like beam shape of the fundamental beam can be transformed into a line shape, useful for scanning the sample surface.
  • the intensity of the nonlinear beam depends on, among other factors, the intensity of the fundamental (typically a quadratic dependence on the fundamental intensity), this transformation will result in less nonlinear light intensity generated at a given location.
  • the fundamental beam can be a microscope objective which has a magnification power of about 10 followed by a 150 mm achromat to coUimate the beam as well known in the prior art and as disclosed in detail in U.S. Pat. No. 5,834,758.
  • the fundamental light 180 is a beam of typically 2-3 mm diameter. This beam is directed through a microscope objective 185.
  • the objective which has a magnification power of 10, expands the beam to about 30 mm.
  • the beam then passes through a lens 190.
  • the lens which can be a 150 mm achromat, collimates the beam.
  • the radial intensity of the expanded collimated beam has a Gaussian profile.
  • a mask 195 can be inserted after lens 190 to mask the top and bottom of the beam, thereby passing only the central portion of the beam, h one embodiment, the mask passes a horizontal band that is about 7.5 mm.
  • the beam passes through a cylindrical lens 200 having a horizontal cylinder axis, which can be a 100 mm f.l. made by Melles Griot.
  • the cylindrical lens expands the beam spot vertically.
  • a hyperbolic lens can be used to expand the beam vertically while resulting in a flattened radial intensity distribution. From the cylindrical lens, the light passes through a lens 205.
  • a planar minor can be inserted after the cylindrical lens to reflect the excitation light toward lens 205.
  • the ratio of the focal lengths of the cylindrical lens 200 and lens 205 is approximately 1 :2, thus magnifying the beam to about 15 mm.
  • Lens 205 which in some embodiments is a 80 mm achromat, focuses the light to a line of about 15 mm x 50 microns at the sample surface 210.
  • probes are patterned in a two- dimensional anay (A, top view of anay on surface) where each region on the surface - ⁇ 1,35 ⁇ in this example — can be a different oligonucleotide or protein sequence (or a combination of the same and different sequences).
  • Part B shows a side-view of the sample surface (220) in a well (215) containing the targets (225) shown here as protein objects with second-harmonic-active labels (X) attached.
  • the well can hold liquid or buffer and serves to physically separate the contents of the well from other parts of the substrate or other elements in a substrate anay.
  • the fundamental light can be multiplexed and each resultant beam can be guided by individual minors to simultaneously scan different lines or regions within the anay, thus increasing even further the potential of the technique for high-throughput studies.
  • the method of Levicky et al. "Using Self- Assembly to Control the Structure of DNA Monolayers on Gold: A Neutron Reflectivity Study," Journal of the American Chemical Society 120: 9787-9792 (1998), or the method of Chrisey et al, "Covalent Attachment of Synthetic DNA to Self- Assembled Monolayer Films", Nucleic Acids Research 24, 3031, (1996), is used to attach the probe DNA to the substrate.
  • a fused silica or oxidized silicon substrate is used (230) and derivatized with N-(2-aminoethyl)-3-aminopropyltrimethoxysilane (EDA) (235).
  • the EDA-modified surface is then treated with the heterobifunctional crosslinker (SMPB), whose succinimide ester moiety reacts with the primary amino group of EDA (240).
  • SMPB heterobifunctional crosslinker
  • a thiol-D ⁇ A oligomer subsequently (245) of base-pair sequence (xzzy) (where 'xzzy' represents the entire sequence) reacts with the maleimide portion of the SMPB crosslinker, to yield the covalently bound species shown (250).
  • D ⁇ A oligo probes are attached to a substrate, e.g. in a microarray format.
  • D ⁇ A targets labeled with nonlinear active moieties are allowed to react from solution with these surface-attached probes.
  • Part (A) is a top-view of the substrate (255) with partitions or walls (260) separating the different well regions - in this example, 16 wells.
  • Part (B) shows a side-view of a well (265) with attached probes (270).
  • Such anays are commonly found in the art, such as the 96-well plates, etc. and are commercially available (Fisher Scientific, Inc. etc.)
  • a glass substrate surface can be coated with a layer of a reflective metal such as silver.
  • the metallic layer will increase nonlinear optical generation and collection.
  • Biomolecules or other particles can be attached to derivatized layers built on top of the metal.
  • the metal can be coated with a layer of silicon dioxide (SiO ), then with a layer of aminosilane such as 3-amino-octyl-trimethoxysilane.
  • Oligonucleotides or polynucleotides can then be attached to the aminosilane layer using linkers which connect the 3' or 5' end of the oligo to the amine group.
  • the oligos or polynucleotides can be adsorbed to the aminosilane layer.
  • Figure 10 illustrates an embodiment of this type where a glass substrate (275) is derivatized with a Ag layer (280). A thin coat of SiO 2 is then deposited on top of the silver layer (285) and derivatized with the aminosilane (290).
  • nucleic acid or PNA microa ⁇ ays can be obtained commercially or constructed according to public literature (eg., http://cmgm.stanford.edu pbrown/mguide/index.html).
  • the surface chemistry to be used is that found in Chrisey et al, "Covalent Attachment of Synthetic DNA to Self- Assembled Monolayer Films", Nucleic Acids Research 24, 3031, (1996), in which oligonucleotides are attached to self-assembled monolayer silane films on fused silica slides. Silanization is accomplished via N-(2-aminoethyl)-3-aminopropyltrimethoxysilane.
  • oligonucleotides or P ⁇ As can be attached to the solid substrate via light-directed synthesis (S.A. Fodor, Science 277 (1997), 393) or via chemical synthesis (e.g., Chrisey et al, "Covalent Attachment of Synthetic D ⁇ A to Self-Assembled Monolayer Films", Nucleic Acids Research 24, 3031, (1996)).
  • surfaces or microa ⁇ ays microanays of oligonucleotides or PNAs can be obtained commercially or constructed according to public literature (eg., http ://cmgm. Stanford, edu/pbrown/mguide/index.html) .
  • DNA microarrays can be obtained commercially or constructed, for example, according to public literature (e.g., http://cmgm.stanford.edu/pbrown/mguide/index.html).
  • the surface chemistry preferably to be used is that found in Chrisey et al. , "Covalent Attachment of Synthetic DNA to Self- Assembled Monolayer Films", Nucleic Acids Research 24, 3031, (1996), in which oligonucleotides are attached to self-assembled monolayer silane films on fused silica slides. Silanization is done via N-(2-aminoethy ⁇ )-3- aminopropyltrimethoxysilane.and Hoheisel, J.D.
  • a specific embodiment of the invention is the detection of targets binding or hybridizing to probes patterned in a microanay or array format on a substrate.
  • one of the problems with fluorescence-based methodology with DNA microanays is that the ratio of signal to background (specific to non-specific binding - often defined in the art as: [Signal - Background]/ [Standard Dev.(Background)] ) is quite low (3:1 - 5:1).
  • Using a surface-selective nonlinear optical technique which is sensitive to the net orientation of a label (surface density of oriented or partially oriented labels) - one can discriminate specific or non-specifically bound target DNA with more precision.
  • Microanays can be mounted on an x-y translation stage and driven by personal computer (PC control) using a motorized translator (acquired from Oriel, h e) or using one of the many procedures in the art (e.g., V.G. Cheung et al., "Making and reading microanays", Nature Genetics (Suppl.), 1999, 21: 15-19).
  • PC control personal computer
  • a motorized translator asquired from Oriel, h e
  • Microanays can be mounted on an x-y translation stage and driven by personal computer (PC control) using a motorized translator (acquired from Oriel, h e) or using one of the many procedures in the art (e.g., V.G. Cheung et al., "Making and reading microanays", Nature Genetics (Suppl.), 1999, 21: 15-19).
  • the invention can be used for studying binding processes between other biological components: cells with viruses; viruses with receptors (e.g., in membranes or purified), protein-protein interactions; protein-ligand; cell-ligand; protein- drugs, nucleic acid-drugs, cell-small molecule; cell-nucleic acid; peptide-cell, oligo or polynucleotides, virus-cell, protein-small molecule, etc.
  • Biomimetic membranes such as phospholipid supported bilayers (eg., egg phosphatidylcholine) can also be used and are particularly useful when studies comprise membrane proteins as probes.
  • the invention can be used for drug screening or high-throughput screening where a candidate drug is tested for its effect on probe-target binding, i.e., to reduce or enhance probe-target binding.
  • a drug can be tested for efficacy by its ability to bind to a receptor or other molecule on the surface of a biological cell.
  • the properties of a drug, small molecule or other moiety is examined for its effect on the properties or state of an ion channel - upon binding to it directly, or to a secondary messenger receptor in a cell membrane for example.
  • An indicator is used to optically detect changes in the cell surface potential and charge density (transiently if necessary) if the drug or other molecule (e.g., small molecule, agonist, antagonist, partial agonist, etc.) modulates the ion channel properties (e.g., opens, closes or blocks ion channels).
  • An applied electric field can be used to examine this probe-target reaction as a function of transmembrane electric potential. For example, one can study the binding of a drug to a G-coupled protein receptor using the modulation in associated ion channel properties it produces as a result of a binding interaction.
  • the invention is used for drug screening or high- throughput screening where a candidate drug is tested for its ability to activate or inhibit a probe (e.g., a receptor, ion channel protein, etc.).
  • a probe e.g., a receptor, ion channel protein, etc.
  • a drug candidate is tested for its ability to activate a conformational change in a probe - in this case, one seeks agonists of the probe.
  • compounds that are potential inhibitors of an agonist to a receptor are screened by testing for removal of a conformational change induced by the agonist when the receptor and agonist are also in the presence of an inhibitor candidate (the agonist can be a natural molecule, synthetic, etc.).
  • the properties or state of a voltage-gated or ligand- gated ion channel in a cell or liposome as a function of applied electric field can be measured using the present invention.
  • the cells can be in suspension (e.g., in a buffer) or attached to some surface.
  • An electric field is applied across the cells using a sandwich structure of indium tin oxide electrodes of the type, for example, depicted in Figure 17.
  • An indicator dye a substantially membrane-impermeant dye such as PyMPO, for example
  • the orientation of the dye at the cell surface produces a background signal in some physical property of the nonlinear radiation (e.g., intensity); this signal is modulated as ions flow into or out of ion channels as a function of applied electric field, drugs, second messenger signalling, etc.
  • An applied electric field across the sample of cells in the presence or absence of other stimuli of the ion channels - e.g., drugs, second messengers, ligands, neurotransmitters, small molecules, etc.
  • the present invention can be used to detect the properties of an ion channel as a function of applied electric field - analogous to the control one has in electrophysiological (e.g., patch clamping) techniques.
  • the nonlinear optical, surface-selective apparatus can comprise a unit without the light excitation source (e.g., with sample compartment, filters, detectors, monochromator, computer interface, software, or other parts) so that the user can supply his own excitation source and adapt its use to the methods described herein.
  • the light excitation source e.g., with sample compartment, filters, detectors, monochromator, computer interface, software, or other parts
  • surface-attached biological components include the surface attacment of cells, proteins, DNA, etc. to a substrate.
  • Many methods exist in the art for coupling biological components eg., nucleic acid, protein and cells
  • a wide degree of flexibility may be used in providing the means by which the anays are created. They can comprise, for example, covalent or noncovalent coupling to the substrate or surface directly, to a chemically derivatized substrate, to an intermediate layer of some kind (e.g., self-assembled monolayer, a hydrogel or other bio- compatible layer known in the art).
  • the identity of the probes can vary from site to site across the solid surface, or the same probe can uniformly cover the surface.
  • Targets can be of a single identity or a combination of targets with different identities.
  • the anays can be prepared in variety of ways including,, but not limited to, ink-jet printing, photolithography, micro-contact printing, or any other manner known to one skilled in the art of fabricating them.
  • a specific embodiment of the present invention can also be used with cells containing ion channel proteins or receptors in the cell membranes (e.g., oocytes with expressed ion channel proteins).
  • Cells can be suspended in some medium, a buffer medium for example.
  • Indicators can also be suspended in the medium. Irradiation of the suspension (in transmission mode) with a fundamental beam leads to generation of the nonlinear optical signal at the cell-medium interface.
  • the ion channel can be of the ligand-gated type.
  • a background nonlinear optical signal is measured at time to; ligand is added to the suspension which serves to modulate the ion channel state or its properties (e.g., opens or closes the ion channel, increases or decreases the ionic permeability of the channel, etc.) which, in turn, leads to a change in the cellular surface electric potential and thus a change in the properties (e.g., intensity) of the nonlinear optical radiation generated near the surface by water molecules, solvent molecules or indicators.
  • ligand is added to the suspension which serves to modulate the ion channel state or its properties (e.g., opens or closes the ion channel, increases or decreases the ionic permeability of the channel, etc.) which, in turn, leads to a change in the cellular surface electric potential and thus a change in the properties (e.g., intensity) of the nonlinear optical radiation generated near the surface by water molecules, solvent molecules or indicators.
  • the ligand binding to a receptor can be measured quantitatively by following the intensity of nonlinear optical radiation generated as a function of ligand concentration; furthermore, the effect can be monitored in the presence of drug candidates which may, for instance, block or otherwise change the ligand-receptor binding interaction; the binding process can also be measured in real-time to dynamically resolve opening or closing of ion channels.
  • any component can be added to the medium to study its effect on the ligand-receptor interaction using the surface-selective nonlinear optical method described herein.
  • bead-based fiber-optic arrays can be used (ref. 34) in which light beams (eg., fundamental and second harmonic) travel via total internal reflection along the path of the fiber.
  • the fundamental light is coupled into the bundle or individual optical fibers and second harmonic light is generated at the tip surface and collected back through the fiber.
  • Figures 11 A-B illustrate a fiber-optic bundle array.
  • Part (A) shows a bundle of fiber optic cables (295) with wells at the distals ends for placement of beads (300).
  • Part (B) shows a close-up view of a single optical fiber. Fundamental light travels ( ⁇ ) toward the distal end with the bead (305).
  • Bead (310) is covered with probes.
  • green fluorescent protein or nonlinear-active mutants thereof are used to label proteins in- vivo via mutagenesis according to procedures well known in the art.
  • the GFP or mutants thereof are second-harmonic active and can serve as a built-in label of proteins.
  • a cell membrane receptor can be labeled with GFP via mutagenesis.
  • Cells containing this GFP-tagged receptor produce some background second harmonic light when illuminated with a fundamental beam in a surface-selective nonlinear optical technique.
  • the intensity and/or spectrum and/or time-course of the second harmonic light will change (due, for example, to a change in overall net orientation of the GFP protein) as the GFP label moves slightly due to the conformational change on the receptor.
  • the change in measured nonlinear optical properties are thus conelated with conformational change and ligand binding.
  • the technique can be used to time-resolve probe-target binding reactions or their effects, using but not limited to the following alternative embodiments of the present invention: gating the fundamental beam incident on the sample, gating the detection, gating the fundamental light, pulsing or gating the electric field or stop-flow mixing of the probes and targets (or agonists, antagonists or other drugs or molecules which modulate the probe- target reactions).
  • the detector (65) of the nonlinear radiation in Figure 1 is a photomultiplier tube operated in single-photon counting mode.
  • Photocurrent pulses can be voltage converted, amplified, subjected to discrimination using a Model SR445 Fast Preamplifier and Model SR 400 Discriminator (supplied by Stanford Research Systems, Inc.) and then sent to a counter (Model 3615 Hex Sealer supplied by Kinetic Systems).
  • Photon counter gating and galvo control through a DAC output Model 3112, 12-Bit DAC supplied by Kinetic Systems
  • a digital delay/pulse generator Model 3112, 12-Bit DAC supplied by Kinetic Systems
  • DG535 supplied by Stanford Research Systems, Inc.
  • Communication with a PC computer 29 can be accomplished using a parallel register (Model PR-604 supplied by DSP Technologies, Inc.), a CAMAC controller card (Model 6002, supplied by DSP Technologies, hie.) and a PC adapter card (Model PC-004 supplied by DSP Technologies, Inc.).
  • a parallel register Model PR-604 supplied by DSP Technologies, Inc.
  • CAMAC controller card Model 6002, supplied by DSP Technologies, hie.
  • PC adapter card Model PC-004 supplied by DSP Technologies, Inc.
  • a bandpass, notch, or color filter is placed in either or all of the beam paths (eg., fundamental, second harmonic, etc.) allowing, for example, for a wider spectral bandwidth or more light throughput.
  • an interference, notch-pass, bandpass, reflecting, or absorbant filter can be used in place of the filters in the figures in order to either pass or block the fundamental or nonlinear optical beams.
  • detection of the nonlinear optical light is achieved using a charge coupled detector (CCD) in place of a photomultiplier tube or other photodetector.
  • CCD charge coupled detector
  • the CCD subsystem communicates with and is controlled by a data acquisition board installed in a computer.
  • Data acquisition board may be of the type that is well known in the art such as a CIO-DAS16/Jr manufactured by Computer Boards hie
  • the data acquisition board and CCD subsystem may operate in the following manner.
  • the data acquisition board controls the CCD integration period by sending a clock signal to the CCD subsystem.
  • the CCD subsystem sets the CCD integration period at 4096 clock periods, by changing the clock rate, the actual time in which the CCD integrates data can be manipulated.
  • each photodiode During an integration period, each photodiode accumulates a charge proportional to the amount of light that reaches it.
  • the charges are transfened to the CCD's shift registers and a new integration period commences.
  • the shift registers store the charges as voltages which represent the light pattern incident on the CCD anay.
  • the voltages are then transmitted at the clock rate to the data acquisition board, where they are digitized and stored in the computer's memory. In this manner, a strip of the sample is imaged during each integration period. Thereafter, a subsequent row is integrated until the sample is completely scanned.
  • the nonlinear spectrum of a sample is measured by measuring the nonlinear radiation (e.g., second harmonic radiation) at two or more spectral points or bands, using a monochromator, filter or other wavelength-selecting device to accomplish this.
  • the nonlinear radiation e.g., second harmonic radiation
  • a monochromator 60 can be placed before the detecting element in the device, in order to spectrally resolve the nonlinear optical radiation ( Figure 1).
  • imaging techniques described in the art can be perfonned using SHG-labeled components (such as labeled ligands or receptors) instead of the membrane-intercalating dyes used in the art.
  • SHG-labeled components such as labeled ligands or receptors
  • channels (or microfluid) channels can be used to introduce the components into the sample cell via positive displacement, pumping, electrophoretic means or other means known in the art for manipulating the flow of components into and out of a reaction chamber.
  • the apparatus can be assembled into a user-closed product with a user-controlled interface (an LED panel, for example, or PC-based software) with the option of inserting and removing disposable substrates (e.g., biochips) with the attached probes.
  • a user-controlled interface an LED panel, for example, or PC-based software
  • disposable substrates e.g., biochips
  • a photodiode, avalanche photodiode or other photoelectric detector (65) in Figure 1 is used as the light detection means.
  • a surface anay can be used that is in a fixed position and the incident light beam scanned across the surface using methods well known in the art, such as a galvanometer minor or a polygonal minor.
  • a specific embodiment comprises a scanning or imaging method where a physical property of the nonlinear radiation is measured as function of position (x,y,z) in a sample.
  • the scanning method can comprise a combination of both stage translation (x-y) and beam scanning, wherein, for example, the latter controls the incident position of the fundamental beam on the array surface.
  • a stop-flow mixing chamber is used to rapidly mix the components in the sample cell.
  • the proportionality constant (calibration curve of intensity of second harmonic light vs. concentration of targets bound to attached probes) is determined by measuring the concentration of targets using another method such as radiolabeling or fluorescence labels of the targets. Once the calibration curve is known, for a given probe and target type (e.g., cDNA, RNA, size of oligos, etc.), the concentration of bound target is determined using this relation and the measured second harmonic intensity.
  • This embodiment can be generalized to any other nonlinear light beam emanating from the sample, including third harmonic, sum or difference frequency light.
  • the nonlinear optical, surface-selective apparatus can comprise a unit without the light excitation source (e.g., with sample compartment, filters, detectors, monochromator, computer interface, software, or other parts) so that the user can supply his own excitation source and adapt its use to the methods described herein.
  • the light excitation source e.g., with sample compartment, filters, detectors, monochromator, computer interface, software, or other parts
  • measurable information can be recorded in real time.
  • the apparatus for detection of the probe-target reactions or their effects can assume a variety of configurations.
  • the apparatus will comprise the following: i) a source of the fundamental light ii) a detector for measuring the intensity of the second harmonic or other nonlinear optical beams.
  • a wide degree of flexibility is expected in the design of the apparatus including, but not limited to, the source of the fundamental light, the optical train necessary to control, focus, scan or direct the fundamental and nonlinear light beams, the design of the anay, the detection system, and the use of a grating or filters and collection optics.
  • the mode of generation (inadiation) or collection can be varied including, for example, the use of evanescent wave (total internal reflection), planar wave guide, reflection or transmission geometries, optical cavity, fiber-optic, near-field illumination, confocal techniques or the use of a microcavity or integrating detection system.
  • evanescent wave total internal reflection
  • planar wave guide reflection or transmission geometries
  • optical cavity optical cavity
  • fiber-optic near-field illumination
  • confocal techniques the use of a microcavity or integrating detection system.
  • a number of art methods for scanning a microa ⁇ ay on a solid surface are described. Examples include U.S. Pat. No.'s Trulson et al. (1998- relevant portions of which are inco ⁇ orated by reference herein), Trulson et al. (2000), Stem et al. (1997) and Sampas (2000). (2000- relevant portions of which are inco ⁇ orated by reference herein), Stem et al.
  • a plurality of lasers and micro-controlled minors for adjusting the position of each beam on the surface can be used as in U.S. Pat. No. 6,121,983.
  • More elaborate versions of the apparatus will employ, for example: a monochromator (for wavelength selection), a pass-filter, color filter, interference or other spectral filter (for wavelength selection or to separate the fundamental(s) from the higher harmonics), one or more polarizing optics, a means of applying an electric field, one or more minors or lenses for directing and focusing the beams, computer control, software, etc.
  • the mode of delivering or generating the nonlinear optical light can be based on one or more of the following means: TER. (Total internal reflection), Fiber optics (with or without attached beads), Transmission (fundamental passes through the sample), Reflection (fundamental is reflected from the sample), scanning imaging (allows one to scan a sample), confocal imaging or scanning, resonance cavity for power build-up, multiple-pass set-up.
  • TER. Total internal reflection
  • Fiber optics with or without attached beads
  • Transmission fundamental passes through the sample
  • Reflection fundamental is reflected from the sample
  • scanning imaging allows one to scan a sample
  • confocal imaging or scanning resonance cavity for power build-up, multiple-pass set-up.
  • Measured information can take the form of a vector which can include one or more of the following parameters: ⁇ intensity of light (typically converted to a photo voltage by a PMT or photodiode), wavelength of light (determined with a monochromator and or filters), time, substrate position (for anay samples, for instance, where different sub-samples are encoded as function of substrate location and the fundamental is directed to various (x,y) locations ⁇ .
  • Two general configurations of the apparatus are: image scanning (imaging of a substrate - intensity, wavelength, etc. as a function of x,y coordinate) and spectroscopic (measurement of the intensity, wavelength, etc. for some planar surface or for a suspension of cells, liposomes or other particles).
  • the fundamental beam can be delivered to the sample in a variety of ways. Figs. 12-
  • the fundamental beams will be comprised of two or more beams, and will generate, at the interfaces, the difference or sum frequency beams.
  • the sample cell 3 in all cases can be mounted on a translation stage (1-, 2-, or 3-dimensional degrees of freedom) for selecting precise locations of the interfacial interaction volume.
  • the sample cell in all cases can be fitted with flow ports and tubes which can serve to introduce (or flush out) components such as molecules, particles, cells, etc.
  • Fig. 12A is a schematic of a configuration relying on transmission of the fundamental and second harmonic beams.
  • the fundamental 320 ( ⁇ ) passes through the sample cell 330 and interacts within a volume element (denoted by the circle) in which are contained one or more interfaces capable of generating the second harmonic beam 325 (2 ⁇ ).
  • the fundamental and second harmonic beams are substantially co-linear as denoted by beam 325.
  • the sample cell can contain suspended beads, particles, liposomes, biological cells, etc. in some medium, providing interfacial area capable of generating second harmonics in response to the fundamental beam.
  • the second harmonic is detected co-linearly with the fundamental direction, but could alternatively be detected off-angle from the fundamental, for instance at 90° to the fundamental beam.
  • Fig. 12B is a schematic of another configuration relying on transmission of the fundamental and second harmonic beams.
  • the fundamental 335 is directed onto a sample cell 345 and the second harmonic waves are generated at the top surface — this surface can be derivatized with immobilized probes or with adsorbed particles, liposomes, cells, etc.
  • the second harmonic waves 340 are generated within a volume element denoted by the circle at the interface between the top surface and the medium contained within cell.
  • Fig. 12C is a schematic of a configuration substantially similar to the one depicted in Fig. 2 A except that the bottom surface of the sample cell 3, rather than the top, is used to generate the second harmonic waves.
  • FIG. 13A is a schematic of a waveguide 4 capable of acting as a total internal reflection waveguide which refracts the fundamental 365 and directs it to a location at the interface between the waveguide 380 and a sample cell 375.
  • the fundamental will generate the second harmonic waves and undergo total internal reflection; the second harmonic beam will propagate substantially colinearly with the fundamental and exit the prism 380.
  • Waveguide 380 will typically be in contact with air.
  • the waveguide 380 is a Dove prism.
  • Fig. 13B is a schematic of a configuration similar to the one depicted in Fig. 13A except that the waveguide 400 allows for multiple points of total internal reflection between the waveguide 4 and the sample cell 395, increasing the amount of second harmonic light generated from the fundamental beam.
  • Fig 14 depicts various configurations of a fiber optic means of delivering or collecting the fundamental or second harmonic beams.
  • the coupling element 410 between a source of the fundamental wave and the fiber optic is depicted.
  • the fundamental thus coupled into the fiber optic waveguide 405, proceeds to a sample cell 415.
  • the tip of the fiber can serve as the interface of interest capable of generating second harmonic waves, or the tip can serve merely to introduce the fundamental beam to the sample cell containing suspended cells, particles, etc.
  • the second harmonic light is collected back through the fiber optic.
  • Fig. 14B is identical to Fig. 14A except that a bead is attached to the tip of the fiber optic (according to means well known in the art).
  • the bead can serve to both improve collection efficiency of the second harmonic light or be derivatized with probes or adsorbed species and presenting an interface with the medium of sample cell 425 capable of generating the second harmonic light.
  • Fig. 14C is identical to both Figs. 14A and 14B except that collection of the second harmonic light is effected using a solid-angle detector 450.
  • An optical resonance cavity is defined between at least two reflective elements and has an intracavity light beam along an intracavity beam path.
  • the optical cavity or resonator consists of two or more minored surfaces ananged so that the incident light can be trapped bouncing back and forth between the minors. In this way, the light inside the cavity can be many orders of magnitude more intense than the incident light. This phenomenon is well known and has been exploited in various ways (see, for example, Yariv A. "Introduction to Optical Electronics", 2 nd Ed., Holt, Reinhart and Winston, NY 1976, Chapter 8).
  • the sample cell can be present in the optical cavity or it can be outside the optical resonance cavity.
  • Fig. 15 is a schematic of an optical resonance power build-up cavity configuration.
  • Fig. 15A is a schematic of an optical resonance cavity in which the sample cell 465 is positioned intracavity and the fundamental and second harmonic beams are transmitted through it - a useful configuration for sample cells containing suspended particles, cells, beads, etc.
  • the fundamental beam 455 enters the optical resonance cavity at reflective optic 460 and builds up in power between reflective elements 460 and 462 (intracavity beam).
  • Minor 460 is preferably tilted (not pe ⁇ endicular to the direction of the incident fundamental 455) to prevent direct reflection of the intracavity beam back into the light source.
  • the natural reflectivity and transmisiyity of 460 and 462 can be adjusted so that the fundamental builds up to a convenient level of power within the cavity.
  • the fundamental generates second harmonic light in a volume element within the sample cell denoted by the circle.
  • Reflective optic 460 can reflect the fundamental and the second harmonic, while reflective optic 462 will substantially reflect the fundamental but allow the pass-through of the second harmonic beam 475 which is subsequently detected.
  • U.S. Pat. No. 5,432,610 (King et al.) describes a diode-pumped power build-up cavity for chemical sensing and it and the references it makes are hereby inco ⁇ orated by reference herein.
  • Fig. 15B is a schematic of an optical resonance power build-up cavity configuration in which the fundamental beam 475 enters the optical cavity by reflection from optic 480.
  • a second reflective optic element 482 defines the optical resonance cavity.
  • Element 490 is a waveguide (such as a prism) in contact with the sample cell 485 and allows total internal reflection of the fundamental beam at the interface between the waveguide and sample cell surfaces, generating the second harmonic light.
  • Element 482 substantially reflects the fundamental beam but passes through the second harmonic beam 495 which is subsequently detected.
  • Reflection Fig. 16A is a schematic of a configuration involving reflection of the fundamental and second harmonic beams.
  • a substrate 525 is coated with a thin layer of a reflective material 520, such as a metal, and on top of this is deposited at layer 515 suitable for attachment of the probes or adso ⁇ tion of particles, cells, etc. (e.g., SiO 2 ).
  • This layer is in contact with the sample cell 510.
  • the fundamental 500 passes through the sample cell 510 and generates a second harmonic wave at the interface between layers 515 and 520.
  • the fundamental and second harmonic waves 505 are reflected back from the surface of layer 520.
  • Fig. 16B is substantially similar to Fig. 15A except that the second harmonic and fundamental beams are reflected 535 from the interface between the medium contained in sample cell 540 and layer 545.
  • Layer 545 is reflective or partly reflective layer deposited on substrate 550 and is suitable for adso ⁇ tion of particles, cells, etc. or attachment of probes.
  • Fig. 16C is a schematic illustrating that only the sample cell 565 need be used for a reflective geometry.
  • the sample cell 565 is partly filled with some medium 570 and the fundamental and second harmonic beams are reflected 560 from the gas-liquid or vapor- liquid interface at the surface of 570.
  • CCD Charge-coupled detectors
  • anay detectors can be particularly useful when information is desired as a function of substrate location (x,y).
  • CCDs comprise an array of pixels (i.e., photodiodes), each pixel of which can independently measuring light impinging on it.
  • nonlinear light arising from a particular substrate location (x,y) can be determined by measuring the intensity of nonlinear light impinging on a CCD array location (Q,R) some distance from the substrate - this can be determined because of the coherent, collimated (and generally co-propagating with the fundamental) nonlinear optical beam) compared with the spontaneous, stochastic and multidirectional nature of fluorescence emission.
  • one or more anay elements ⁇ Q,R ⁇ in the detector will map to specific regions of a substrate surface, allowing for easy determination of information as a function of substrate location (x,y).
  • Photodiode detector and photomultiplier tubes (PMTs), avalanche photodiodes, phototransistors, vacuum photodiodes or other detectors known in the art for converting incident light to an electrical signal (i.e., cunent, voltage, etc.) can also be used to detect light intensities.
  • the CCD communicates with and is controlled by a data acquisition board installed in the apparatus computer.
  • the data acquisition board can be of the type that is well known in the art such as a CIO-DAS16/Jr manufactured by Computer Boards Inc.
  • the data acquisition board and CCD subsystem can operate in the following manner.
  • the data acquisition board controls the CCD integration period by sending a clock signal to the CCD subsystem, hi one embodiment, the CCD subsystem sets the CCD intregration period at 4096 clock periods. By changing the clock rate, the actual time in which the CCD integrates data can be manipulated.
  • each photodiode accumulates a charge proportional to the amount of light that reaches it.
  • the charge is transfened to the CCD's shift registers and a new integration period commences.
  • the shift registers store the charges as voltages which represent the light pattern incident on the CCD anay.
  • the voltages are then trasmitted at the clock rate to the data acquisition board, where they are digitized and stored in the computer's memory. In this manner, a strip of the sample is imaged during each integration period. Thereafter, a subsequent row is integrated until the sample is completely scanned.
  • Sample substrates and sample cells can take a variety of forms drawing from, but not limited to, one or more of the following characteristics: fully sealed, sealed or unsealed and connected to flow cells and pumps, integrated substrates with a total internal reflection prism allowing for evanescent generation of the nonlinear beam, integrated substrates with a resonant cavity for fundamental power build-up, an optical set-up allowing for multiple passes of the fundamental for increased nonlinear response, sample cells containing suspended biological cells, particles, beads, etc.
  • Data analysis operates on the vectors of information measured by the detector.
  • the information can be time-dependent and kinetic. It can be dependent on the concentration of one or more biological components, inhibitors, antagonists, agonists, drugs, small molecules, etc. which can be changed during a measurement or between measurements. It can also be dependent on wavelength, etc.
  • the intensity of nonlinear light will be transformed into a concentration or amount of a particular state (for example, the surface-associated concentration of a component or the amount of opened or closed ion-channels in cell membranes) via the detected change in nonlinear optical properties that are conelated to conformational changes induced in the sample.
  • the square root of the intensity of second harmonic light is proportional to the number of nonlinear-active species in a sample times the orientational average of the hype ⁇ olarizability of the species. This is a well known relationship that can be used to quantify conformational change (and in turn binding affinity to a probe) with intensity of a nonlinear beam. Kinetics and equilibrium properties of the reactions of interest can be determined via the measurements and appropriate data analysis.
  • Candidate binding partners for binding a test molecule can be screened with the present invention. Conformational changes induced in a candidate binding partners upon binding to a test molecule can also be screened using the present invention.
  • the method of screening one or more candidate binding partners for binding to a test molecule comprises measuring the one or more physical properties of the one or nonlinear optical light beams emanating from said sample comprising the test molecule and the one or more candidate binding partners, where a change in the one or more physical properties of the nonlinear light beams relative to a value measured in the absence of exposure to the one or more candidate binding partners is an indication of a binding event having occurred, with a field applied to the sample.
  • the candidate binding partner is not attached to the surface.
  • the probes or targets of the present invention include but are not limited to naturally occurring, artificially altered, or genetically engineered, biological species or non-biological species.
  • the candidates for probes or targets also include but are not limited to one or more of the following components: a nucleic acid, protein, small molecule, organic molecule, biological cell, virus, molecular beacon, liposome, receptor, antibody, agonist, antagonist, inhibitor, hapten, ligand, antigen, oocyte, hormone, protein, peptide, receptor, drug, lipid, ganglioside, enzyme, nucleotide, carbohydrate, cDNA, oligonucleotide, nucleoside, polynucleoside, polynucleotide, lipid, ganglioside, oligosaccharide, peptide nucleic acid (PNA), toxin, nucleic acid analog, ion channel receptor, G coupled-protein receptor.
  • the probes can be patterned in an anay format
  • an external electric field can be applied to the samples to create the non-centrosymmetric condition required for the nonlinear optical techniques.
  • proteins e.g., solubilized GPCRs
  • a background nonlinear light signal is measured.
  • a ligand that binds to the protein is added to the medium, it triggers a conformational change in the protein (well known to those skilled in the art) that results in a change in the properties of the nonlinear light signal (e.g., a change in intensity).
  • the proteins are GPCRs, a well known as a class of proteins that are implicated in disease, and for which drugs can be developed.
  • Drugs can be agonists, antagonists, inhibitors, etc. that interact (e.g., bind) with the receptors in some way.
  • the following references (and references therein) describe different exemplary GPCRs that can be used:
  • the invention provides a method of screening one or more candidate modulator molecules for the ability to modulate the interaction between a test molecule and its binding partner.
  • the action of modulator and inhibitor molecules have been previously described. Any change in the one or more physical properties of the nonlinear light beam emanating from a sample comprising the test molecule, its binding partner and the modulator, relative to what was measured in the absence of exposure of the test molecule to the binding partners, serves as an indicator of the ability of the candidate modulator molecules to modulate the interaction between the test molecule and its binding partner (i.e. to increase or decrease their binding).
  • the invention can be used, for example, to monitor gene expression or for studies involving drag screening or high-throughput screening where a candidate drug is tested for binding, or its effect on probe-target binding, i.e., to reduce or enhance probe-target binding, hi other cases, for example, a drug can be tested for efficacy by its ability to bind to a receptor or other molecule on the surface of a biological cell, hi another specific embodiment, compounds that are potential inhibitors of an agonist to a receptor are screened by testing for blocking of the agonist binding to the receptor, i.e., removal of a conformational change induced by the agonist when the receptor and agonist are also in the presence of an inhibitor candidate.
  • the invention is used for drug screening or high-throughput screening where a candidate drug is tested for its ability to activate or inhibit a probe (e.g., a receptor, ion channel protein, etc.).
  • a probe e.g., a receptor, ion channel protein, etc.
  • a drug candidate is tested for its ability to activate a conformational change in a probe - in this case, one seeks agonists of the probe.
  • target-probe interactions can be measured in the presence of some modulator of the interactions - the modulator being, for example, a small molecule, drug, or other moiety, molecule or particle which changes in some way the target-probe interactions (e.g., has some affinity for the probe and blocks or inhibits target binding).
  • the effect of a modulator on probe-target binding, where the target is known to bind to the probes, is investigated using the nonlinear optical method.
  • the modulator can be added before, during or after the time in which the probe-target interactions occur.
  • a biological probe-target binding reaction can be measured in the presence of agonists, antagonists, drags, or small molecules which can block, initiate or otherwise modulate the binding strength (e.g., equilibrium constant) of the said probe-target binding reaction.
  • This embodiment can be useful in many cases, for example when one would like to know the efficacy of a drug's ability to block or modulate a certain probe-target reaction for medical uses or basic research.
  • Conformational changes can be studied by the present invention at an interface or in the bulk, where the conformational change leads to a change in one or more physical properties of one or more nonlinear light beams emanating from the sample.
  • the conformational change can be initiated by a biological or chemical binding event, or by a biological component, drug, small molecule, agonist or antagonist binding to a molecule or a particle, and can be assayed as described herein for binding interactions.
  • a change in orientation or dipole moment occurs in the interfacial region possessing a nonlinear susceptibility as a result of some probe-target interaction.
  • a nonlinear-active label can be attached to the probe of interest and binding of the probe to some target (such as a drug candidate tested for its ability to activate the probe and thereby induce a conformational change) in solution results in a change in orientation or dipole moment and this changes the nonlinear susceptibility of the interfacial region, and thus the properties of the nonlinear beams (e.g., intensity, polarization, wavelength).
  • a non-centrosymmetric region is created by application of an external field (EFISH technique). The region can be interfacial, bulk or some combination thereof.
  • Probes or targets are nonlinear-active, either intrinsically or labeled using a nonlinear-active label
  • the probes, targets or both are poled by the electric field and this results in a background.
  • a binding reaction occurs between the probes and targets, this can activate a conformational change in one or both species or result in a change in dipole moment of species, resulting in a change in the measured nonlinear optical signals.
  • target oligonucleotides can be exposed to a surface of an anay on which are situated probe oligonucleotides.
  • probe oligonucleotide sequences in the anay conesponding to known locations
  • sequence-complementary hybridization and an accompanying conformational change occurs, the fundamental light would give rise to a change in nonlinear optical signal, or a change in the background of such a signal. This can be detected and conelated with the spatial location of the anay element and hence the oligonucleotide sequence.
  • two major applications of nucleic acid microanays are:
  • probe cDNA 500-5000 base pairs long
  • probe cDNA 500-5000 base pairs long
  • targets either separately or in a mixture
  • Another format comprises synthesizing oligonucleotides (20-25 mer oligos) or peptide nucleic acids probes in-situ (on the solid substrate, Fodor et al, "Light-directed, Spatially Addressable Parallel Chemical Synthesis," Science 251 (4995): 767-773 FEB 15 1999) or by conventional synthesis followed by on-chip immobilization. The anay is then exposed to target DNA, hybridized, and the identity or abundance of complementary sequences are determined.
  • Protein arrays can be prepared (see for example, G. MacBeath and S.L. Schreiber, "Printing Proteins as Microanays for High-Throughput Function Determination", Science 2000, 289, 1760-1763) to determine whether a given target protein binds to the immobilized probe protein on the surface. These anays can be used to study small molecule binding to the probe proteins. Many reviews of microanay technology and applications are available in the art.
  • the conformational changes also allow enable studying the degree or extent of binding between a probe and a target, utilizing the surface selective nonlinear optical techniques, through measuring the conformational effect the binding induces.
  • probes that are labeled with a nonlinear-active label are attached to a solid surface or substrate.
  • the conformation of the probe changes, and the orientation of the label with respect to the surface, and fundamental beam changes also.
  • the candidate binding partners are not attached to the surface.
  • the nonlinear active label or moiety is attached to the target or probe molecules in vitro.
  • the degree of probe-target binding can be conelated via the amount of change of a measured property of the nonlinear optical radiation (e.g., intensity).
  • labeled oligonucleotides are attached to a solid substrate according to means well known in the art and exposed to targets to test for hybridization. When hybridization to a target occurs, the orientation of the label on the oligonucleotide changes.
  • Microarrays known in the art varying sequence of oligos in different surface locations
  • substrates with uniform oligonucleotide sequences can be used. Binding between surface-attached proteins and targets - other proteins, ligands, etc. wherein the binding reaction triggers a conformational change are another exemplary embodiment with the present invention.
  • any surface-attached species that undergoes a conformational change when binding or interacting with any other species or stimulus can be studied with the present invention.
  • the surface-attached probes need not be labeled when using indicators which are sensitive to minute changes in electric charge density or changes thereof. If the conformational change in a probe results in a change in the arrangement of electric charges on a surface - even if this change is transient - indicators near the interface can be used to detect these changes and report on the conformational change.
  • a MB analogue probe is used to detect the degree or extent of binding. For instance, by labeling the molecular beacon probe with a nonlinear-active label and measuring whether the label's orientation changes (via changes in nonlinear optical intensity) at some interface, or in the bulk, one can study whether target strands are complementary, and the extend to which they are complementary since the amount of change that is measured in nonlinear optical intensity can be conelated with the degree of hybridization.
  • an Au nanoparticle is used to enhance the intensity of nonlinear optical radiation, such as second harmonic generation scattered by an oxazole dye by several orders of magnitude when the nanoparticle and oxazole dye are in proximity to each other.
  • the intensity of the nonlinear optical radiation decreases and this decrease can be quantitatively related to the amount of probe-target hybridization.
  • the sensitivity of the technique is determined by, among other factors, the background nonlinear optical signal before hybridization occurs.
  • the present invention can be used in many scientific areas of analysis and in particular, in the chemical and biological arts, the present invention can be especially useful in drug discovery or in fundamental studies where compounds (targets) are tested for binding and and ability to activate probes, wherein the probes are ion channel proteins, GPCR proteins, or other receptors, or other molecules.
  • Scanning, imaging, detection techniques at a fixed position, etc. can all be readily used with the present invention.
  • Scanning of microanays in the art includes confocal-based schemes and non-confocal based schemes.
  • U.S. Pat. No. 5,834,758 (Trulson et al. - relevant portions of which are inco ⁇ orated by reference herein) describes a non-confocal based scheme for imaging a microanay using fluorescence detection.
  • the sample should lie very flat in order to image only within a single focal plane for good out-of-plane discrimination.
  • the invention can be used for studying binding processes between other biological components: cells with viruses; protein-protein interactions; protein-ligand; cell-ligand; protein-drugs, nucleic acid-drugs, cell-small molecule; cell-nucleic acid; peptide-cell, oligo or polynucleotides, virus-cell, protein-small molecule, etc., and in general, any binding reaction which results in a conformational change.
  • Biomimetic membranes such as phospholipid supported bilayers (eg., egg phosphatidylcholine) can also be used and are particularly useful when studies comprise membrane protein probes.
  • Probes, targets, receptors, etc. can be rendered nonlinear-active (made to possess a hype ⁇ olarizability) by direct labeling or by using a decorator molecule or other candidate that has a binding affinity for the probes or targets, and is itself intrinsically or rendered nonlinear-active, and which will respond to a conformational change on the probes or targets by shifting its position, by virtue of the molecular bond that binds the decorator to the probe or target.
  • An antibody to a receptor is an example of such a decorator molecule.
  • the decorator molecule should not itself block the active region of the receptor so that potential agonists, inhibitors, activators, etc. can bind to and produce action on the receptor.
  • Another example of the invention's use is to label receptors or other components that have an affinity for some virus.
  • the virus binds or interacts with the receptor or other component, this interaction will affect the orientation of the label with respect to the direction of the fundamental beam, and thus change the properties of the measured nonlinear optical light (e.g., the intensity of the nonlinear light).
  • anays include cellular anays, supported lipid bilayer anays with or without membrane or attached proteins, etc.
  • biomolecules eg., nucleic acid, protein and cells
  • a wide degree of flexibility may be used in providing the means by which the anays are created. They can comprise, for example, covalent or non-covalent coupling to the substrate directly, to a chemically derivatized substrate, to an intermediate layer of some kind (e.g., self-assembled monolayer, a hydrogel or other bio-compatible layer known in the art).
  • the identity of the probes can vary from site to site across the solid surface, or the same probe can uniformly cover the surface.
  • Targets can be of a single identity or a combination of targets with different identities.
  • the anays can be prepared in a variety of ways including, but not limited to, ink-jet printing, photolithography, micro-contact printing, or any other manner known to one skilled in the art of fabricating them.
  • the binding process can be measured in real time and in the presence of bulk biological components due to the surface-selectivity of the nonlinear optical technique, equilibrium binding curves and kinetics can be measured, the bulk concentration of the components can be varied, and a "wash-away" step to remove unbound components, as is used with fluorescence-based detection, may he unnecessary.
  • a wide degree of flexibility is expected in the design of the apparatus including, but not limited to, the source of the fundamental light, the optical train necessary to control, focus or direct the fundamental and nonlinear light beams, the design of the array, the detection system, and the use of a grating or filters and collection optics.
  • the mode of generation (inadiation) or collection can be varied including, for example, the use of evanescent wave (total internal reflection), planar wave guide, reflection, or transmission geometries, fiberoptic, near-field illumination, confocal techniques or the use of a microcavity for power build-up, or integrating detection system such as an integrating sphere.
  • a number of methods for scanning a microanay on a solid surface can be adapted for use.
  • the second harmonic light beam makes a definite angle to the surface plane, one can read-out the properties of the nonlinear optical radiation, for instance, as a function of fundamental incidence position in a two-dimensional anay format, without needing to mechanically translate the detector or sample and without extensive collection optics, hi the 'beam scanning' embodiment, a mechanical translation of sample surface or detector is not required - only a change in a direction and/or angle of the fundamental incidence on the sample (for a fixed sample and detector) - the apparatus offers much faster scanning capability, improved ease of manufacturing and a longer lifetime.
  • the interface can comprise a silica, glass, silicon, silicon nitride, polystyrene, nylon, plastic, a metal, semiconductor or insulator surface, or any mixtures thereof, or any surface to which probes, such as biological components, can adsorb or be attached.
  • the interface can also include biological cell and liposome surfaces.
  • the attachment or immobilization can occur through a variety of techniques well known in the art.
  • oligonucleotides can be prepared via techniques described in "Microanay Biochip Technology", M. Schena (Ed.), Eaton Publishing, 1998- relevant portions of which are inco ⁇ orated by reference herein.
  • the surface can be derivatized with aldehyde silanes for coupling to amines on surfaces of biomolecules (G. MacBeath and S.L. Schreiber, "Printing Proteins as Microanays for High-Throughput Function Determination", Science 2000, 289, 1760-1763 - relevant portions of which are inco ⁇ orated by reference herein).
  • BSA-NHS (BSA-N- hydroxysuccinimide) surfaces can also be used by first attaching a molecular layer of BSA to the surface and then activating it with N,N'-disuccinimidyl carbonate. The activated lysine, aspartate or glutamate residues on the BSA react with surface amines on the proteins.
  • the present invention can be applied to an ensemble of molecules or to a single molecule - i.e., ensemble reaction measurements or a single-molecule reaction measurement.
  • Supported phospholipid bilayers can also be used, with or without membrane proteins or other membrane-associated components as, for example, in Salafsky et al., Architecture and function of membrane proteins in planar supported bilayers: A study with photosynthetic reaction centers'" Biochemistry 35 (47): 14773-14781 (1996)- relevant portions of which are inco ⁇ orated by reference herein, "Biomembranes", Gennis, Springer- Verlag, Kalb et al., 1992 and Brian et al, "Allogeneic Stimulation of Cyto-toxic T-cells by Supported Planar Membranes," PNAS - Biological Sciences 81 (19): 6159-6163 (1984)-relevant portions of which are inco ⁇ orated herein.
  • Probes can be part of a biological cell, liposome, bead, etc. that naturally form an interface capable of generating nonlinear optical radiation due to their size (although they are nominally centrosymmetric, their diameter is of the order of the wavelength of light in the visible spectrum and this allows for generation of the nonlinear optical light according to well known art).
  • probes can be molecules or particles (e.g., detergent-solubilized receptors) that are induced to orient by the application of an electric field.
  • the probe-target hybridization can be measured by detecting the intensity of nonlinear optical light (e.g., second harmonic light) at some position on a substrate with surface-attached probes; the intensity of the second harmonic light changes as labeled targets bind to the probes at the surface and become partially oriented because of the binding, thus satisfying the non-centrosymmetric condition for generation of second harmonic light at the interface.
  • Modeling of the intensity of light with concentration of probe-target binding complexes at the interface can be accomplished using a variety of methods, for instance by calibrating the technique for a given probe-target interaction using radiolabels or fluorescence tags.
  • Controls for non-specific binding of targets to the surface can be performed according to procedures well known to one skilled in the art, for example: i) addition of deliberately non-complementary targets and measuring for surface-selective nonlinear optical signal, or ii) adding blockers which are known to prevent probe-target binding, adding complementary targets and measuring the resulting surface-selective nonlinear optical signal.
  • the surface-selective nonlinear optical signal change upon addition of non-complementary targets will be substantially lower than upon addition of complementary targets.
  • the signal change will be significantly lower in the presence of blocker than in the absence of blocker.
  • Measurements can be made at a wide variety of interfaces known in the art, such as a solid-liquid interface, an air-liquid interface, a liquid-liquid interface, etc.
  • interfaces known in the art, such as a solid-liquid interface, an air-liquid interface, a liquid-liquid interface, etc.
  • nonlinear-active, labeled probes are introduced to the liquid and allowed to assemble at the interface; addition of targets that bind to the probes causes a change in the measured properties of the nonlinear optical beams reflected from the air-liquid interface.
  • a Molecular Beacon analogue that is a peptide-nucleic analogue (PNA) oligonucleotide, coupled to a nonlinear-active dye, and purified, is purchased from a commercial source such as Midland Certified Reagent Company (Midland, TX).
  • the nonlinear-active oxazole dye used is oxazole (SE) l-(3-(succinimidyloxycarbonyl) benzyl)-4- (5-(4-methoxyphenyl) oxazol-2-yl)pyridinium bromide (PyMPO, SE: Molecular Probes Co ⁇ .) attached via an amine group at the 3' end.
  • the oligonucleotide is placed into the sample well of an EFISH cell.
  • EFISH cells There are a variety of EFISH cells available in the art.
  • the sample cell described in the publication by C.G. Bethea ('Experimental technique of dc induced SHG in liquids: measurements of the nonlinearity of CH 2 I 2 ", Applied Optics 1975, 14, 1447) is used.
  • the direction of the applied electric field is parallel to the electric field of the laser beam.
  • a commercial femtosecond mode-locked system (Mira 900 and Verdi 5W) is used as the fundamental source.
  • the fundamental is directed into the region of the cell between the electrodes.
  • the back-reflected second harmonic is blocked from entering the oscillator using a color filter; fundamental light beyond the sample is blocked using a color filter.
  • the second harmonic light is collected and focused onto a monochromator (CM110 CVI Laser) using plano-convex lenses (Melles Griot Inc.).
  • the light is detected using a Hamamatsu photomultiplier tube with a Bertan power supply.
  • the signals from the photomultiplier are sent to a Stanford Research Systems SR400 photon counting unit and processed using a PC.
  • An electric field is applied using a Bertan power supply and home-built electronics to pulse and synchronize the field with the laser pulses.
  • the dye-labeled MB analogue probes are poled by application of the electric field when it is on. By comparing the average second harmonic intensity of the poled MB analogues in the absence and presence of target, the binding affinity (or sequence if it is unknown) of the target to the MB analogue can be measured.
  • the SHG signal in the absence of target represents a background measurement that is used as a 'baseline' to compare with the signal in the presence of the target.
  • the MB analogue probe is activated and this leads to a conformational change and therefore to a change in the average orientation of the nonlinear-active dye.
  • the intensity of the measured SHG light is proportional to the average orientation of the nonlinear-active dye
  • a change in dye orientation results in a change in the intensity of the second harmonic beam.
  • Targets with less than perfect complementarity to the MB analogue probe sequence will bind with a lower affinity to the MB analogue probe and will therefore activate a lower proportion of the MB analogue probe molecules and cause a smaller amount of the conformational change.
  • a relationship between binding affinity and the intensity of the second harmonic beam can be readily developed according to procedures known in the art that relate a change in nonlinear intensity to concentration of the nonlinear-active species.
  • the ⁇ 2 adrenergic receptor a GPCR protein
  • the protein is labeled at an endogenous cysteine (Cys-265) with l-(2,3-epoxypropyl)-4-(5-(4- methoxyphenyl)oxazol-2-yl)pyridinium trifluoromethanesulfonate (PyMPO epoxide, Molecular Probes), a nonlinear-active dye, at 1 :1 stoichiometry following standard procedures and using the work of Ghanouni et al, 98(11): 5997 PNAS, as a guide.
  • the nonlinear-active dye is attached to a part of the protein that undergoes a conformational change when the protein is activated.
  • the receptor is placed in a medium situated between two electrodes and through which passes a fundamental beam (e.g., output of -1W avg. Power, -150 fs pulses from a Ti:Sapphire system such as the Verdi-Mira commercial system from Coherent Inc).
  • the apparatus and sample preparation e.g., application of electric field, electric field induced second harmonic generation - EFISH
  • standard optics are used to focus the fundamental on the sample and to collect the second harmonic radiation.
  • Fig. 17 depicts the sample holder with applied electric field.
  • An electric field is applied across the medium according to Fig. 17, partially aligning the receptor and its bound dye and creating a non-centrosymmetric condition necessary for observation of SHG.
  • a background signal intensity is measured at 400 nm using a color filter (BG-39, CVI Laser) to block the fundamental, a monochromator to select wavelength (CM110, CVI Laser), a PMT (Hamamatsu) and single-photon counting electronics (SR-400, Stanford Research Systems).
  • the wavelength 400 nm is selected to create a resonance enhancement effect via an electronic transition of the dye.
  • Ligand is added to the medium - a drug candidate that is tested for binding, for example; if the ligand (drug) binds to the receptor, a conformational change in the probe (the receptor) is induced which changes the nonlinear optical signal intensity.
  • ligands isoproterenol
  • partial agonists epinephrine, salbutamol and dobutamine
  • the labeling reaction can be carried out using various coupling chemistries and/or stoichiometries (labehprobe) to determine which coupling chemistry gives the optimal signal in the nonlinear optical measurement. For instance, it may not be known a priori which sub-parts of the probes actually undergo a conformational change (positional shift) due to target activation and by undertaking a variety of labeling reactions (known in the art to be necessary to find optimal labeling conditions in fluorescence labeling, etc.), it can be determined which chemistries lead to a label that undergoes conformational change when the probe is activated.
  • various coupling chemistries and/or stoichiometries (labehprobe) to determine which coupling chemistry gives the optimal signal in the nonlinear optical measurement. For instance, it may not be known a priori which sub-parts of the probes actually undergo a conformational change (positional shift) due to target activation and by undertaking a variety of labeling reactions (known in the art to
  • ion channels or receptors such as GPCR receptors are labeled directly in biological cells with nonlinear-active labels and/or enhancers.
  • nonlinear-active labels and/or enhancers For instance, the publication by Glauner et al. (Nature, v.402 813 (1999)) demonstrates fluorescent labeling of a Shaker potassium ion channel in whole cells. A background signal is measured. When agonist binds to the receptors, it induces a conformational change in the receptors, changing the orientation of the labels and thus the nonlinear optical signal (e.g., the signal intensity). A surface-selective nonlinear optical apparatus is used thus to measure ligand-gated conformational changes in the receptors via the labels and/or enhancers in whole cells.
  • Fundamental light is focused onto a cell layer that has been cultured on Becton- Dickinson Falcon plates, for instance — and the second or higher harmonic is collected according to procedures well known in the art.
  • the labeled cells are suspended in a medium and fundamental light is focused into a region of the sample containing these cells.
  • Fig. 18 depicts an embodiment of this apparatus.
  • Second harmonic light is collected according to procedures known in the art, for instance at 0 or 90 degrees with respect to the fundamental beam.
  • enhancers or decorators or both are suspended or dissolved in the medium with labeled cells or molecules to enhance the nonlinear response of the cells or molecules.
  • probes are placed in artificial membranes or liposomes. If probes are expressed in cells, then can be purified and reconstituted into these membranes according to procedures well known in the art.
  • the probes are in contact with, cultured on or patterned on surface that is itself in contact with a prism (or is the underside of the prism).
  • the prism allows total internal reflection of the fundamental at the interface containing the probes and thus high Fresnel factors (electric field amplitudes) leading to higher nonlinear optical signals.
  • the fundamental beam undergoes total internal reflection at the interface containing the probes and its evanescent wave is used to generate the nonlinear light.
  • Figure 2 illustrates an embodiment of this type, hi Figure 2, an index matching material or liquid (75) is used to couple the prism (70) to a substrate containing the microarray (80) in contact with solution containing targets (85), whereby total internal reflection occurs at the interface between material (80) and solution (85).
  • the prism material can be, for example, BK7 type glass (Melles Griot) and the index matching material obtained commercially from Coming Co ⁇ . or Nye Co ⁇ .
  • the experimental set-up is as described in Salafsky and Eisenthal, "Protein adso ⁇ tion at interfaces detected by second harmonic generation," J. Phys. Chem. B, 104 (32): 7752-7755 (2000), Salafsky and Eisenthal, "Second harmomc spectroscopy: detection and orientation of molecules at a biomembrane interface," Chem. Phys.Lett. 319 (5-6): 435-439 (2000), and references set forth therein.
  • a femtosecond pulsed laser (Mail-Tai, Spectra-Physics) is used as the source of fundamental light at 800 nm operating at 80 MHz with ⁇ 200 fs pulses at 1 W average power.
  • the laser beam directed onto the entrance aperture of a Dove prism (Melles Griot, BK-7) and focused with a concave lens (Oriel) (spot size - 50 micron diameter).
  • the Dove prism is mounted in a teflon holder and in contact with buffer or distilled water.
  • the beam undergoes total internal reflection (evanescent wave generation) within the prism and the fundamental and second harmonic beams emerge roughly collinearly from the exit aperture.
  • a color filter is used to block the fundamental light while passing the second harmonic to a monochromator (2 nm bandwidth slit).
  • the monochromator is scanned from 380 - 500 nm to detect the second harmonic spectrum. If necessary, the fundamental light wavelength can be tuned as well.
  • a single photon counting detector and photomultiplier tube are used to detect the output of the monochromator and a PC with software are used to record the data and control the monochromator wavelength.
  • a background second harmonic signal is measured before addition of ligand or other stimulus to produce or test for conformational change in the probes.
  • Oligodeoxyribonucleotides with suitable structures for molecular beacons are selected and synthesized according to procedures known to one of ordinary skill in the art with a primary amine at the 3' end and a disulfide group at the 5' end and a biotin group that replaces a dT.
  • the following MB analogue can be used, for example: 5'-CCT AGC TCT AAA TCG CTA TGG TCG CGC(Biotin dT)AG G-3' (SEQ ID NO: 6).
  • oxazole (SE) l-(3-(succinimidyloxycarbonyl) benzyl)-4-(5-(4- methoxyphenyl) oxazol-2-yl)pyridinium bromide (PyMPO, SE: Molecular Probes Co ⁇ .) is conjugated to the primary amine.
  • PyMPO Molecular Probes Co ⁇ .
  • the reaction mixture is stined at room temperature for 2 hours.
  • the reaction product is purified with a Sephadex column (NAP-5; Amersham Pharmacia Biotech) equilibrated with 10 ml of 0.1 M triethylammonium acetate (pH 6.5).
  • the 5 '-end disulfide is cleaved and the free sulfhydryl is covalently attached to a 1.4 nm diameter gold cluster that serves to enhance the nonlinear response of the oxazole dye (Nanogold; Nanoprobes), and which comes with one N-propylmaleimide and has been passivated with water-soluble phosphine ligands.
  • the coupling of the Au particle is achieved according to procedures well known to one of ordinary skill in the art.
  • the disulfide bond is cleaved with dithiothreitol (DTT), and the oligonucleotide is purified of excess DTT before coupling to the gold.
  • An amount of 10 ⁇ l of 1 M DTT is added to 25 ⁇ l of oligonucleotide mixed with 75 ⁇ l of sodium bicarbonate, pH 8.3.
  • the oligonucleotide solution is purified using reverse-phase chromatography, as described.
  • the fractions containing the activated oligonucleotide are purified using a Sephadex column (NAP-5) equilibrated with water.
  • elution product 37 pmol to 370 pmol of DNA, suspended in 180 ⁇ l of water
  • 6 nmol of the monomaleimido-gold particles (Nanoprobes) in aqueous 20 mM NaH2PO4, 150 mM NaCl, 1 mM ethylenediamine tetraethyl acetate (EDTA) buffer, pH 6.5, containing 10% isopropanol at 4°C for 24 h.
  • Reaction products are analyzed by gel electrophoresis on a 10% nondenaturing acrylamide gel performed in Tris-borate EDTA (TBE) at 10 V/cm.
  • TBE Tris-borate EDTA
  • the biotinylated MB analogue with attached nonlinear-active dye and gold nanoparticles are coupled to streptavidin-derivatized glass according to well known procedures.
  • the biotinylated MB analogues are immobilized on the etched portion of a glass fiber.
  • a batch of optical fibers is used in a single immobilization cycle.
  • About 2 cm of cladding is stripped away from the core by chemical etching at one end of the fiber probe.
  • the fiber probe is pe ⁇ endicularly dipped into a 49% hydrofluoric acid solution for 12 min.
  • the HF solution is covered by heptane solvent.
  • the etched fiber probe is washed with ultrapure water before being used for the subsequent immobilization experiment.
  • Biotinylated MB analogues are immobilized on the etched portion of the fiber for DNA sensing.
  • the etched fiber probes are first cleaned by immersion in a 1:1 v/v concentrated HCl/MeOH mixture for 30 min., rinsed in water, and submerged in concentrated sulfuric acid for 30 min. Further rinsing and then boiling in water for 8-10 min follows. Silanization of the fibers is performed by immersing them in a freshly prepared 1 % (v/v) solution of DETA (Trimethoxysilylpropy ⁇ diethylenetriamine purchased from United Chemical Technologies, Bristol PA) in ImM acetic acid for 20 min at room temperature. The DETA-modified fiber probes are thoroughly rinsed with water to remove excess DETA. The silanized fiber probes are dried under nitrogen and fixed by heating in a 120 °C oven for 5 min. Then the silanized fibers are immersed in 0.5 mg/ml NHS-LC-biotin
  • the streptavidin-immobilized optical fibers are then immersed with a biotinylated MB analogue solution (10 "6 M in lOmM phosphate buffer at pH 7.0) for as long as 20 min or overnight at 4°C to allow the biotinylated MB analogue to be immobilized on the surface.
  • a biotinylated MB analogue solution (10 "6 M in lOmM phosphate buffer at pH 7.0) for as long as 20 min or overnight at 4°C to allow the biotinylated MB analogue to be immobilized on the surface.
  • the optical fibers are intenogated optically using second harmonic generation by propagating a fundamental beam down the fiber and measuring the intensity of the second harmonic beam back-reflected after it interacts evanescently with the MB analogue at the distal end of the fiber.
  • the oligonucleotide produces a large amount of second harmonic light due to the proximity of the oxazole dye and the Au particle in the hai ⁇ in-loop structure of the MB analogue; the intensity of the second harmonic light in this case can serve as a background.
  • the hybridization reaction causes the dye and the Au particle to spatially separate, greatly reducing the intensity of the second harmonic light detected.
  • a linear relationship can be constructed between the amount of hybridization that occurs and the intensity of the second harmonic light and thus the derivatized optical fibers with detection system serves as an optical device for detection of complementary targets to the selected probe.
  • Glass microspheres which are optically encoded with fluorescent dyes are derivatized with the MB analogues and an anay of microspheres with distinct oligonucleotide probes is prepared at the distal end of an optical fiber as found in the art (e.g., U.S. Pat. No. 5,250,264, Walt et al.; U.S. Pat. No. 5,298,741 Walt et al.; U.S. Pat. No. 5,252,494 Walt et al; U.S. Pat. No. 6,023,540 Walt et al.; U.S. Pat. No. 5,814,524 Walt et al.; U.S. Pat. No. 5,244,813 Walt et al.; U.S.
  • Pat. No. 5,512,490 Walt et al. and commercially (Illumina Co ⁇ oration, for example). These anays can be used to detect multiple target sequences.
  • the optical encoding can be accomplished using nonlinear-active dyes with different spectral characteristics from the beacon-associated nonlinear-active dye so that the both the encoding and the hybridization detection can be made using a nonlinear optical technique such as second harmonic generation.
  • an applied electric field can be applied to the MB analogues in an EFISH method to create the required non- centrosymmetric condition.
  • one is interested in finding drugs, antagonists, agonists or other species which block or reduce the binding of the MB analogues with targets - these compounds may be refened to as 'inhibitors' or 'blockers.
  • labeled targets are bound to probes at the interface.
  • the inhibitors are added to the sample, and if the particular species being tested is successful in blocking or reducing the probe-target binding, the nonlinear optical light measured will change - the background radiation in this embodiment is due to target-probe binding; the displacement of the targets from the probes at the interface by the inhibitors leads to a change in the nonlinear optical light measured, for instance as a decrease in intensity of the nonlinear radiation generated by the interface or a wavelength shift in the nonlinear radiation spectrum.
  • controls to determine degree of non-specific nonlinear optical signals can be performed according to standard procedures well known to one skilled in the art.
  • n nucleic acid microanays for example, the intensity of the nonlinear optical signal at regions between the probe-containing regions will produce a background signal that can increase somewhat (but is substantially smaller than the signal due to specific probe-target binding reactions) upon addition of targets that are either complementary or non-complementary to the probes.
  • This background signal can be accounted for by, for example, adding only non-complementary probes and measuring the nonlinear optical signal in regions containing probes and not containing probes. Measuring the nonlinear optical signals in the presence of blockers known to prevent probe- target binding is another control technique well known to one skilled in the art for determining the amount of background or artifactual signal present in a larger signal of interest, in this case the specific probe-target binding reaction.
  • the amine-reactive oxazole dye (SE) l-(3- (succinimidyloxycarbonyl) benzyl)-4-(5-(4-methoxyphenyl) oxazol-2-yl)pyridinium bromide (PyMPO, SE: Molecular Probes Co ⁇ .) is reacted with a 1:1 molar ratio of ethylenediamine under the conditions specified by the Molecular Probes direction and is allowed to react to completion.
  • the oxazole-based dye now contains a single amine group. This can be coupled to the primary amine on an oligonucleotide using a homobifunctional crosslinking agent (Pierce, Rockford IL).
  • a nonlinear-active dye with attached biotin can be synthesized according to procedures known to one of ordinary skill in the art to create dye- biotin molecules that are the nonlinear-active analogues of the biotin-fluorescent dye molecules useful for immobilization of oligonucleotides.
  • a peptide-nucleic analogue (PNA) molecular beacon (hai ⁇ in-loop structure) of 18-25 base-pairs sequence is labeled with PyMPO, SE (Molecular Probes Co ⁇ .) at the 3' or 5' end (or, alternatively, at cytosine base-pair locations) according to procedures well established in the art.
  • the PNA is placed in purified water solution and oriented with an applied electric field to generate a non-centrosymmetric region. Addition of PNA molecules with complementary sequence to the labeled PNA will cause a conformational change and thus a change in measured properties of the nonlinear optical beams.
  • PNAs linear, non-hai ⁇ in loop
  • PNAs can also be attached to glass or silica surfaces according to procedures well known to those skilled in the art. Addition of sequence- complementary DNA to purified water in contact with the glass surface containing the PNAs results in a conformational change in the PNAs on the surface, and thus a change in the measured physical properties of the nonlinear optical light beam.

Landscapes

  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Chemical & Material Sciences (AREA)
  • Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
  • Life Sciences & Earth Sciences (AREA)
  • Nanotechnology (AREA)
  • Immunology (AREA)
  • Molecular Biology (AREA)
  • Urology & Nephrology (AREA)
  • Crystallography & Structural Chemistry (AREA)
  • Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • General Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • General Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
  • Hematology (AREA)
  • Biomedical Technology (AREA)
  • Materials Engineering (AREA)
  • Biotechnology (AREA)
  • Cell Biology (AREA)
  • Condensed Matter Physics & Semiconductors (AREA)
  • Microbiology (AREA)
  • Composite Materials (AREA)
  • Food Science & Technology (AREA)
  • Medicinal Chemistry (AREA)
  • Analytical Chemistry (AREA)
  • Biochemistry (AREA)
  • Pathology (AREA)
  • Investigating Or Analysing Materials By Optical Means (AREA)
  • Length Measuring Devices By Optical Means (AREA)

Abstract

A nonlinear optical technique, such as second or third harmonic or sum or difference frequency generation, is used to detect binding interactions, or the degree or extent of binding, in an applied external force field. The external field is used to create non-centrosymmetric region in a sample comprising the probes and/or targets. Targets and probes can be labeled with non-linear-active moieties, or modulators of the nonlinear active properties of these moieties. In one aspect of the present invention, the nonlinear optical technique detects a change in nonlinear activity in an applied external force field of a probe due to target binding. In another aspect of the invention, the nonlinear optical technique screens candidate probes by detecting a change in nonlinear activity in an applied external force field due to a probe-target interaction. In another aspect of the invention, the nonlinear optical technique screens candidate modulators of a probe-target interaction by detecting a change in nonlinear activity in an applied external force field in the presence of the modulator.

Description

METHOD AND APPARATUS USING A NONLINEAR OPTICAL TECHNIQUE FOR DETECTION OF PROBE-TARGET INTERACTIONS IN A FIELD
CROSS REFERENCE TO RELATED APPLICATIONS
This application claims benefit of United States provisional applications number 60/306,040, entitled "Method and Apparatus Using a Nonlinear Optical Technique for Detection of Probe-Target Interactions In Homogeneous Phase Using An Applied Electric Field", filed July 17, 2001; 60/347,821, entitled "Method and Apparatus Using a Nonlinear Optical Technique for Detection of Probe-Target Interactions In An Applied Electric Field", filed October 23, 2001; 60/354,668, entitled "Method and Apparatus Using a Nonlinear Optical Technique for Detection of Probe-Target Interactions In An Applied Field", filed
February 6, 2002; the sum and substance of such applications being incorporated by reference herein in their entireties.
1. FIELD OF THE INVENTION
The present invention relates to a method for detecting interactions between biological components using a nonlinear optical technique. The sample comprises probes and targets which can be poled by an applied force field - an electric, magnetic, or fluid flow, for example - resulting in a non-centrosymmetric region capable of generating nonlinear optical radiation, and used in the present invention to measure probe-target binding reactions or their effects. In a preferred embodiment of the invention, probe-target binding is measured in homogeneous phase (i.e., in the bulk, not at an interface). Another preferred embodiment of the invention is the application of an electric field at an interface to study effects of the field on a probe-target reaction - for example, with voltage-gated ion channels as probes, in which the state or properties of the ion channels is modulated by the field. In this case, the probes, targets or both can be labeled with nonlinear-active moieties, or modulators of the properties of these moieties. In a specific embodiment aspect of the invention, nonlinear- active decorators can be used instead of nonlinear-active labels and probe-target binding detected in the homogeneous phase (i.e., the bulk) or at an interface.
2. BACKGROUND OF THE INVENTION
Detection of Binding Detecting and quantifying binding between biomolecules is of central interest in modern molecular biology and medicine. Genomics and proteomics research is increasingly directed toward this problem, and demand high-throughput analysis of a variety of biological interactions. Many schemes for doing this rely on immobilization of molecules, often oligonucleotides or proteins, to solid surfaces. However, homogeneous assays are highly sought after because they can be performed with a minimum number of processing steps and offer native reaction environments with no solid surface or artificial structure. Molecular Beacons
Molecular beacons are also used for the detection of binding interactions. A molecular beacon (MB) probe is well known in the art as a hairpin-loop, single-stranded oligonucleotide comprising a probe sequence embedded within complementary sequences that form a hairpin stem. The loop portion of the molecule can form a double-stranded DNA in the presence of complementary nucleic acid. A fluorophore is covalently attached to one end of the oligonucleotide, and a nonfluorescent quencher is covalently attached to the other end. There are typically five to eight bases at each side of the two ends of the beacon which are complementary to each other. The stem keeps these two moieties in close proximity to each other, causing the fluorescence of the fluorophore to be quenched by energy transfer. When the beacon binds to its target, the rigidity of the probe-target duplex forces the stem to unwind, which causes the separation of the fluorophore and the quencher and the restoration of fluorescence. This permits the detection of probe-target hybrids in the presence of unhybridized probes.
The following (and references therein) describe the production, design and use of molecular beacons (MBs) in the fluorescence literature:
Sequence Dependent Rigidity of Single Stranded DNA, Phys. Rev. Lett., 85, 2400 No. 11, Noel L. Goddard,l Gregoire Bonnet, 1 Oleg Krichevsky,2 and Albert Libchaber, 2000.
Metal-containing DNA hairpins as hybridization probes, H.S. Joshi and Y. Tor, Chem. Commun., 2001, 549-550.
Spectral Genotyping of Human Alleles, L.G. Kostrikis, S.Tyagi, M.M. Mhlanga, D.D. Ho, F.R. Kramer, Science v. 279, Feb. 1998. Molecular Beacons for DNA Biosensors with Micrometer to Submicrometer Dimensions, XXiu, W. Farmerie, S. Schuster, W. Tan, Anal. Biochem., 283, 56-63, 2000.
Multiplex detection of single-nucleotide variations using molecular beacons, S.A.E. Marras, F.R. Kramer, S. Tyagi, Genetic Analysis: Biomolecular Engineering, 14 (1999), 151-156.
Screening unlabeled DNA targets with randomly ordered fiber-optic gene arrays, FJ. Steemers, J.A. Ferguson, D.R. Walt, Nature Biotechnology, v. 18, 2000, 91. Wavelength-shifting molecular beacons, S. Tyagi, S.A.E. Marras, F.R. Kramer, Nature Biotechnology, v. 18, 2000, 1191.
Molecular Beacons: Probes that Fluoresce upon Hybridization, S.Tyagi, F.R. Kramer, Nature Biotechnology, v. 14, 1996, 303.
Technology for microarray analysis of gene expression, A. Watson, A. Mazumder, M. Stewar, S. Balasubramanian, Current Opinion in Biotechnology, 9, 609-614, 1998. Design of a Molecular Beacon DNA Probe with Two Fluorophores, P. Zhang, T. Beck, W. Tan,
Angew. Chem. h t. Ed. 40, 402, 2001 Bonnet G, Tyagi S, Libchaber A, and Kramer FR (1999) Thermodynamic basis of the enhanced specificity of structured DNA probes. Proc Natl Acad Sci USA 96, 6171-6176.
Dubertret B, Calame M, and Libchaber A (2001) Single-mismatch detection using gold- quenched fluorescent oligonucleotides. Nat Biotechnol 19, 365-370.
Marras SAE, Kramer FR, and Tyagi S (1999) Multiplex detection of single-nucleotide variations using molecular beacons. Genet Anal 14, 151-156.
Mullah B and Livak K (1999) Efficient automated synthesis of molecular beacons. Nucleosides & Nucleotides 18, 1311-1312.
Ortiz E, Estrada G, and Lizardi PM (1998) PNA molecular beacons for rapid detection of PCR amplicons. Mol Cell Probes 12, 219-226. Tyagi S, Marras SAE, and Kramer FR (2000) Wavelength-shifting molecular beacons. Nat Biotechnol 18, 1191-1196.
Tyagi S, Bratu DP, and Kramer FR (1998) Multicolor molecular beacons for allele discrimination. Nat Biotechnol 16, 49-53.
Tyagi S and Kramer FR (1996) Molecular beacons: probes that fluoresce upon hybridization. Nat Biotechnol 14, 303-308.
El-Hajj HH, Marras SA, Tyagi S, Kramer FR, and Alland D (2001) Detection of rifampin resistance in Mycobacterium tuberculosis in a single tube with molecular beacons. J Clin Microbiol 39, 4131-4137.
Giesendorf BA, Vet JA, Tyagi S, Mensink EJ, Trijbels FJ, and Blom HJ (1998) Molecular beacons: a new approach for semiautomated mutation analysis. Clin Chem 44, 482-486.
Kostrikis LG, Tyagi S, Mhlanga MM, Ho DD, and Kramer FR (1998) Spectral genotyping of human alleles. Science 279, 1228-1229.
Piatek AS, Telenti A, Murray MR, El-Hajj H, Jacobs WR, Jr., Kramer FR, and Alland D (2000) Genotypic analysis of Mycobacterium tuberculosis in two distinct populations using molecular beacons: implications for rapid susceptibility testing. Antimicrob Agents Chemother 44, 103-110.
Piatek AS, Tyagi S, Pol AC, Telenti A, Miller LP, Kramer FR, and Alland D (1998) Molecular beacon sequence analysis for detecting drug resistance in Mycobacterium tuberculosis. Nat Biotechnol 16, 359-363.
Rhee JT, Piatek AS, Small PM, Harris LM, Chaparro SV, Kramer FR, and Alland D (1999) Molecular epidemiologic evaluation of transmissibility and virulence of Mycobacterium tuberculosis. J Clin Microbiol 37, 1764-1770.
Szuhai K, Ouweland JM, Dirks RW, Lemaitre M, Truffert JC, Janssen GM, Tanke HJ, Holme E, Maassen JA, and Raap AK (2001) Simultaneous A8344G heteroplasmy and mitochondrial DNA copy number quantification in myoclonus epilepsy and ragged-red fibers (MERRF) syndrome by a multiplex molecular beacon based real-time fluorescence PCR. Nucleic Acids Res 29, El 3.
Szuhai K, Sandhaus E, Kolkman-Uljee SM, Lemaitre M, Truffert JC, Dirks RW, Tanke HJ, Fleuren GJ, Schuuring E, and Raap AK (2001) A novel strategy for human papillomavirus detection and genotyping with SybrGreen and molecular beacon polymerase chain reaction. Am J Pathol 159, 1651-1660.
Tapp I, Malmberg L, Rennel E, Wik M, and Syvanen AC (2000) Homogeneous scoring of single-nucleotide polymoφhisms: comparison of the 5 '-nuclease TaqMan assay and molecular beacon probes. Biotechniques 28, 732-738.
Vogelstein B and Kinzler KW (1999) Digital PCR. Proc Natl Acad Sci USA 96, 9236-9241.
Arnold SF, Tims E, and McGrath BE (1999) Identification of bone morphogenetic proteins and their receptors in human breast cancer cell lines: importance of BMP2. Cytokine 11, 1031-1037.
Chen W, Martinez G, and Mulchandani A (2000) Molecular beacons: a real-time polymerase chain reaction assay for detecting Salmonella. Anal Biochem 280, 166-172.
Clayton SJ, Scott FM, Walker J, Callaghan K, Haque K, Liloglou T, Xinarianos G, Shawcross S, Ceuppens P, Field JK, and Fox JC (2000) K-ras point mutation detection in lung cancer: comparison of two approaches to somatic mutation detection using ARMS allele-specific amplification. Clin Chem 46, 1929-1938.
Devor EJ (2001) Use of molecular beacons to verify that the serine hydroxymethyltransferase pseudogene SHMT-psl is unique to the order primates. Genome Biol 2. 6.1-6.5.
Dracheva S, Marras SAE, Elhakem AL, Kramer FR, Davis KL, and Haroutunian V (2001) N- Methyl-D-Aspartic Acid Receptor expression in Dorsolateral Prefrontal Cortex of elderly patients with schizophrenia. American Journal of Psychiatry. 158, 1400-1410.
Durand R, Eslahpazire J, Jafari S, Delabre JF, Marmorat-Khuong A, di Piazza JP, and Le Bras J (2000) Use of molecular beacons to detect an antifolate resistance-associated mutation in Plasmodium falciparum. Antimicrob Agents Chemother 44, 3461-3464. Eun AJC and Wong SM (2000) Molecular beacons: a new approach to plant virus detection. Phytopathology 90, 269-275. Fortin NY, Mulchandani A, and Chen W (2001) Use of real-time polymerase chain reaction and molecular beacons for the detection of Escherichia coli O157:H7. Anal Biochem 289, 281-288.
Gonzalez E, Bamshad M, Sato N, Mummidi S, Dhanda R, Catano G, Cabrera S, McBride M, Cao XH, Merrill G, O'Connell P, Bowden DW, Freedman BI, Anderson S A, Walter EA,
Evans JS, Stephan KT, Clark RA, Tyagi S, Ahuja SS, Dolan MJ, and Ahuja SK (1999) Race- specific HIV-1 disease-modifying effects associated with CCR5 haplotypes. Proc Natl Acad Sci U S A 96, 12004-12009. Heil SG, Lievers KJ, Boers GH, Verhoef P, den Heijer M, Trijbels FJ, and Blom HJ (2000) Betaine-Homocysteine Methyltransferase (BHMT): genomic sequencing and relevance to hyperhomocysteinemia and vascular disease in humans. Mol Genet Metab 71, 511-519.
Helps C, Reeves N, Tasker S, and Harbour D (2001) Use of real-time quantitative PCR to detect Chlamydophila felis infection. J Clin Microbiol 39, 2675-2676.
Kota R, Holton TA, and Henry RJ (1999) Detection of transgenes in crop plants using molecular beacon assays. Plant Mol Biology Rep 17, 363-370. Lewin SR, Vesanen M, Kostrikis L, Hurley A, Duran M, Zhang L, Ho DD, and Markowitz M
(1999) Use of real-time PCR and molecular beacons to detect virus replication in human immunodeficiency virus type 1 -infected individuals on prolonged effective antiretro viral therapy. J Virol 73, 6099-6103. Li Q, Liang J, Luan G, Zhang Y, and Wang K (2000) Molecular beacon-based homogeneous fluorescence PCR assay for the diagnosis of infectious diseases. Analytical Sciences 16, 245- 248.
Manganelli R, Dubnau E, Tyagi S, Kramer FR, and Smith I (1999) Differential expression of 10 sigma factor genes in Mycobacterium tuberculosis. Mol Microbiol 31, 715-724.
Martinson JJ, Hong L, Karanicolas R, Moore JP, and Kostrikis LG (2000) Global distribution of the CCR2-64I7CCR5-59653T HIV-1 disease- protective haplotype. Aids 14, 483-489. McKillip JL and Drake M (2000) Molecular beacon polymerase chain reaction detection of Escherichia coli O157:H7 in milk. J Food Prot 63, 855-859.
Metzner KJ, Jin X, Lee FV, Gettie A, Bauer DE, Di Mascio M, Perelson AS, Marx PA, Ho DD, Kostrikis LG, and Connor RI (2000) Effects of in vivo CD8(+) T cell depletion on virus replication in rhesus macaques immunized with a live, attenuated simian immunodeficiency virus vaccine. J Exp Med 191, 1921-1931.
Park S, Wong M, Marras SA, Cross EW, Kiehn TE, Chaturvedi V, Tyagi S, and Perlin DS
(2000) Rapid identification of Candida dubliniensis using a species-specific molecular beacon. J Clin Microbiol 38, 2829-2836. Pierce KE, Rice JE, Sanchez JA, Brenner C, and Wangh LJ (2000) Real-time PCR using molecular beacons for accurate detection of the Y chromosome in single human blastomeres. Mol Hum Reprod 6, 1155-1164.
Poddar SK (2000) Symmetric vs asymmetric PCR and molecular beacon probe in the detection of a target gene of adenovirus. Mol Cell Probes 14, 25-32.
Poddar SK (1999) Detection of adenovirus using PCR and molecular beacon. J Virol Methods 82, 19-26.
Sebti A, Kiehn TE, Perlin D, Chaturvedi V, Wong M, Doney A, Park S, and Sepkowitz KA (2001) Candida dubliniensis at a Cancer Center. Clin Infect Dis 32, 1034-1038. Shih IM, Zhou W, Goodman SN, Lengauer C, Kinzler KW, and Vogelstein B (2001)
Evidence that genetic instability occurs at an early stage of colorectal tumorigenesis. Cancer Res 61, 818-822.
Smit ML, Giesendorf BA, Vet JA, Trijbels FJ, and Blom HJ (2001) Semiautomated DNA mutation analysis using a robotic workstation and molecular beacons. Clin Chem 47, 739- 744.
Steuerwald N, Cohen J, Herrera RJ, and Brenner CA (1999) Analysis of gene expression in single oocytes and embryos by real-time rapid cycle fluorescence monitored RT-PCR. Mol Hum Reprod 5, 1034-1039.
Valentin A, Trivedi H, Lu W, Kostrikis LG, and Pavlakis GN (2000) CXCR4 mediates entry and productive infection of syncytia-inducing (X4) HIV-1 strains in primary macrophages. Virology 269, 294-304.
Van Schie RC, Marras SA, Conroy JM, Nowak NJ, Catanese JJ, and de Jong PJ (2000) Semiautomated clone verification by real-time PCR using molecular beacons. Biotechniques 29, 1296-1306. Vet JA, Majithia AR, Marras SAE, Tyagi S, Dube S, Poiesz BJ, and Kramer FR (1999)
Multiplex detection of four pathogenic retroviruses using molecular beacons. Proc Natl Acad Sci USA 96, 6394-6399.
Xiao G, Chicas A, Olivier M, Taya Y, Tyagi S, Kramer FR, and Bargonetti J (2000) A DNA damage signal is required for p53 to activate gadd45. Cancer Res 60, 1711-1719.
Zhang L, Lewin SR, Markowitz M, Lin HH, Skulsky E, Karanicolas R, He Y, Jin X, Tuttleton S, Vesanen M, Spiegel H, Kost R, van Lunzen J, Stellbrink HJ, Wolinsky S, Borkowsky W, Palumbo P, Kostrikis LG, and Ho DD (1999) Measuring recent thymic emigrants in blood of normal and HIV-1 -infected individuals before and after effective therapy. J Exp Med 190, 725-732.
De Baar MP, van Dooren MW, de Rooij E, Bakker M, van Gemen B, Goudsmit J, and de Ronde A (2001) Single rapid real-time monitored isothermal RNA amplification assay for quantification of Human Immunodeficiency Virus Type 1 isolates from groups M, N, and O. J Clin Microbiol 39, 1378-1384.
De Baar MP, Ti mermans EC, Bakker M, de Rooij E, van Gemen B, and Goudsmit J (2001) One-tube real-time isothermal amplification assay to identify and distinguish Human Immunodeficiency Virus Type 1 subtypes A, B, and C and circulating recombinant forms AE and AG. J Clin Microbiol 39, 1895-1902.
De Ronde A, van Dooren M, van Der Hoek L, Bouwhuis D, de Rooij E, van Gemen B, de Boer R, and Goudsmit J (2001) Establishment of new transmissible and drug-sensitive Human Immunodeficiency Virus Type 1 wild types due to transmission of nucleoside analogue-resistant virus. J Virol 75, 595-602.
Greijer A.E., Adriaanse H.M., Dekkers C.A., and Middeldorp J.M. (2002) Multiplex realtime NASBA for monitoring expression dynamics of human cytomegalovirus encoded IE1 and pp67 RNA. J Clin Virol 24, 57-66.
Klerks MM, Leone GO, Verbeek M, van den Heuvel JF, and Schoen CD (2001) Development of a multiplex AmpliDet RNA for the simultaneous detection of Potato leafroll virus and Potato virus Y in potato tubers. J Virol Methods 93, 115-125.
Leone G, van Schijndel H, van Gemen B, Kramer FR, and Schoen CD (1998) Molecular beacon probes combined with amplification by NASBA enable homogeneous, real-time detection of RNA. Nucleic Acids Res 26, 2150-2155. Lanciotti R.S. and Kerst A.J. (2001) Nucleic acid sequence-based amplification assays for rapid detection of West Nile and St. Louis encephalitis viruses. J Clin Microbiol 39, 4506- 4513.
Szemes M., Klerks M.M., van den Heuvel J.F., and Schoen CD. (2002) Development of a multiplex AmpliDet RNA assay for simultaneous detection and typing of potato virus Y isolates. J Virol Methods 100, 83-96.
Van Beuningen R, Marras SAE, Kramer FR, Oosterlaken T, Weusten J, Borst G, and van de Wiel P (2001) Development of a high-throughput detection system for HIV-1 using real-time NASBA based on molecular beacons. Proceedings - SPIE the International Society for Optical Engineering. 4264, 66-71.
Yates S, Penning M, Goudsmit J, Frantzen I, van De Weijer B, van Strijp D, and van Gemen B (2001) Quantitative detection of Hepatitis B Virus DNA by real-time nucleic acid sequence-based amplification with molecular beacon detection. J Clin Microbiol 39, 3656- 3665.
Brown LJ, Cummins J, Hamilton A, and Brown T (2000) Molecular beacons attached to glass beads fluoresce upon hybridisation to target DNA. Chemical Comm, 621-622.
Liu X, Farmerie W, Schuster S, and Tan W (2000) Molecular beacons for DNA biosensors with micrometer to submicrometer dimensions. Anal Biochem 283, 56-63.
Liu X and Tan W (1999) A fiber-optic evanescent wave DNA biosensor based on novel molecular beacons. Anal Chem 71, 5054-5059. Steemers FJ, Ferguson JA, and Walt DR (2000) Screening unlabeled DNA targets with randomly ordered fiber-optic gene arrays. Nat Biotechnol 18, 91-94. Antony T, Thomas T, Sigal LH, Shirahata A, and Thomas TJ (2001) A molecular beacon strategy for the thermodynamic characterization of triplex DNA: triplex formation at the promoter region of cyclin DI. Biochemistry 40, 9387-9395.
Bonnet G, Krichevsky O, and Libchaber A (1998) Kinetics of conformational fluctuations in DNA hairpin-loops. Proc Natl Acad Sci USA 95, 8602-8606.
Fang X, Li JJ, and Tan W (2000) Using molecular beacons to probe molecular interactions between lactate dehydrogenase and single-stranded DNA. Anal Chem 72, 3280-3285. Gao W, Tyagi S, Kramer FR, and Goldman E (1997) Messenger RNA release from ribosomes during 5 '-translational blockage by consecutive low-usage arginine but not leucine codons in Escherichia coli. Mol Microbiol 25, 707-716.
Goddard NL, Bonnet G, Krichevsky O, and Libchaber A (2000) Sequence dependent rigidity of single stranded DNA. Phys Rev Lett 85, 2400-2403.
Gold B, Rodriguez M, Marras SAE, Pentecost M, and Smith I (2001) The Mycobacterium tuberculosis IdeR is a dual functional regulator that controls transcription of genes involved in iron acquisition, iron storage, and survival in macrophages. Molecular Microbiology 42, 851-866.
Jordens JZ, Lanham S, Pickett MA, A arasekara S, Abeywickrema I, and Watt PJ (2000) Amplification with molecular beacon primers and reverse line blotting for the detection and typing of human papillomaviruses. J Virol Methods 89, 29-37.
Joshi HS and Tor Y (2001) Metal-containing DNA hairpins as hybridization probes. Chemical Comm 6, 559-550.
Kaboev OK, Luchkina LA, Tret'iakov AN, and Bahrmand AR (2000) PCR hot start using primers with the structure of molecular beacons (haiφin-like structure). Nucleic Acids Res 28, E94.
Li JJ, Geyer R, and Tan W (2000) Using molecular beacons as a sensitive fluorescence assay for enzymatic cleavage of single-stranded DNA. Nucleic Acids Res 28, E52.
Li JJ, Fang XH, Schuster SM, and Tan WH (2000) Molecular beacons: a novel approach to detect protein - DNA interactions. Angew Chem Int Ed 39, 1049-1052.
Lindquist JN, Kauschke SG, Stefanovic B, Burchardt ER, and Brenner DA (2000) Characterization of the interaction between alphaCP(2) and the 3'- untranslated region of collagen alphal(I) mRNA. Nucleic Acids Res 28, 4306-4316.
Liu J., Feldman P., and Chung T.D. (2002) Real-time monitoring in vitro transcription using molecular beacons. Anal Biochem 300, 40-45. Matsuo T (1998) In situ visualization of mRNA for basic fibroblast growth factor in living cells. Biochimica Biophysica Acta 1379, 178-184.
Nazarenko IA, Bhatnagar SK, and Hohman RJ (1997) A closed tube format for amplification and detection of DNA based on energy transfer. Nucleic Acids Res 25, 2516-2521.
Saha BK, Tian B, and Bucy RP (2001) Quantitation of HIV-1 by real-time PCR with a unique fluorogenic probe. J Virol Methods 93, 33-42. Schofield P, Pell AN, and Krause DO (1997) Molecular beacons: trial of a fluorescence- based solution hybridization technique for ecological studies with ruminal bacteria. Appl Environ Microbiol 63, 1143-1147.
Sokol DL, Zhang X, Lu P, and Gewirtz AM (1998) Real time detection of DNA.RNA hybridization in living cells. Proc Natl Acad Sci USA 95, 11538-11543.
Strouse RJ, Hakki FZ, Wang SC, DeFusco AW, Garrett JL, and Schenerman MA (2000) Using molecular beacons to quantify low levels of type I endonuclease activity. Biopharm 13, 40-47.
Tan W, Fang X, Li J, and Liu X (2000) Molecular beacons: a novel DNA probe for nucleic acid and protein studies. Chemistry 6, 1107-1111.
Thelwell N, Millington S, Solinas A, Booth J, and Brown T (2000) Mode of action and application of scoφion primers to mutation detection. Nucleic Acids Res 28, 3752-3761.
Tung CH, Mahmood U, Bredow S, and Weissleder R (2000) In vivo imaging of proteolytic enzyme activity using a novel molecular reporter. Cancer Res 60, 4953-4958. Whitcombe D, Theaker J, Guy SP, Brown T, and Little S (1999) Detection of PCR products using self-probing amplicons and fluorescence. Nat Biotechnol 17, 804-807.
Yamamoto R, Baba T, and Kumar PK (2000) Molecular beacon aptamer fluoresces in the presence of Tat protein of HIV-1. Genes Cells 5, 389-396.
Ying L, Wallace MI, and Klenerman D (2001) Two-state model of conformational fluctuation in a DNA haiφin-loop. Chemical Physics Letters 334, 145-150.
Zhang P, Beck T, and Tan W (2001) Design of a molecular beacon DNA probe with two fluorophores. Angew. Chem. Int. Ed. 40, 402-405.
Nonlinear Optical Techniques
Surface-selective nonlinear optical techniques have previously been confined mainly to physics and chemistry since relatively few biological samples are intrinsically non-linearly active. Examples include the use of an optically nonlinear-active dye as a membrane stain and an endogenous nonlinear-active stain (GFP) that is used to image biological cells (Campagnola et al, "High-resolution nonlinear optical imaging of live cells by second harmonic generation," Biophysical Journal 77 (6), 3341-3349 (1999), Peleg et al, "Nonlinear optical measurement of membrane potential around single molecules at selected cellular sites," Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. V. 96, (1999), 6700-6704 and references therein). The following references (and references therein) are exemplary of this art:
A. Lewis, A. Khatchatouriants, M. Treinin, Z. Chen, G. Peleg, N. Friedman, O. Bouevitch, Z. Rothman, L. Loew and M. Sheves, "Second Harmonic Generation of Biological Interfaces: Probing the Membrane Protein Bacteriorhodopsin and Imaging Membrane Potential Around GFP Molecules at Specific Sites in Neuronal Cells of C. elegans," Chemical Physics 245, 133 (1999). O. Bouevich, A. Lewis, I. Pinnevsky and L. Loew, "Probing Membrane Potential with Nonlinear Optics," Biophys. J. 65, 672 (1993).
I. Ben-Oren, G. Peleg, A. Lewis, B. Minke and L. Loew, "Infrared nonlinear optical measurements of membrane potential in photoreceptor cells," Biophys. J. 71^ 616 (1996).
G. Peleg, A. Lewis, M. Linial and L. M. Loew, "Non-linear Optical Measurement of Membrane Potential Around Single Molecules at Selected Cellular Sites," Proc. Acad. Sci. USA 96, 6700 (1999).
P. Campagnola, Mei-de Wei, A. Lewis and L. Loew, "High-Resolution Nonlinear Optical Imaging of Live Cells by Second Harmonic Generation," Biophys. J. 77, 3341 (1999).
J. Y. Huang, A. Lewis and L. Loew, "N[on-linear Optical Properties of Potential Sensitive Styryl Dyes", Biophysical J. 53, 665 (1988).
A. Lewis, A. Khatchatouriants, M. Treinin, Z. Chen, G. Peleg, N. Friedman, O. Bouevitch, Z. Rothman, L. Loew and M. Sheves, "Second Harmonic Generation of Biological Interfaces: Probing Membrane Proteins and Imaging Membrane Potential Around GFP Molecules at Specific Sites in Neuronal Cells of C. elegans," Chemical Physics 245, 133-144 (1999). A. Khatchatouriants, A. Lewis, Z. Rothman, L. Loew and M. Treinin, "GFP is a Selective Non-Linear Optical Sensor of Electrophysiological Processes in C. elegans," Biophys. J. (in press, 2000).
The present invention is based on the use of a nonlinear optical technique to detect probe-target interactions in an external applied force field. The external applied field can be electric, magnetic, fluid flow or other types of applied force. The present invention provides advantages over fluorescence-based detection, such as reduced background, ability to detect interactions in homogeneous phase, reduced photobleaching, simplified optical detection, and no need for labor- or time-consuming washing steps. These advantages are due to the low background of the nonlinear optical techniques and the fact that the method is a scattering rather than an absoφtion process. The present invention is also based on the use of a nonlinear optical technique to detect probe-target interactions in an external applied force field in a homogeneous phase or at an interface in the presence of one or more nonlinear active label or decorators.
It is therefore an object of the present invention to provide a direct, optical means of detecting probe-target binding reactions in an external applied force field. The present invention can also be used to detect changes in orientation or conformation of the probe, target, or both probe and target, in an external applied field, that are a consequence of the probe-target binding reactions. The invention also discloses methods for screening modulators of the probe-target binding interaction in an external applied force field, and for determining the degree or extent of binding in an external applied force field through the conformational change the binding induces.
3. SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION
The invention provides a method for screening one or more candidate binding partners for binding to a test molecule comprising:
(a) applying an external force field to a sample in homogeneous phase, said sample comprising a test molecule exposed to one or more candidate binding partners;
(b) illuminating said sample with one or more light beams at one or more fundamental frequencies; and
(c) measuring one or more physical properties of a nonlinear optical light beam emanating from said sample; wherein a change in the value of said one or more physical properties measured in step (c) relative to a value for said one or more physical properties measured in the absence of exposure of said test molecule to said one or more candidate binding partners indicates that said one or more candidate binding partners bind said test molecule. In a specific embodiment, the method further comprises comparing the value of the one or more physical properties measured relative to a value for the one or more physical properties measured in the absence of exposure of said test molecule to said one or more candidate binding partners.
The invention provides a method for screening one or more candidate binding partners for binding to a test molecule comprising:
(a) applying an external force field to a sample at an interface, said sample comprising a test molecule exposed to one or more candidate binding partners, wherein one or more nonlinear active labels or one or more decorators are bound to one or both of said test molecule and candidate binding partners, and wherein said sample is not nonlinear active in the absence of said one or more nonlinear active labels or one or more decorators; (b) illuminating said sample with one or more light beams at one or more fundamental frequencies; and
(c) measuring one or more physical properties of a nonlinear optical light beam emanating from said sample; wherein a change in the value of said one or more physical properties measured in step (c) relative to a value for said one or more physical properties measured in the absence of exposure of said test molecule to said one or more candidate binding partners indicates that said one or more candidate binding partners bind said test molecule. In a specific embodiment, the method further comprises comparing the value of the one or more physical properties measured relative to a value for the one or more physical properties measured in the absence of exposure of said test molecule to said one or more candidate binding partners.
The invention provides a method for screening one or more candidate modulator molecules for the ability to modulate an interaction between a test molecule and its binding partner comprising:
(a) applying an external force field to a sample in homogeneous phase, said sample comprising said test molecule exposed to (i) said binding partner, and (ii) said one or more candidate modulator molecules;
(a) illuminating said sample with one or more light beams at one or more fundamental frequencies; and
(b) measuring one or more physical properties of a nonlinear optical light beam emanating from said sample; wherein a change in the value of said one or more physical properties measured in step (c) relative to the value for said one or more physical properties measured in the absence of exposure to said one or more candidate modulator molecules indicates that said one or more candidate modulator molecules modulate the interaction between said test molecule and its binding partner. In a specific embodiment, the method further comprises comparing the value of said one or more physical properties measured relative to the value for said one or more physical properties measured in the absence of exposure to said one or more candidate modulator molecules.
The invention provides a method for screening one or more candidate modulator molecules for the ability to modulate an interaction between a test molecule and its binding partner comprising:
(a) applying an external force field to a sample at an interface, said sample comprising said test molecule exposed to (i) said binding partner, (ii) said one or more candidate modulator molecules, wherein one or more nonlinear active labels or one or more decorators are bound to one or both of said test molecule and candidate binding partners, and wherein said sample is not nonlinear active in the absence of said one or more nonlinear active labels or one or more decorators;
(b) illuminating a sample with one or more light beams at one or more fundamental frequencies; and
(c) measuring one or more physical properties of a nonlinear optical light beam emanating from said sample; wherein a change in the value of said one or more physical properties measured in step (c) relative to the value for said one or more physical properties measured in the absence of exposure to said one or more candidate modulator molecules indicates that said one or more candidate modulator molecules modulate the interaction between said test molecule and its binding partner. In a specific embodiment, the method further comprises comparing the value of said one or more physical properties measured relative to the value for said one or more physical properties measured in the absence of exposure to said one or more candidate modulator molecules.
The invention provides a method for detecting a conformational change in a test molecule upon binding of the test molecule to a binding partner comprising:
(a) contacting said test molecule with one or more candidate binding partners, wherein the test molecule or the one or more candidate binding partners is labeled with a nonlinear-active moiety that is not native to the test molecule or the one or more candidate binding partners, respectively; (b) applying an external force field to said contacted test molecule; (c) illuminating said contacted test molecule with one or more light beams at one or more fundamental frequencies; and
(d) measuring one or more physical properties of a nonlinear optical light beam emanating from said sample; wherein a change in the value of said one or more physical properties measured in step (d) relative to the value for said one or more physical properties measured in the absence of said one or more candidate binding partners indicates that at least one of said one or more candidate binding partners bind to said test molecule and that said binding induces a conformational change in said candidate binding partners, in said test molecule, or in both said candidate binding partners and said test molecule. In a specific embodiment, the method further comprises comparing the value of said one or more physical properties measured relative to the value for said one or more physical properties measured in the absence of said one or more candidate binding partners.
The invention provides a method for detecting the degree or extent of the conformational change induced by binding between a test molecule and one or more candidate binding partners comprising:
(a) contacting said test molecule with one or more candidate binding partners, wherein the test molecule or the one or more candidate binding partners is labeled with a nonlinear-active moiety that is not native to the test molecule or the one or more candidate binding partners, respectively;
(b) applying an external force field to said contacted test molecule;
(c) illuminating said contacted test molecule with one or more light beams at one or more fundamental frequencies; and
(d) measuring one or more physical properties of a nonlinear optical light beam emanating from said sample; wherein the extent of the change in the value of said one or more physical properties measured in step (d) relative to the value for said one or more physical properties measured in the absence of said one or more candidate binding partners indicates the degree or extent of the conformational change that said binding induces. In a specific embodiment, the method further comprises comparing the value of said one or more physical properties measured relative to the value for the one or more physical properties measured in the absence of said one or more candidate binding partners. 4. BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS
Fig. 1 depicts one embodiment of the apparatus in which the mode of generation and collection of the second harmonic light is by reflection off the substrate with surface-attached probes.
Fig. 2 depicts one embodiment of an apparatus in which the mode of generation and collection of the second harmonic light is by total internal reflection through a prism. The prism is coupled by an index-matching material to a substrate with surface-attached probes.
Fig. 3 depicts one embodiment of an apparatus in which the mode of generation and collection of the second harmonic light is by total internal reflection through a wave-guide with multiple reflections as denoted by the dashed line inside the wave-guide.
Figs. 4A-D depict one embodiment of a flow-cell for delivery and removal of biological components and other fluids to the substrate containing attached probes.
Figs. 5A-C depict three embodiments of an apparatus in which the mode of generation and collection of the second harmonic light is by transmission through a sample. In Fig. 5 A, the second harmonic beam is co-linear with the fundamental. In Fig. 5B, the second harmonic is collected from a direction orthogonal to the fundamental ('right-angle collection'). In Fig. 5C, the second harmonic light is collected by an integrating sphere and a fiber optic line.
Fig. 6 depicts an embodiment of the transformation, using a series of optical components, of a collimated beam of the fundamental light into a line shape suitable for scanning a substrate.
Figs. 7A-B depict an embodiments patterned in an array format. Fig. 7A depicts an embodiment of a substrate surface (containing attached probes) which has been patterned into an array format (elements 1-35). Fig. 7B depicts one element of a substrate array in which each element is a well with walls, with surface-attached probes, and the well is capable of holding some liquid and serves to physically separate the well's contents from adjacent wells or other parts of the substrate.
Fig. 8 depicts one embodiment of a surface chemistry used to attach oligonucleotide or polynucleotide samples to the substrate surface. Figs. 9A-B depict an embodiment of a substrate containing multiple wells. Fig. 9A depicts the substrate containing multiple wells (1-16), each of which contains surface- attached probes as depicted in Fig. 9B.
Fig. 10 depicts an embodiment of the apparatus substrate with the use of an aminosilane surface-attached layer on top of a reflective coating. The reflective coating underneath the aminosilane layer improves collection of the nonlinear optical light. The aminosilane layer is suitable for coupling biomolecules or other probe components to the substrate.
Figs. 11 A-B depict an embodiment of an apparatus in which the mode of generation and collection of the second harmonic light is through a fiber optic. Fig. 11 A depicts the use of a bundle of fiber optic lines and Fig. 1 IB depicts the use of beads coupled to the end of a fiber for attaching probes.
Figs. 12A-C depict three embodiments of an apparatus in which the mode of generation and collection of the second harmonic light is by transmission through a sample. Fig. 12A depicts both the fundamental and second harmonic beams travelling co-linearly through a sample. Fig. 12B depicts the fundamental and second harmonic beams being refracted at the top surface (top surface contains attached probes) of a substrate with this surface generating the second harmonic light. Fig 12C depicts a similar apparatus to Fig. 12B except that the bottom surface (bottom surface contains attached probes) generates the second harmonic light.
Figs. 13 A-B depict two embodiments of an apparatus in which second harmonic light is generated by total internal reflection at an interface. The points of generation of the second harmonic light are denoted by the circles. In Fig. 13 A, a dove prism is used to guide the light to a surface capable of generating the second harmonic light (bottom surface of prism but can also be another surface coupled to the prism through an index-matching material). In Fig. 13B, a wave-guide structure is used to produce multiple points of second harmonic generation.
Figs. 14A-C depict three embodiments of an apparatus in which second harmonic light is generated using a fiber optic line (with attached probes at the end of the fiber). Fig. 14A depicts an apparatus in which both generation and collection of the second harmonic light occur in the same fiber. Fig. 14B depicts the use of a bead containing surface-attached probes at the end of the fiber. Fig. 14C depicts an apparatus in which the second harmonic light is generated at the end of the fiber optic (containing attached probges) and collected using a mirror or lens external to the fiber optic.
Figs. 15 A-B depict two embodiments of an apparatus using an optical cavity for power build-up of the fundamental.
Figs. 16A-C depict three embodiments of an apparatus in which the mode of generation and collection of the second harmonic light uses reflection of the light from an interface.
Fig. 17 depicts one embodiment of the sample cell with an applied electric field. The sample cell (5) is open and is depicted side-on and filled with solution (10) containing probes and targets. The fundamental beam enters the sample cell to the right (15) and passes through transparent electrodes (20) separated by a spacer of 1-3 mm (25). The electrodes are connected to a source of voltage (30). When voltage is applied, the targets and probes become partially oriented, thus producing the nonlinear optical light (e.g., second harmonic light).
Fig. 18 depicts an apparatus for measuring probe-target interactions in suspended cells. A source of fundamental light from a Ti:Sapphire femtosecond laser (1000) operating at 800 nm is directed through a filter (RG-645, CVI Laser) that blocks 400 nm light (second harmonic). The fundamental is then focused using plano-convex lens 1200 (100 mm focal length, Melles Griot) into sample holder 1300 containing a suspension of biological cells. The second harmonic light is collected parallel to the fundamental direction using a 80 mm diameter plano-convex collimating lens (1400) (120 mm focal length, Melles Griot) that is positioned to have its focus at the focus of lens 1200. The light is sent through a color filter (BG-39, CVI Laser) to block the fundamental light and pass second harmonic light on to a second plano-convex lens 1600 (120 mm focal length) Melles Griot which focuses the light through a monochromator slit and onto its grating (1700). A photomultiplier is attached to the monochromator and detects the second harmonic light. The signal from the photomultiplier is sent on to photon counting electronics (SR400, Stanford Research Systems) and then passed to a computer 1900 for storage and analysis of the data.
Figs. 19A-C depict various embodiments of the present invention. In 19A, receptors embedded in a membrane surface are exposed to ligands or particles for which they have an affinity. After the binding interaction occurs, the ligands or particles are bound to the membrane-associated receptors. In 19B, cells are attached (or 'plated') to a surface or . substrate to form approximately a monolayer of cells (e.g., -100% confluent cells); cells can also be stacked to form multilayers at a substrate or surface. In both cases in 19B, incident fundamental light can be transmitted through the substrate or surface, run parallel to the surface and through the multilayer or monolayer of cells, coupled to the cell layer evanescently, or some combination thereof. Fig. 19C depicts a conformational change process. Receptors in a membrane surface (e.g., a host cell) are labeled with nonlinear-active labels which, on average, possess an orientation with respect to the surface plane, specifically an angle of θ of the hypeφolarizability with respect to the surface plane; binding and subsequent activation of the receptor by ligands causes the labels to shift orientation to angle β. Small shifts in angle can cause a substantial change in a physical property of the measured nonlinear optical light (e.g., intensity of the light).
Figs. 20A-B depict a molecular beacon that has been modified to form a nonlinear- active analogue. In Fig. 20A, a single strand of nucleotides is coupled to a nonlinear-active dye (gray-hatch) and an enhancer (open circle). When the molecular beacon analogue is hybridized to a complementary target, the dye and enhancer are separated by the conformational change, leading to a measurable change in the nonlinear response of the dye. The amount of the change can be made quantitative with the amount of probe-target hybridization. In Fig. 20B, an example of a particular oligonucleotide sequence with attached dye and enhancer (Au particle) is shown (SEQ ID NO: 5). The sequences of various targets (SEQ ID NOs: 1 - 4, respectively) used for testing the degree of hybridization to this probe are also shown.
5. DESCRIPTION OF THE INVENTION The present mvention uses a nonlinear optical technique to detect probe-target interactions involving a conformational change. Examples of nonlinear optical technique include but are not limited to second-harmonic generation, sum-frequency generation, difference-frequency generation, third-harmonic generation and hyper-Rayleigh scattering HRS). The present invention can be used with any of the nonlinear optical techniques, however many embodiments describe the use of the second-order techniques (e.g., second- harmonic generation and hyper-Rayleigh scattering). The following references, and references therein, describe the field of nonlinear optics: Nonlinear Optics, R.W. Boyd, 1991, Academic Press.
The Elements of Nonlinear Optics, P.N. Butcher and D. Cotter, Cambridge University Press, 1991.
Nonlinear Optical Techniques Nonlinear optical light is any light that results from a nonlinear transformation of light beams at one or more fundamental frequencies (also referred to herein as fundamental beam(s)). A nonlinear optical technique is capable of transforming the physical properties, such as frequency, intensity, etc., of one or more incident light beams, called the fundamental beams. The nonlinear beams emanating from the sample are the higher order frequency beams, e.g. second or third harmonic, etc., or the beams at the sum or difference frequencies. For example, in second harmonic generation (SHG), two photons of the fundamental beam are virtually scattered by the sample to produce one photon of the second harmonic. A nonlinear optical technique is also referred to herein as a surface-selective nonlinear optical technique.
Second harmonic generation (SHG) and other surface-selective nonlinear optical techniques are directly related to the orientation of the nonlinear-active species in a sample, because the fundamental and nonlinear beams have well-defined phase relationships, and the wavefronts of the nonlinear beam in a macroscopic sample (within the coherence length) are in phase. Any change in the orientation of the nonlinear-active species can be detected by measuring one or more physical properties of the nonlinear optical beam emanating from the sample. These coherency properties of the nonlinear optical technique offer a number of advantages useful for surface or high-throughput studies in which, for example, either a single surface or a microarray surface is examined. The coherent nature of the nonlinear optical beam emanating from the sample also allows discrimination among more than one nonlinear optical beam emanating from a sample. In alternate embodiments of the invention, assays can be conducted where multiple fundamental light beams at one or more frequencies, incident with one or more polarization directions relative to the sample, can be used, with the resulting emanation of at least two nonlinear beams. An apparatus using nonlinear optical suface-selective-based detection, such as with second harmonic generation, requires minimal collection optics since generation of the nonlinear light only occurs at the interface (in the absence of an applied field) and thus, in principle, allows extremely high depth discrimination and fast scanning. A common equation used to model orientation dependence of nonlinear-active species at an interface is: χ(2) = Ns< (2)> where χ(2) is the nonlinear susceptiblity, Ns is the total number of molecules per unit area at the interface and <α(2)> is the average over the orientational distribution of the nonlinear hypeφolarizabilities - α(2) - in these molecules. Typical equations describing the nonlinear interaction for second harmonic generation are: α(2)(2ω) = β:E(ω)-E(ω) or P(2)(2ω) = χ(2):E(ω)E(ω) where α and P are, respectively, the induced molecular and macroscopic dipoles oscillating at frequency 2ω, β and χ(2) are, respectively, the hypeφolarizability and second-harmonic (nonlinear) susceptibility tensors, and E(ω) is the electric field component of the incident radiation oscillating at frequency ω. The macroscopic nonlinear susceptibility χ(2) is related by an orientational average of the microscopic β hypeφolarizability. The next order term in the expansion of the induced macroscopic dipole describes other nonlinear phenomenon, such as third harmonic generation. The third order term is responsible for such nonlinear phenomena as two-photon fluorescence. For sum or difference frequency generation, the driving electric fields (fundamentals) oscillate at different frequencies (i.e., (0 and ω ) and the nonlinear radiation oscillates at the sum or difference frequency an ± ω2). The intensity of SHG is proportional to the square of the nonlinear susceptiblity and is dependent on the amount of oriented nonlinear-active species in a sample, and thus to changes in this orientation, both at an interface and species aligned in the bulk (the latter through an electric field-poled mechanism, for example). This property can be exploited to detect a conformational change. For example, conformational change in receptors can be detected using a nonlinear-active label or moiety wherein the label is attached to or associated with the receptor; a conformational change leads to a change in the direction (orientation) of the label with respect to the surface plane (or applied field direction) and thus to a change in a physical property of the nonlinear optical signal. The techniques are intrinsically sensitive to these changes at an interface and can be made sensitive to them in the bulk as well, by applying an electric field to pole molecules or simply by detecting that fraction of the ensemble which produce hyper-Rayleigh scattering (HRS) due to fluctuational changes in their number density or orientation as is well known to one skilled in the art.
In hyper-Rayleigh scattering (HRS), the fluctuations of nonlinear-active molecules lead to instantaneous departures from centrosymmetry, and thus allow for a low amount of second-harmonic emission to occur, although this emission is incoherent. Because the fluctuations depend on molecular size, among other properties, HRS can be used to discriminate an unbound molecule in solution from the same molecule bound to one or more binding partners (also referred to herein as probes). Thermal energy drives the fluctuations required for HRS, however, an external force can also be applied to induce or amplify the fluctuations, thus increasing the HRS signal. For example, a flow-field can be used to transiently orient molecules in solution by injecting a burst or stream of fluid into it. Pulsed and alternating electric fields applied to the sample can also increase the HRS signal.
There are a number of examples in the literature of the use of HRS to measure beta (hypeφolarizability) of nonlinear optical molecules. The present invention extends the use of HRS to detect binding interactions and to screen for test molecules (also referred to herein as targets) or modulators (described below) capable of binding or modulating probe-target interactions.
The following references, and references therein, describe the HRS technique:
Clays, K. et al., "Nonlinear Optical Properties of Proteins Measured by Hyper-Rayleigh Scattering in Solution", Science, v. 262 (5138), 1419-22
Vance, FW, Lemon B.I., Hupp, J.T. Enormous Hyper-Rayleigh Scattering from Nanocrystalline Gold Particle Suspensions", J. Phys. Chem. B 102:10091-93 (1999).
Electric field induced second harmonic (EFISH) is technique well known in the field of nonlinear optics that can be used according to the invention to render a system nonlinear- active that is not normally so, such as a homogeneous phase (i.e, a bulk phase), through the application of an electric field that breaks the symmetry of the bulk phase. In a specific embodiment, the EFISH technique can be used to measure the hypeφolarizabilty of molecules in solution by using a dc field to induce alignment in the medium, and allowing nonlinear-activity (such as SHG) to be observed. This is sometimes called the reorientational mechanism.
EFISH is a third order nonlinear optical effect, with the polarization source written as:
P(2)(ω3) = χ(2) (-ω3; ωl3ω2) : Eωl Eω2
The polarization is the result of the application of two optical fields and a static (dc) field. The following references describe applying the EFISH technique to, e,g, liquid and condensed phase samples:
R. Dworczak and D. Kieslinger, Phys. Chem. Chem. Phys., 2000, 2, 5057-5064.
J.L. Oudar, J. Chem. Phys., 1977, 67, 446. B.F. Levine and C.G. Bethea, J. Chem. Phys., 1974, 60, 3856.
B.F. Levine and C.G. Bethea, J. Chem. Phys., 1975, 63, 2666.
K.D. Singer and A.F. Garito, J. Chem. Phys., 1981, 75, 3572.
C.G. Bethea, Applied Optics, 1975, 14,1447.
B.F. Levine and C.G. Bethea, J. Chem. Phys., 1976, 65, 1989. B.F. Levine and C.G. Bethea, J. Chem. Phys., 1974, 60, 3856.
B.F. Levine, J. Chem. Phys., 1975, 63, 115.
B.F. Levine and C.G. Bethea, J. Chem. Phys. 1977, 66, 1070.
J.L. Oudar and D.S. Chemla, J. Chem. Phys., 1977, 66, 2664.
R.S. Finn and J.F. Ward, J. Chem. Phys., 1974, 60, 454. B.F. Levine and C.G. Bethea, Appl. Phys. Lett., 1974, 24, 445.
In addition, the electrodes used to apply the electric field can be spatially patterned (periodically patterned) to achieve quasi-phase matching. Quasi-phase matching is a well known technique for increasing the effective nonlinear path length in a nonlinear-active material, by alternating the nonlinear susceptibility of a material with a period of a coherence length. The following references (and references therein) describe this technique:
M. Jager et al, Appl. Phys. Lett. 68, 1996, 1183.
M.M. Fejer et al., IEEE Journal of Quantum Electronics, v. 28, 1992, 2631.
G.D. Landry et T.A. Maldonado, Optics Express, v.5, 1999, 176.
The electrodes used to apply the external electric field in the EFISH technique can assume a variety of shapes, forms and compositions as, for example, are found in the prior art. For instance, the electrodes can be angled or pointed to increase the electric field strength that results in these cases. The electrodes can be oriented in a variety of ways to the sample; for example, the electrodes can be placed (e.g., patterned lithographically, printed, etched, etc.) on a substrate which itself is in contact with the liquid sample containing the targets and probes; or, for example, the electrodes can lie at the bottom and top of a thin cavity in which the sample containing targets and probes is flowing or is held.
Non-Random Orientations and Nonlinear Activity
A non-random orientation is a necessary condition for generation of the surface- selective nonlinear optical signal. Only the non-centrosymmetric region of a system, is capable of generating non-linear light. A molecule or material phase is centrosymmetric if there exists a point in space, called the 'center' or 'inversion center,' through which an inversion (x,y,z) -> (-x,-y,-z) of all atoms can be performed that leaves the molecule or material unchanged. For example, if the molecule is of uniform composition and spherical in shape, it is centrosymmetric. Centrosymmetric molecules or materials have no nonlinear susceptibility or hypeφolarizability, necessary for second or higher harmonic, sum frequency and difference frequency generation. A non-centrosymmetric molecule or material lacks this center of inversion, and therefore can be nonlinear-active.
Non-centrosymmetric regions can be at surfaces, e.g. arrays, substrates, etc., or in bulk phase, e.g. solutions, however, a bulk phase, also referred to herein as a homogeneous phase, may require the application of a force field, e.g., an electric field, a magnetic field, or fluid flow, to break the symmetry of the region and render the bulk phase nonlinear-active (such as in the EFISH technique). Alternatively, a magnetic field can be applied, also possibly in the presence of exogenous magnetic species, to break the symmtery and render the system nonlinear active. During fluid flow, the forces can also cause some alignment of a system, such as is observed, e.g., for elongated objects flowing through a narrow flow channel. The forces exerted by fluid flow, e.g. a laminar flow, or a narrow channel, can render the system non-centrosymmetric and thus nonlinear active.
The present invention exploits the property that any non-random orientation of targets, probes or target-probe complexes in an external force field applied to a homogeneous phase, can lead to a nonlinear optical signal, wherein the external force field can be caused by an electric field, a magnetic field, fluid flow or some combination thereof. In a specific embodiment the external force field is not an electric field. The present invention also exploits the property that any non-random orientation of probes bound to one or more nonlinear active labels or decorators in an external force field with respect to a surface to which they are attached or localized leads to non-random orientation of targets when these targets bind to the probes, wherein the force field is caused by fluid flow or combinations thereof. In specific embodiments where the sample comprising the probe and the target is at an interface, one or more nonlinear active labels or one or more decorators are bound to the probe and/or target, and the sample is not nonlinear active in the absence of the one or more nonlinear active labels or the one or more decorators. In specific embodiments describing the application of an electric field, a magnetic field, fluid flow or some combination thereof can also be applied. As a result of the non-random orientation of the system, a nonlinear optical technique can be used to monitor, e.g., the binding activity at the surface. Any change in the non-random orientation of the system, such as due to a conformational change on occurrence of a binding event, would modify the nonlinear optical signal. Verification that a change in the detected nonlinear optical signal is due to a conformational change can be accomplished using controls known to one skilled in the art including, for example, measuring binding of a blocking compound to the receptor - where the blocking compound is known not to produce a conformational change in the receptor.
Homogeneous phase assays for binding between biological components are sought after because they comprise only a single phase with no separation steps, and no solid surface that may introduce non-native artifacts into the measurements. However, a homogeneous phase, i.e., a bulk phase system, is not normally non-centrosymmetric, which is a requirement for generation of the surface-selective nonlinear beams. In the prior art, this requirement is met by the use of cells or liposomes in a medium (comprising a cell or liposome-liquid interface) or a solid surface or substrate (with a solid-liquid interface). The present invention discloses the use of an external electric field to a sample, e.g., comprising biological components, which poles (orients) the components, thus creating the non-centrosymmetric region. The biological components can comprise probes and targets which can bind to each other; the identity and type of either can vary widely. Targets or probes can be labeled with a nonlinear-active (e.g., second harmonic-active) label, as disclosed in the prior art (Joshua S. Salafsky, copending application); the complementary binding partner of the targets or probes can be labeled with a moiety which alters the nonlinear optical properties of the label: referred to herein as a 'modulator'; when the targets and probes bind to each other or are in close proximity, the presence of the complementary binding partner, or the modulator attached to it, can change the nonlinear optical properties of the label on the other, and this change can be detected optically as a signal for probe-target binding while under the application of an external electric field. Accordingly, one aspect of the present invention is to provide a method for detection of binding reactions in homogeneous phase. In an embodiment in which the probe or target, or neither, is not natively nonlinear- active, then different types of nonlinear-active species can be introduced into the system to render the system nonlinear-active. Such species that affect the one or more nonlinear-active beams emanating from a sample comprising probes and targets include labels, decorators, indicators, modulators, inhibitors, and enhancers, as described below. When the present invention is used with labels or decorators, the non-random orientation of the target produces a non-random label or decorator orientation and this leads directly to an increase in surface- selective nonlinear optical signal (e.g., intensity). Non-specific interactions of the targets with attached or localized probes (e.g., non-specific binding to probes) or of targets to regions on the surface where no probe is present (e.g., non-specific binding to substrate or solid support) will lead to zero or to a much lower surface-selective nonlinear optical signal due to destructive interference as would be apparent to one skilled in the art. When the present invention is used with indicators, a non-random probe orientation also leads to an increase in the surface-selective nonlinear optical signal since the surface charge density close to the surface plane will be larger than if the probes are randomly oriented which results in a lower surface electric charge density.
Nonlinear-active Labels
A label for use in the present invention refers to a nonlinear-active moiety, particle or molecule which can be bound, either covalently or non-covalently, to a molecule, particle or phase (e.g., lipid bilayer) in order to render the resulting system more nonlinear optical active. Labels can be employed in the case where the molecule, particle or phase (e.g., lipid bilayer) is not nonlinear-active to render the system nonlinear-active, or with a system that is already nonlinear-active to add an extra manipulation parameter into the system. The exogenous labels can be pre-attached to the molecules or particles, and any unbound or unreacted labels separated from the labeled entities before a measurement is made. In a specific embodiment, the nonlinear-active moiety is attached to the target or probe molecule in vitro. Alternatively, the labels can be left in solution with probes and targets and allowed to adsorb to some particle (e.g., an enhancer) or surface to yield a different nonlinear-active response (i.e., hypeφolarizability or second order susceptibility) from the bound labels. By way of example, EFISH or Hyper-Rayleigh scattering can be used to determine if a candidate molecule or particle is nonlinearly active according to techniques well known in the art, where appropriate controls and background measurements are made in the absence of access to the candidate nonlinear-active species. The labeling of probes with nonlinear-active labels and/or modulators of the labels allows a direct, optical means of detecting probe-target binding reactions in the cases where the binding reaction results in a change in orientation or conformation of the probe using a surface-selective nonlinear optical technique.
In alternate embodiments of the invention, at least two distinguishable nonlinear- active labels are used. The orientation of the attached two or more distinguishable labels would then be chosen to facilitate well defined directions of the emanating coherent nonlinear light beam. The two or more distinguishable labels can be used in assays where multiple fundamental light beams at one or more frequencies, incident with one or more polarization directions relative to the sample, are used, with the resulting emanation of at least two nonlinear light beams.
One means of determining whether a particular molecule or particle can be used as a nonlinear-active label is by studying it using second harmonic generation at an air-water interface. For instance, in the case of particles, if the particles assemble at the air-water interface in a manner which gives a net orientation of the particles (on a length scale of the coherence length) the layer of particles can generate second harmonic light. Another means of doing this is by measuring a sample of a suspension of the particles and detecting the hyper-rayleigh scattering. Yet another means comprises the use of EFISH to determine if a candidate molecule or particle is nonlinearly active. The effect can be used to measure the hypeφolarizabilty of molecules in solution by using a dc field to induce alignment in the medium, and allowing SHG to be observed. This type of measurement does not require that the particle themselves be ordered at an interface, but does require that the particles be nonlinear-active and thus non-centrosymmetric.
In a specific embodiment, metal nanoparticles and assemblies thereof are modified to create biological nonlinear-active labels. The following references describe the modification metal nanoparticles and assemblies:
J.P. Novak and D.L. Feldheim, "Assembly of Phenylacetylene-Bridged Silver and Gold Nanoparticle Arrays", J. Am. Chem. Soc, 2000, 122, 3979-3980.
J.P. Novak et al., "Nonlinear Optical Properties of Molecularly Bridged Gold Nanoparticle Arrays", J. Am. Chem. Soc. 2000, 122, 12029-12030. Vance, FW, Lemon B.I., Hupp, J.T. Enormous Hyper-Rayleigh Scattering from
Nanocrystalline Gold Particle Suspensions", J. Phys. Chem. B 102:10091-93 (1999). The following reference and references therein describe the techniques available for creating a biological label from a synthetic dye and many other molecules:
Greg T. Hermanson, Bioconjugate Techniques, Academic Press, 1996.
In a specific embodiment, nonlinear-active labels can be constructed according to well known procedures in the art to be photoactivated or photomodulated with a beam of light such that, upon irradiation of the sample with a selected beam of light, the labels become nonlinear optical active (or more or less nonlinear optical active). The beam of light can, for example, cleave a chemical bond (e.g., using UV light), well known in the art as 'caged' compounds.
Linkers
In specific embodiments, linkers couple the label to the targets. The linkers can be made long enough so that the orientation of the targets at the interface (i.e., when bound to the probes) does not significantly effect the orientation of the label. Because the intensity of the nonlinear light generated depends on the net orientation of the labels at the interface - and the orientation of the targets at an interface can be difficult to control (i.e., the targets may even be randomly oriented at the interface) - the use of linkers can separate the labels sufficiently from the targets so that the orientation of the latter does not necessarily determine the orientation of the former. In cases where this is less important, for example with integral membrane proteins in supported lipid bilayers on glass, where the orientation of the membrane protein presented to the targets is generally uniform, this aspect of the linkers can be less important.
There are many linking moieties and methodologies for attaching molecules which can be nonlinear-active labels to the 5' or 3' termini of oligonucleotides, as exemplified by the following references: Eckstein, editor, Oligonucleotides and Analogues: A Practical Approach (IRL Press, Oxford, 1991); Zuckerman etal., Nucleic Acids Research, 15: 5305- 5321 (1987) (3' thiol group on oligonucleotide); Sharma et al., Nucleic Acids Research, 19: 3019 (1991) (3' sulfhydryl); Giusti et al., PCR Methods and Applications, 2: 223-227 (1993) and Fung et al., U.S. Pat. No. 4, 757,141 (5' phosphoamino group via Aminolink.TM. II available from Applied Biosystems, Foster City, Cafil.) Stabinsky, U.S. Pat. No. 4.739,044 (3' aminoalkylphosphoryl group); Agrawal et al., Tetrahedron Letters, 31 : 1543-1546 (1990) (attachment via phosphoramidate linkages); Sproat et al., Nucleic Acids Research, 15: 4837 (1987) (5* mercapto group); Nelson et al., Nucleic Acids Research, 17: 7187-7194 (1989) (3' amino group); and the like. In a preferred embodiment, commercially available linking moieties are employed that can be attached to an oligonucleotide during synthesis, e.g., available from Clontech Laboratories (Palo Alto, Cafil.).
Modulators Modulators include any substance (e.g., moiety, molecule, biological component or compound) that alters the nonlinear response of a nonlinear-active species when the modulator is in proximity to the nonlinear-active species, or alters the kinetic or equilibrium properties of probe-target interactions (e.g., binding reaction). Modulators may change the rate of probe-target binding, the equilibrium constant of probe-target binding or, in general, enhance or reduce probe-target interactions. Examples of modulators are the following: inhibitors, drugs, small molecules, agonists and antagonists and Au particles. Candidate modulators can be tested for their ability to perform as modulators, e.g., in a screening process.
hi a specific embodiment, target-probe interactions can be measured in the presence of some modulator of the interactions — the modulator being, for example, a small molecule, drug, or other moiety, molecule or particle which changes in some way the target-probe interactions (e.g., has some affinity for the probe and blocks or inhibits target binding). The modulator can be added before, during or after the time in which the probe-target interactions occur.
Inhibitors
Inhibitors decrease or prevent probe-target interactions. Inhibitors can be any substance, e.g., moiety, molecule, compound or particle. Preferably the inhibitor competes with a known binding interaction between target and probe. Inhibitors are a form of modulator. Inhibitors are also referred to herein as blocking agents or blockers.
In a specific embodiment, compounds that are potential inhibitors of an agonist to a receptor are screened by testing for removal of a conformational change induced by the agonist when the receptor and agonist are also in the presence of an inhibitor candidate (the agonist can be a natural molecule, synthetic, etc.).
Decorators A decorator refers to a nonlinear-active substance (e.g., molecule or particle) which can be bound to targets, probes or target-probe complexes, and allow detection and discrimination among them. Ideally, a decorator should not appreciably alter or participate in the target-probe reaction itself. A decorator is distinguished from a nonlinear-active label, such as a SHG-active label, in that it possesses a specific binding affinity for the target, probe, or the target-probe complex, while an SHG-label can be attached to, for example a biological component, via specific chemical bonds or non-specific (e.g., electrostatic) means. A decorator can be used to detect probe-target complexes by its specific binding affinity (in some art, 'molecular recognition') to the targets, probes or the target-probe complexes and to thereby discriminate among targets, probes and target-probe complexes in a surface-selective nonlinear optical technique. For example, a decorator which has a stronger affinity (larger binding constant) to double-stranded DNA than single-stranded DNA can be used to detect hybridization with surface-attached probes since the amount of oriented decorator can increase as hybridization proceeds between single-stranded targets and probes. In a specific embodiment, decorators are constructs of a nonlinear-active species and another species, where the other species is a biological component (protein, antibody, etc.) and where the construct has a differential binding affinity among probes, targets and probe-target complexes to allow discrimination among them using a surface-selective nonlinear optical technique. Decorators can also be a non-natural molecules (e.g., synthetic chemical molecule, drug, etc.) with a nonlinear activity and which binds specifically (recognizes) targets, probes or target- probe complexes, and has a differential binding affinity among the three to allow for discrimination among them using a surface-selective nonlinear optical technique. In a specific embodiment , the decorator is dissolved or suspended in a solution or aqueous phase containing the target component.
Exemplary decorator molecules or particles include, but are not limited to, a biological component, a nucleic acid, protein, small molecule, biological cell, virus, liposome, receptor, agonist, antagonist, inhibitor, hormone, antibody, antigen, peptide, receptor, drug, enzyme, ligand, nucleoside, polynucleoside, carbohydrate, cDNA, hormone, allergen, cDNA, hapten, oligonucleotide, biotin, streptavidin, polynucleotide, oligosaccharide, peptide nucleic acid (PNA), or nucleic acid analog. In other non-limiting embodiments, decorators comprise a moiety in the family of, or that is, psoralen, ethidium bromide, methane phosphonate, phosphoramidate, propidium iodide, acridine, 9- aminoacridine, acridine orange, chloroquine, pyrine, echinomycin, 4',6-diamidino-2- phenylindole, dihydrochloride (DAPI), succinimidyl acridine-9-carboxylate, chloroquine, pyrine, echinomycin, 4',6-diamidino-2-phenylindole, dihydrochloride (DAPI), single-strand binding protein (SSB), tripyrrole peptides, flavopiridol, or pyronin Y.
Indicators The following section describes indicators in detail. Indicators include nonlinear- active molecules or particles whose nonlinear optical properties or orientation near a surface or interface is modulated as the electric charge polarization, charge density or potential of the surface is modulated. In one aspect of the invention, the charge or potential of an interface is modulated by the binding of a target to probes immobilized on the surface. In another aspect, the surface electric potential of a cell is changed by a change in the ion channel properties - an opening, closing, increase or decrease in ionic permeability in response to target (ligand) binding, for instance. In another aspect of the invention, an indicator serves as a marker for imaging puφoses, e.g., to image cells or tissues. An indicator preferably does not appreciably alter or participate in the target-probe reaction itself. The indicator can be dissolved or suspended in the liquid, medium, solution or aqueous phase containing the target component. An indicator preferably does not translocate into the lipid bilayer of vesicles or cells. An indicator preferably possesses freedom of movement to respond to changes in surface electric charge density or potential.
Measuring the nonlinear optical response of a glass-solvent or glass- water interface, in the presence of dissolved or suspended indicators in the water or solvent, is one means of assaying whether a candidate molecule would function as an indicator. Since glass carries a net negative charge, a candidate molecule can function as an indicator if the intensity of the nonlinear optical radiation generated at the interface in the presence of the molecule is greater than the background signal in its absence. Another means of assaying for a candidate molecule's ability as an indicator is by measuring the intensity of nonlinear optical radiation generated by a semiconductor-liquid interface as a function of applied voltage (and hence surface electric charge density) between the semiconductor and the bulk of the liquid. Yet another means is to measure the hyper-rayleigh scattering (HRS) from a solution or suspension of the indicator candidates, since if HRS is generated and the candidate itself is charged or dipolar, it should serve as an indicator.
Oxazole dye 4-[5-methoxyphenyl)-2-oxazolyl]pyridinium methanesulfonate (also known as 4PyMPO-MeMs) is an indicator that can be used, that is strongly second harmonic- active and chemically stable at neutral pH (Salafsky and Eisenthal, Chemical Physics Letters 2000, 319, 435-439). Furthermore, the Stokes shift of the fluorescence which results from two-photon absoφtion is large so that the second harmonic beam can readily be separated from the fluorescence. Other dyes in this family have similar properties (J.H. Hall et al., "Syntheses and Photophysical Properties of Some 5(2)-Aryl-2(5)-(4-pyridyl)oxazoles and Related Oxadiazoles and Furans", J. Heterocyclic Chem. 29, 1245 (1992)). These and other molecules, or assemblies of the molecules, can be used as indicators in the present invention. Such molecules include, but are not limited to:
5-(4-methoxphenyl -2-('4-methoxyphenylV2-(4-pyridvDoxazole 2-(4-methoxyphenyl -5-(4-pyridyl oxazole
2-(4-methoxyphenylV5-(4-pyridyr)oxadiazole
2-(4-methoxyphenyl)-5-(4-pyridyl)furan
2-("4-pyridyl)-4,5-dihvdronapthol["l,2-d]-l,3-oxazole
5-Aryl-2-(4-pyridyl)-4-R-oxazole where R is a hydrogen atom, methyl group, ethyl group or other akyl group.
2-(4-p yridvDc ycloalkano f di oxazole
2-("4-pyridvDphenanthrenor9, 10-d]- 1 ,3-oxazole
6-Methoxy-4,4-dimethyl-2-(4-pyridyl indeno["2,l-dloxazole
4,5-Dihvdro-7-methoxy-2-(4-pyridyl napthoiri,2-d]-l,3-oxazole Other molecules or molecules of the following families which can be used as indicators, include, but are not limited to:
Merocvanines
Stilbenes fiidodicarbocyanines Hemicyanines
Stilbazims
Azo dyes
Cyanines
Stryryl-based dyes Methylene blue
Diaminobenzene compounds
Polyenes
Diazostilbenes Tricyanovinyl aniline Tricyanovinyl azo Melamines
Phenothiazine-stilbazole Polyimide
Sulphonyl-substituted azobenzenes Indandione-l,3-pyidinium betaine Fluorescein Benzooxazole Perylene
Polymethacrylates Oxonol
Derivatized Particle Indicators A solid microparticle or a nanoparticle of size nanometers to microns in scale including, but not limited to, a sphere (latex, polystyrene, silica, etc.) or a strip, offers a surface area which can be derivatized with a nonlinear-active moiety via chemical or electrostatic means so that the entire object has a much higher hypeφolarizability than can be obtained otherwise. For instance, nonlinear-active dyes can be ordered on silica bead surfaces via electrostatic interactions (dye is positively charged, silica surface is negatively charged) and the entire bead, if derivatized with target-reactive linkers, can then function as an indicator. If the nonlinear-active moieties can be aligned on the solid surface so that phase interference between moieties is small, the overall hypeφolarizability would scale nonlinearly (eg., quadratically) in their number. The solid particle can vary in shape and its size can range from nanometers to microns in scale. Examples of the particles to be used include, but are not limited to, polystyrene beads and silica beads, both readily commercially available.
a. Covalent attachment
The solid particles to be used as indicators can be surface-derivatized using a variety of chemistries available in the prior art. Nonlinear-active moieties can be covalently coupled either to the solid particles or to a derivatized layer. For instance, polystyrene beads can be derivatized with dextran, lactose or amines (the latter case for example, via chloromethyl groups with ethylenediamine). Silica can be derivatized using organofunctional silanes, for example using trichlorosilanes or other functional silanes (such as methoxy, amine, or other functional groups), to produce surfaces with a variety of chemical functionalities. The surfaces of the derivatized beads can then be reacted with a nonlinear-active moiety via appropriate chemistry to produce the indicator.
b. Electrostatic attachment
Nonlinear-active moieties can also be electrostatically bound to a micron- or nanometer-sized particle surface to produce indicators with large hypeφolarizabilities. A charged nonlinear- active moiety, an organic dye for example, can be oriented at a counter-charged microparticle surface, thus allowing for a net hypeφolarizability of the object when using an appropriate geometry. An example of an appropriate geometry is a microparticle sphere where the diameter is approximately the wavelength of the fundamental light, i.e. from tens of nanometers to microns so that destructive phase interference between nonlinear-active moieties on opposing faces of the sphere is mimmized. The hypeφolarizability of each dye at the spheres 's surface, when integrated across the entire surface of the sphere of -wavelength of light size, is large and positive. By way of example, but not limitation, the following procedure can be used. Silica beads (-200 nm, roughly spherical) are reacted with a low concentration of 3-aminopropyltrimethoxysilane or 3-aminooctyltrimethoxysilane so that only -5-10% of the surface silanols become covalently coupled to the silane agent.
These amine groups are then reacted with the amine-reactive homobifunctional crosslinker disuccinimidyl glutarate (DSG, Pierce Chemical) to create amine-reactive linkers on ~5-10%ι of the bead surface. The beads are then incubated with 4-[5-methoxyphenyl)-2- oxazolyljpyridinium methanesulfonate (also known as 4PyMPO-MeMs), a positively charged dye which binds electrostatically to the charged silanols on the surface and orients to some degree. The excess dye is removed from the beads by centrifugation. The electrostatic adsoφtion can be sufficiently high in some cases to immobilize the charged dye, even in the absence of a bulk concentration of it.
Many nonlinear-active species are known in the art that can be used and include, but are not limited to, the following and their derivatives:
Oxazole or oxadizole molecules 5-aryl-2-(4-pyridyl)oxazole 2-aryl-5-(4-pyridyl)oxazole 2-(4-pyridyl)cycloalkano [d] oxazoles
Merocyanines
Stilbenes Indodicarbocyanines
Hemicyanines
Stilbazims
Azo dyes
Cyanines Stryryl-based dyes
Methylene blue
Diaminobenzene compounds
Polyenes
Diazostilbenes Tricyanovinyl aniline
Tricyanovinyl azo
Melamines
Phenothiazine-stilbazole
Polyimides Sulphonyl-substituted azobenzenes
Indandione-l,3-pyidinium betaine
Fluoresceins
Benzooxazoles
Perylenes Poiymethacrylates
Oxonols
Thiophenes
Bithiophenes hi evaluating whether a species may be nonlinear-active, the following characteristics can indicate the potential for nonlinear activity: a large difference dipole moment (difference in dipole moment between the ground and excited states of the molecule), a large Stokes shift in fluorescence, an aromatic or conjugated bonding character. In further evaluating such a species, an experimenter can use a simple technique known to those skilled in the art to confirm the nonlinear activity using, for example, detection of SHG from an air-water interface or from EFISH in the absence and presence of the species in question in a medium. Once a suitable nonlinear-active species has been selected for the experiment at hand, the species can be conjugated, if desired, to a species with specificity to a biological target to produce a targeting construct used in the surface-selective nonlinear optical detection or imaging technique.
Enhancers
An enhancer as used herein refers to a substance (e.g., moiety, molecule or particle) which can enhance (increase) the cross-section of a nonlinear-active substance (e.g., moiety, molecule or particle) when placed near to it (e.g., increase the intensity of second harmonic radiation generated). Examples of the enhancement effect referred to in the art include 'resonance enhancement' and 'surface enhancement'. Enhancement of the nonlinear-active cross-section moiety, molecule or particle can occur via a resonance with an electronic transition or plasmon resonance of the enhancer. The addition of an enhancer onto, or near to, a molecule or surface, can result in the enhancer coupling to the molecule or surface, e.g., covalently, electrostatically, non-covalently, etc., or the enhancer is not coupled directly to the molecule or surface, but rather is near to the molecule or surface, e.g., enhancer adsoφtion on to a cell surface, causing the enhancer to increase the nonlinear response of the label on the probes.
The following (and references therein) describe the production, design and use of resonance-enhancing particles, such as metal nanoparticles, for nonlinear optical processes (SHG, Surface-enhanced resonance Raman, etc.): S. Nie and S. Emory, Science, 1997, 75, 1102; P.V. Kamat, M. Flumiani, G.V. Hartland, J. Phys. Chem. B, 1998, 102, 3123; H. Ditlbacher et al, Appl. Phys. B, 2001, DOI: 10, 1007/s003400100700; C. Sonnichsen et al., Appl. Phys. Lett., 2000, 77, 2949; B. Lamprecht et al., Appl. Phys. B, 1997, 64, 269; J.P. Novak, J. Am. Chem. Soc, 2000, 122, 12029; S.R. Emory, W.E. Haskins, S.Nie, J. Am. Chem. Soc. 1998, 120, 8009; W.P. McConnell et al., J. Phys. Chem. B 2000, 104, 8925; F.W. Vance, B.I. Lemon, J.T. Hupp, J. Phys. Chem. B 1998, 102, 10091; P. Galletto et al, J. Phys. Chem. B 1999, 103, 8706; S.R. Emory, S. Nie, J. Phys. Chem. B 1998, 102, 493
The presence of the resonance-enhancing or surface-enhancing species serves to increase the nonlinear-active cross-section of samples. Examples of resonance-enhancing species in the art are the following: metal or metallic (e.g., gold and silver) nanoparticles or colloidal particles, metal-coated particles (e.g., silver-coated latex nanospheres), aggregates or clusters of any of the aforementioned, rationally-designed clusters, chains or aggregates of the aforementioned (e.g., for symmetry-breaking: non-centrosymmetric aggregates, particles or clusters), etc.
hi a specific embodiment, metallic or semiconductor particles (either centrosymmetric or non-centrosymmetric) can be coupled to an SHG-active particle (such as oxazole, a stryrl dye, or some other molecule or particle). These resonantly enhancing particles are well known in the prior art to strongly increase the intensity of nonlinear light scattered from a nearby nonlinear active moiety. For example, gold nanoparticles have been used to strongly enhance the SH-activity of a styryl dye ("Nonlinear optical measurement of membrane potential around single molecules at selected cellular sites", G. Peleg, A. Lewis, M. Linial, L.M. Loew, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. V. 96, 1999, 6700-6704). Because these resonantly enhancing particles are not themselves generating the nonlinear light, they can be centrosymmetric or non-centrosymmetric. They are preferably close enough to the SH-active moiety to create the resonant enhancement effect, which occurs through a dipole-dipole interaction; the distance between the two species is typically on the order of angstroms to nanometers. The general resonance enhancement effect on nonlinear optical phenomena is discussed in the context of roughened silver surfaces (G. Boyd, T. Rasing, R. Leite, Y. Shen (1984) Phys. Rev. B 30, 519-526, C. Chen, T.F. Heinz, D. Richard, Y. Shen (1981) Phys. Rev. Lett. 46, 1010-1012). The resonantly enhancing particles are available commercially with a variety of surface chemistries amenable to coupling to an SH-active molecule such as oxazole (succinimidyl ester, maleimide, etc. offered by Molecules Probes, Eugene, OR). Or the particle-nonlinear-active moiety complex can be constructed according to a number of schemes available in the prior art.
In some instances, experimentation may be required to determine the optimal labeling strategy and/or use of enhancers or decorators for a given measurement. For instance, the coupling chemistry, reaction conditions, etc. may be adjusted empirically to determine the optimal labeling strategy. Candidates for an enhancer can be tested for their effect on a nonlinear-active species by measuring, for example, the SHG intensity of a nonlinear-active species in the absence and presence of the candidate enhancer (the enhancer can be attached to the nonlinear-active label, through a linker if necessary; or the enhancer can be brought into proximity to the label, e.g. by virtue of the probe-target reaction). The enhancer's effect on a nonlinear-active label can be made at an interface (e.g., air-water or solid-liquid) or in bulk phase under the application of an electric field (EFISH).
Molecular Beacon Analogues
The nonlinear activity of a system can also be manipulated through the introduction of nonlinear analogues to molecular beacons, that is, molecular beacon probes that have been modified to incoφorate a nonlinear-active label (or modulator thereof) instead of fluorophores and quenchers. These nonlinear optical analogues of molecular beacons are referred to herein as molecular beacon analogues (MB analogues or MBA). The MB analogues to be used in the invention can be synthesized according to procedures known to one of ordinary skill in the art.
In specific embodiments, the MB analogue probes can be used according to the present invention as hybridization probes that can report the presence of complementary nucleic acid targets without having to separate probe-target hybrids from excess probes in hybridization assays and without the need to label the targets. Target labeling is not only time-consuming, but it can change the levels of targets originally present in a sample. MB analogue probes can also be used for the detection of RNAs within living cells, for monitoring the synthesis of specific nucleic acids in sealed reaction vessels, and for the construction of self-reporting oligonucleotide arrays. They can be used to perform homogeneous one-tube assays for the identification of single-nucleotide variations in DNA and for the detection of pathogens or cells immobilized to surfaces for interfacial detection.
Figures 20A and 20B illustrate an embodiment of a MB analogue probe. A species with a hypeφolarizability capable of generating nonlinear optical radiation in response to illumination with one or more fundamental beams is attached to one end of a probe or at one location (e.g., a dye molecule, see Fig. 20B). At the other end of the probe or in another location in proximity to the nonlinear-active label, a species capable of increasing or decreasing the nonlinear optical radiation generated by a nonlinear-active label when the two species are in proximity is attached (e.g., a 10 nm gold particle, see Fig. 20B). The attachment can be via a covalent bond or through some other well known means in the art. hi a specific embodiment, the nonlinear-active label is an organic dye with a hypeφolarizability such as the well known oxazole dyes and their derivatives. The oxazole dyes and their derivatives are commercially available from Molecular Probes (Eugene, OR) for attachment to a variety of probes including nucleic acids using amine and sulfhydryl chemistries. A species such as a gold nanoparticle, well known for its ability to enhance the nonlinear optical radiation generated by a nonlinear-active species to which it is in proximity, can be used as the species capable of modulating the nonlinear optical radiation generated by the label. In specific embodiments, the MB analogue probes can be immobilized to a solid surface such as a planar glass surface or to the surface of microspheres, or the MB analogue probes can be used in homogeneous solution and detected using an applied electric field in an EFISH measurement. If the MB As are immobilized to a surface, the nonlinear-active species becomes at least partially oriented at the surface and satisfies the non-centrosymmetric condition required for surface-selective nonlinear optical techniques.
The Au nanoparticle can enhance the intensity of nonlinear optical radiation, such as second harmonic generation scattered by the oxazole dye by several orders of magnitude when the nanoparticle and oxazole dye are in proximity to each other. Upon hybridization of the probe to a complementary target, the intensity of the nonlinear optical radiation decreases and this decrease can be quantitatively related to the amount of probe-target hybridization. The sensitivity of the technique is determined by, among other factors, the background nonlinear optical signal before hybridization occurs. The sequences of various targets used for testing the degree of hybridization to the probe in Fig. 20B are Target 1 - 4 in Figure 20 (SEQ ID NOs: 1 - 4 respectively).
The present invention can be used for detection of single nucleotide polymoφhisms (SNPs) in target samples because the MBA probes are highly selective in their binding of targets and a one base pair difference in sequence between probes and targets yields a much reduced hybridization affinity compared with a target that is perfectly complementary. The MBA probe can act also as a label.
5.1 ASSAYING PROBE-TARGET INTERACTIONS In a specific embodiment, the present invention relates to a method for detecting interactions between biological components in an applied external force field using a nonlinear optical technique. In one aspect of the present invention this relates to detection of binding between probes and targets that result in a conformational change. The invention discloses methods for screening one or more probes in an applied external force field. The invention also discloses methods for screening modulators of the probe-target binding interaction, and for determining the degree or extent of binding in an applied external force field through the conformational changes the binding induces. Throughout the description of the present invention test molecules are also referred to as "targets," and candidate binding partners are also referred to herein as "probes." The following are examples of the types of probe-target interactions that can be assayed according to the present invention:
i) Probe-target binding in an external force field. ii) Probe-target binding an external force field that results in a conformational change in the probe, target or both, ii) Probe-target binding an external force field that results in a change in the dipole moment of a nonlinear-active species, said species being the probe, target or both, as a result of probe-target binding.
Probe-target binding an external force field can also result in a combination of both conformational and dipole moment changes.
Furthermore, detection of the probe-target interactions can occur at an interface, in bulk phase (homogeneous phase), or in regions that comprise a combination of interface and bulk.
The external field can be used to produce a non-centrosymmetric region of oriented nonlinear-active molecules or particles at an interface, in homogeneous phase, or some combination thereof. The external field can be an electric field, a magnetic field (if the nonlinear-active molecules or particles possess a magnetic susceptibility), or a fluid flow field (the flow friction acts to partially orient the nonlinear active molecules or particles), for example.
In specific embodiments, the probes and targets may not need to be derivatized with labels or modulators for use with the present invention, so that a label-less, homogeneous assay can be achieved, based on the intrinsic hypeφolarizability and nonlinear modulating properties of the probes and targets.
The present invention can be applied to an ensemble of molecules or to a single molecule - i.e., ensemble reaction measurements or a single-molecule reaction measurement.
hi a preferred embodiment, the target is a G protein-coupled receptor (GPCR). GPCRs are one class of proteins that undergo a conformational change when activated by a ligand and are thus amenable to study using the present invention. In this case, if the GPCR is not intrinsically nonlinear-active, the protein is labeled using a nonlinear-active label, and the conformational change is detected or queried for via a change in the orientation of the nonlinear-active label. The GPCRs can be attached to a surface and the conformational change that results when a ligand activates the receptor causes a change in the orientation of the label and thus a change in properties of the nonlinear optical beams (e.g., second harmonic generation) such as intensity, wavelength or polarization. A background signal can be measured before exposure of the sample to a ligand, if desired.
In some cases, binding of a component to a receptor can lead to a change in measured nonlinear optical properties even though the receptor is not activated. For example, this can be due to an interaction between the component and the receptor in the bound complex which alters the orientation of a label attached to the receptor. A control can be performed, if desired, to assign measured changes in nonlinear optical properties to binding or activation of components to a given receptor. For example, a component which is known to bind to a given receptor but not to produce a conformational change can be used as a control of the label reaction; if any measured change in label orientation is due only to receptor activation, the position of the label can be changed by changing the conjugation chemistry of the label and/or genetically modifying the receptor to introduce new labeling sites.
For example, receptors can be labeled with a nonlinear-active label that possesses, on average, an orientation (or orientation of hypeφolarizability) of some angle θ with respect of the surface plane (e.g., host cell membrane). Upon binding and/or activation to some ligand, the average label angle can shift to angle β with respect to the surface plane. Even small shifts in angle as a result of receptor binding or activation can cause substantial changes in a property of the measured nonlinear optical light (e.g., intensity of the nonlinear light). For example, if the intensity of the nonlinear optical light generated is proportional to the component of the hypeφolarizability that is normal to the membrane plane, then the percentage change of intensity upon a shift is: [cos(θ)/cos(β)]2 with the nonlinear intensity dependent quadratically on the normal component of the hypeφolarizability. For example, assuming a delta function in hypeφolarizability orientation, if θ -> β is a change of 25 degrees to 30 degrees, the nonlinear optical intensity will decrease about 9%.
hi some instances, some experimentation may be required to determine the optimal labeling strategy and/or use of enhancers or decorators for a given measurement. For instance, the coupling chemistry, reaction conditions, etc may need to be adjusted empirically to determine the optimal labeling strategy.
Alternatively, the target molecules can be solubilized and, using their intrinsic dipole moments, poled in solution (i.e., homogeneous) phase by an electric field, magnetic field or as a result of fluid flow; if the target possesses a hypeφolarizability (i.e., is nonlinear-active, either intrinsically or made so by attachment of a nonlinear-active label), a nonlinear optical signal can be generated, e.g, via the EFISH technique, and this signals serves as the background. Upon addition of a ligand (i.e., a probe) that activates the target molecule, a conformational change will occur. If this conformational change does not result in an appreciable dipole moment change in the target molecule, the number and net orientation of the target molecules will not change appreciably. If, however, this conformational change is passed to the nonlinear-active moiety, its overall orientation will change, resulting in a change in measured nonlinear optical properties. If the binding of a ligand to the target molecules results in an appreciable dipole moment change of the nonlinear-active target molecule, the number of aligned target molecules in the applied field will change, resulting in change in measured nonlinear optical properties. The number of aligned molecules in an applied external field, e.g, and electric field magnetic field or as a result of fluid flow, in solution is dependent on the dipole moment of the molecules. An equation used to model the dependence is the Langevin equation: N = N0exp(-μE/kT) where N is the number of aligned species, μ is their dipole moment, E is the electric field magnitude parallel to the dipole moment, No the number of molecules exposed to the field, k is the Boltzmann constant and T is the temperature in Kelvin. Changes in dipole moment as a result of probe-target interactions can lead to large changes in the number of aligned molecules and thus large changes in the intensity of nonlinear optical light generated by the molecules. For example, a probe with a nonlinear-active label and a given dipole moment binds to a target; the resulting probe-target complex with a larger or smaller dipole moment leads to a change in intensity of the generated nonlinear light. Measured changes as a result of binding can also be used to calculate binding conformations between molecules if the position and amount of charge is well known on each molecule (e.g., as is often the case with proteins, whose crystal structure is known).
In specific embodiments, targets and probes can both be DNA oligonucleotides. The target strand is labeled with a second harmonic-active label and the probe (complementary) strand with a modulator, a gold nanoparticle, for instance. An external field, e.g. electric field, magnetic field, or as a result of fluid flow, is applied to a sample containing targets, resulting in a nonlinear optical signal as background. The probe oligos are added to the sample and when the probe strands hybridize to the target strands, the gold nanoparticle will change the nonlinear optical properties of the label - for example, the hypeφolarizability of the label can be decreased or increased, or the frequency response of the label can be shifted, thereby allowing for detection in intensity or a shift of the nonlinear optical spectrum of the sample.
Another specific embodiment of this reaction is that the dipole moment direction and magnitude can change after the binding reaction. One oligonucleotide is labeled with a nonlinear-active label; the complementary strand is unlabeled. An external electric field is applied to the labeled strand, producing a background nonlinear optical signal. Upon binding to the complementary strand, the dipole moment of the labeled complex is changed and, through interaction with the electric field, causes a change in the number of oriented and labeled species and thus a change in the physical properties of the nonlinear optical light (e.g., intensity).
In another specific embodiment of the present invention, probes (analytes) are detected using a surface-selective nonlinear optical technique by application of an electric field. For example, fatty acids in a flow-through cell passing through an electric field become partially oriented by the electric field, leading to a change in the nonlinear optical response within the affected region, and in turn leading to a detectable change in nonlinear optical properties of this region. The nonlinear optical light can be placed transverse to the applied electric field to probe for the presence and amount of some probe (analyte) of interest in the flow-through cell. The probes can be pre-labeled with a nonlinear-active label (for instance, a label specific for the chemical nature of the analyte: e.g., a fatty acid-specific nonlinear-active label) - in the case of using labels, the label contributes a hypeφolarizability and a nonlinear susceptibility (when oriented by the applied electric field) leading to quantitative detection of the analyte. h other cases, the analyte can be detected directly without the need for labels due to intrinsic hypeφolarizability, or detected indirectly through the use of indicators present in the probe region which become oriented in the presence of oriented analytes, i.e., the net orientation of the indicators is changed by the presence of oriented analytes. In specific embodiment of the present invention, probe-target interactions comprising an ion channel as a probe are studied via a surface-selective nonlinear optical technique as a function of applied electric field. In this embodiment, cells, membranes, vesicles or other phases contaimng ion channels are exposed to drugs, signalling molecules, neurotransmitters or other targets which modulate or otherwise affect the ion channel properties or states; the sample is placed in an electric field - for example, using a sandwich structure using two indium tin oxide elctrodes separated by a spacer (Fig. 17). Ion channel properties can be monitored using labels, indocators, polarization of water or solvent molecules.
Indicators (patent pending, J. Salafsky) can be used to detect changes in cell surface potential and charge density (in real time) due to ion channel dynamics - in response to binding of drugs directly to an ion channel receptor or to a second messenger in the membrane, for example. Advantages of the use of indicators are that, 1) unlike the fast- response dyes used in fluorescence detection, the nonlinear properties of the sample are determined mainly by orientation effects - not by changes in transmembrane potential and 2) slow-response dyes used in fluorescence detection of ion channel properties exhibit their changes in fluorescence much more slowly - and therefore potentially important information about transient ion channel states is not accessible. In the use of both fast and slow-response dyes, the change in fluorescence (intensity and shift in peak wavelength, for example) is small; the nonlinear optical technique of the present invention offers both fast time response (real time) and large changes and without the need for staining of the membrane. Moreoever, the intrinsic effect of an external electric field on the signal of indicators in the nonlinear optical technique of the present invention is smaller than that on the fluorescence-based dyes - due in part because the polarization of water molecules, indicators, etc. to changes in surface potential and charge density is due to ionic current effects rather than to direct interactions with the applied electric field - in contrast to the case with the dyes used in fluorescence-based detection of ion channel properties.
In a specific embodiment of the present invention, an electric field can be applied across a surface to discriminate between targets which have bound to surface-attached probes from non-bound targets wherein targets, probes or both are labeled with a nonlinear-active moiety. In this aspect, a surface holds attached probes and targets are examined for binding against the surface-attached probes using, for example, nonlinear active labels attached to the targets (patent pending, J. Salafsky) or indicators in the target medium. An electric field can enhance the amount of oriented labels or indicators near a surface: in one embodiment of this, targets labeled with nonlinear active labels are examined for studying probe-target binding at an interface; an electric field placed across the interface is pulsed in time. A brief increase in the intensity of the nonlinear optical radiation is observed due to an increase in orientation of the labels; this will be rapidly followed by a randomization of the labels not attached to a probe-bound target (giving a reduction in the nonlinear optical radiation intensity); a slower randomization process will occur for those labels attached to probe- bound targets at the surface. Thus, detection of surface-bound targets can be temporally separated from the non-bound targets.
hi a specific embodiment of the present invention, cells containing receptors of interest are cultured on a solid surface. A nonlinear optical indicator is placed in the buffer in contact with the cells. An electric field is applied across the surface, producing a background nonlinear optical signal. Upon addition of a ligand which binds to and causes a signaling response in a cell-surface receptor (e.g., an ion channel), the net orientation of the indicators changes, thus causing a change in the intensity of the measured nonlinear optical signal.
The above illustrations are exemplary of any probe-target interaction in an applied force field that results in a change in dipole moment or conformational change. Ion channel proteins are examples of another important class of proteins that undergo conformational change in response to activation and are also amenable to study using the present invention.
Surface-selective nonlinear optical techniques are also coherent techniques, meaning that the fundamental and nonlinear beams have well-defined phase relationships, and the wavefronts of a nonlinear beam in a macroscopic sample (within the coherence length) are in phase. These properties offer a number of advantages useful for surface or high-throughput studies in which, for example, either a single surface or a microarray surface is examined. An apparatus using nonlinear optical suface-selective-based detection, such as with second harmonic generation, requires minimal collection optics since generation of the nonlinear light only occurs at the interface and thus, in principle, allows extremely high depth discrimination and fast scanning.
Probe-target interactions - in homogeneous phase or at an interface - or their effects, can be correlated, for example, to the following measurable information using the present invention: i) the intensity of the nonlinear or fundamental light.
ii) the wavelength or spectrum of the nonlinear or fundamental light.
iii) position of incidence of the fundamental light on the surface or substrate (e.g., for imaging).
iv) the time-course of i), ii) or iii).
v) one or more combinations of i), ii) and iii).
The advantages of the present invention are enumerated as follows: i) Sensitive and direct dependence on the orientation and/or dipole moment of the nonlinear-active species in a sample, useful for detection of conformational changes in probes and binding that results in an appreciable change in the dipole moment of the nonlinear-active species (i.e., probe, target or both), ii) Higher signal to noise (lower background) than fluorescence-based detection since surface-selective nonlinear optical light is generated only at surfaces that create a non- centrosymmetric situation, or in homogeneous phase under application of an electric field to induce the non-centrosymmetry. surface-selective nonlinear optical light detection of a surface has a very narrow 'depth of field' . Sources of fluorescence in fluorescence-based detection schemes include that from materials in the field of view but not in the focal plane, autofluorescence, and contamination of the emitted fluorescence with stray excitation light; these are not sources of background nonlinear optical radiation. iii) The nonlinear optical technique is useful when the presence of a liquid solution is required for the measurement, i.e. where the binding process can be obviated or disturbed by a wash-away step. This aspect of the invention can be useful for equilibrium measurements (free energy, binding constants, etc.), which require the presence of bulk species or kinetics measurements with measurements made over a period of time, iv) Lower photobleaching and heating effects than those that occur in fluorescence - the two-photon absoφtion cross-section is much lower than the one-photon cross-section in a molecule and the nonlinear optical technique comprises scattering, not absoφtion. v) A minimum of collection optics is needed and higher signal to noise is expected since the fundamental and nonlinear beams (e.g.,, second harmonic) have well-defined incoming and outgoing directions with respect to the interface. This is advantageous compared to fluorescence-based detection in which the fluorescence is emitted isotropically and there may be a large auto-fluorescence background out of the plane of interest (e.g., the interface containing the probes). vi) Ease of use with beads, biological cells, liposomes or other particles whose non- planar surface makes an interface with the supporting medium, solution, etc. vii) Convenience of discriminating between binding of targets to probes from actual activation of probes (e.g., a receptor) by a target. viii) The binding process between probes and targets can be performed in the presence of one or more small molecules, drugs, blocking agents, or other components which affect properties of the probe-target binding process, e.g. equilibrium constants, kinetics of binding, etc. ix) Ability to detect probe-target binding in homogeneous phase.
In an embodiment, using surface arrays, arrays can be constructed according a plurality of methods found in the art. For DNA microarrays, most are prepared with one of three non-standard approaches (S.C. Case-Green et al., Curr. Opin. Chem. Biol. 2 (1998), 404): Affymetrix, Inc. probe anays are prepared using patterned, light-directed combinatorial chemical synthesis (S.A. Fodor, Science 277 (1997), 393); spotted anays can be made according to D.H. Duggan et al., Nature Genet. 21 (Suppl.) (1999), 10; M. Schena et al., Science 270 (1995), 467; P.O. Brown and D. Botstein, Nature Genet. 21 (Suppl.) (1999), 33; and L. McAllister et al., Am. J. Hum. Genet. 61 (Suppl.) (1997), 1387; ink-jet techniques can also be used to synthesize oligonucleotides base by base through sequential solution- based reactions on an appropriate substrate (A.P. Blanchard et al., Biosens. And Bioelectron. 11 (1996) 687- relevant portions of all of which references are incoφorated by reference herein).
For example, nucleic acid, oligo- or nucleotide anays can be constructed according to Pat. No. 6,110,426, Pat. No. 5,143,8546,110,426- relevant portions of which are incoφorated by reference herein, Pat. No. 5,143,854- relevant portions of which are incoφorated by reference herein or Fodor et al., "Light-directed Spatially-addressable Parallel Chemical Synthesis," Science, 1991, 251, 767-773. Soluble protein anays can be constructed according to R. Ekins, F.W. Chu, Trends in Biotechnology, 1999, 17, 217, relevant portions of which are incoφorated by reference herein. Membrane proteins arrays can be constucted by micropatterning of fluid lipid membranes according, for example, to the method of Groves, J.T., Ulman, N., Boxer, S.G., "Micropatterning fluid bilayers on solid supports", Science, 1997, 275, 651-3 (relevant portions of which are incoφorated by reference herein). The array substrate can be composed of glass, silicon, indium tin oxide, or any other substrate known in the art. The surface anay under study can contain physical barriers between elements so that the elements (and their biomolecules) can remain in isolation from each other during a chemical reaction step. The anay locations can consist of different probes, the same probes everywhere, or some combination thereof. The array can also be constructed on the underside of a prism allowing for total internal reflection of the beam and evanescent generation of the nonlinear light. Or an anay substrate can be brought into contact with a prism with the same result.
An electrophoretic system can also be used in conjunction with the surface anay, for example to deliver reagents or biological components to one or a plurality of locations using flow channels or microcapillaries. The sample can include an anay of microcapiUary channels, each distinct from the other and each allowing a target-probe reaction to occur; the imaging technique would then consist of anay elements, each one a microcapiUary channel or reaction chamber into which the channel feeds or drains.
The polarization of the fundamental and nonlinear beams can be selected with polarizing optics elements. By analyzing the intensity of the nonlinear beam as a function of fundamental and nonlinear polarization, more information (e.g., higher signal to noise) about the probe-target complexes can be obtained. Furthermore, by selecting and analyzing the polarization of the fundamental or nonlinear optical radiation, background radiation can be reduced or signal intensity enhanced.
Detection can be accomplished with the use of multiple internal reflection plates (NJ.
Harrick, "Internal Reflection Spectroscopy", John Wiley & Sons, Inc., New York, 1979 - relevant portions of which are incoφorated by reference herein) allowing the fundamental beam to make multiple contacts with the anay surface, thus increasing the intensity of the generated nonlinear light. Another alternative is to construct an optical cavity with the array surface on one side and a lossy coupler at one end to permit the output coupling of the nonlinear light, creating an optical microcavity which would allow the buildup of very high intensities under resonance and thus increase the amount of nonlinear light generated. Polynucleotide anays can be used as probes. Where oligonucleotides are targets or probes, preferably a nonlinear-active label is attached to the 5' or 3' termini. There are many linking moieties and methodologies for attaching molecules which can be nonlinear-active labels to the 5' or 3' termini of oligonucleotides, as exemplified by the following references: Eckstein, editor, Oligonucleotides and Analogues: A Practical Approach (IRL Press, Oxford, 1991); Zuckerman etal., Nucleic Acids Research, 15: 5305-5321 (1987) (3' thiol group on oligonucleotide); Sharma et al., Nucleic Acids Research, 19: 3019 (1991) (3' sulfhydryl); Giusti et al., PCR Methods and Applications, 2: 223-227 (1993) and Fung et al., U.S. Pat. No. 4, 757,141 (5' phosphoamino group via Aminolink.TM. II available from Applied Biosystems, Foster City, Cafil.) Stabinsky, U.S. Pat. No. 4.739,044 (3' aminoalkylphosphoryl group); Agrawal et al., Tetrahedron Letters, 31: 1543-1546 (1990) (attachment via phosphoramidate linkages); Sproat et al., Nucleic Acids Research, 15: 4837 (1987) (5' mercapto group); Nelson et al., Nucleic Acids Research, 17: 7187-7194 (1989) (3' amino group); and the like, relevant portions of which are incoφorated by reference herein.
Preferably, commercially available linking moieties are employed that can be used to a label to an oligonucleotide during synthesis, e.g., available from Clontech Laboratories (Palo Alto, Cafil.). In a specific embodiment, rhodamine and fluorescein dyes can be conveniently attached to the 5' hydroxyl of an oligonucleotide at the conclusion of solid phase synthesis by way of dyes derivatized with a phosphoramidite moiety, e.g., Woo et al., U.S. Pat. No. 5,231, 191; and Hobbs, Jr., U.S. Pat. No. 4,997,928, relevant portions of which are incoφorated by reference herein.
Preferable, the oligonucleotides are present on arrays.
Protein arrays can be used to determine whether a given target protein binds to the immobilized probe protein on the surface; these anays can also be used to study small molecule binding to the probe proteins. Protein anays can be prepared by the method of G. MacBeath and S.L. Schreiber, "Printing Proteins as Microanays for High-Throughput Function Determination", Science 2000, 289, 1760-1763, for example, to determine whether a given target protein binds to the immobilized probe protein on the surface.
The surface on which the probes are formed may be composed from a wide range of material, either biological, non-biological, organic, inorganic, or a combination of any of these, existing as particles, strands, precipitates, gels, sheets, tubing, spheres, containers, capillaries, pads, slices, films, plates, slides, etc. The surface may have any convenient shape, such as a disc, square, sphere, circle, etc. The surface is preferably flat but may take on a variety of alternative surface configurations. For example, the surface may contain raised or depressed regions on which a sample is located. The surface and its surface preferably form a rigid support on which the sample can be formed. The surface and its surface are also chosen to provide appropriate light-absorbing characteristics. For instance, the surface may be a polymerized Langmuir Blodgett film, functionalized glass, Si, Ge, GaAs, GaP, SixOy, SixNy, modified silicon, or any one of a wide variety of gels or polymers such as (poly)tetrafluoroethylene, (poly)vinylidenedifluoride, polystyrene, polycarbonate, or combinations thereof. Other surface materials will be readily apparent to those of skill in the art upon review of this disclosure. In a prefened embodiment the surface is flat glass or silica.
According to some embodiments, the surface of the substrate is etched using well known techniques to provide for desired surface features. For example, by way of the formation of trenches, v-grooves, mesa stractures, or the like, the synthesis regions may be more closely placed within the focus point of impinging light. The surface may also be provided with reflective "minor" structures for maximization of emission collected therefrom.
The chemical identity of the probes (e.g., protein structure or oligonucleotide sequence) can vary from site to site across the solid surface, or the same probe can uniformly cover the surface. Targets can be of a single identity or a combination of targets with different identities.
In a specific embodiment, the kinetics of probe-target binding reactions are measured as a function of target concentration. In this embodiment, the time course of the intensity and/or spectrum of the nonlinear optical light are measured. The measured information is converted into a time course of bound target concentration (e.g., probe-target concentration in mM/s or μM/s). Drugs or modulators of the probe-target binding equilibrium or kinetic rate of formation can be used so as to compare the effect of the added substance on the probe- target reactions.
In a specific embodiment, targets are labeled with nonlinear active moieties are examined for binding against surface-attached probes. During the course of the probe-target reaction, an external force field, e.g., an electric field, magnetic field or as a result of fluid flow, is applied, causing the labels associated with targets both bound and non-bound to transiently orient and therefore causing a measurable change in a physical property of the nonlinear radiation (e.g., intensity of the light). However, the return to a more random orientation of the labels will be different for the population that is bound to surface-attached probes compared with those targets not bound in the bulk — this is because the binding of the targets to probes at the nterface reduces conformational freedom and thus restricts the rate at which labels can re-randomize in orientation. Thus, the signals due to (the labels of) probe- bound targets can be temporally separated from those due to non-bound targets. In practice, a delta function in external electric field is applied across the interface at some instant To (or at many instants) during the probe-target reaction. This will cause transient orientation in the targets, due for example, to interaction of the field with the target dipole; however, the non- bound targets will rapidly re-randomize (within nanoseconds to microseconds, typically— period T ) and the probe-bound targets will randomize more slowly due to the motionally constrained state of the targets bound to probes (over period T2). Thus, signals from the two populations can be readily separated in time to measure (T different from T\ following T0), for example, the amount of probe-bound targets at the interface during some period in time.
Various art not involving the use of a surface-selective nonlinear optical technique contains relevant portions for the present invention and the following exemplary list and their references therein is referenced herein: King et al.., U.S. Patent 5,633,724 for the scanning and analysis of the scans; Fork et al., U.S. Patent 6,121,983 for the multiplexing of a laser to produce a laser anay suitable for scanning; Foster, U.S. Patent 5,485,277; Fodor et al., U.S. Patent 5,324,633 and Fodor et al., U.S. Patent 6,124,102 for a substrate containing an anay of attached probes and for the analysis of scans to determine kinetic and equilibrium properties of a binding reaction between probes and targets; Kain et al., U.S. Patent 5,847,400 for laser scanning of a substrate; King et al., U.S. Patent 5,432,610 for an optical resonance cavity for power build-up; Walt et al., U.S. Patent 5,320,814, Walt et al., U.S. Patent 5,250,264, Walt et al., U.S. Patent 5,298,741, Walt et al., U.S. Patent 5,252,494, Walt et al., U.S. Patent 6,023,540, Walt et al, U.S. Patent 5,814,524, Walt et al., U.S. Patent 5,244,813 for fiberoptic-based apparatus; Fiekowsky et al., U.S. Patent 6,095,555 for imaging and software- based analysis of images; Stern et al., U.S. Patent 5,631,734 for data acquisition; Stimson et al., U.S. Patent 6,134,002 for confocal imaging techniques; Sampas, U.S. Patent 6,084,991 for CCD-based imaging techniques; Stern et al., U.S. Patent 5,631,734 for photolithographical preparation of probes attached to surfaces; Shalon et al., U.S. Patent 6,110,426 for methods and apparatus for creating attached probes on a surface; Slettnes, U.S. Patent 6,040,586 for position-based scanning techniques; Trulson et al, U.S. Patent 6,025,601 for methods of imaging probe-target binding on a surface.
Cells Attached to Surfaces and Microarrays of Cells This section outlines some of the methods concerned with interfacing biological cells with surfaces and fabricating anays of biological cells on surfaces, which can be used in the assays of the present invention. Many methods have been described for making uniform micro-patterned arrays of cells for other applications, using for example photochemical resist- photolithograpy. (Mrksich and Whitesides, Ann. Rev. Biophys. Biomol. Struct. 25:55-78, 1996). According to this photoresist method, a glass plate is uniformly coated with a photoresist and a photo mask is placed over the photoresist coating to define the "anay" or pattern desired. Upon exposure to light, the photoresist in the unmasked areas is removed. The entire photolithographically defined surface is uniformly coated with a hydrophobic substance such as an organosilane that binds both to the areas of exposed glass and the areas covered with the photoresist. The photoresist is then stripped from the glass surface, exposing an anay of spots of exposed glass. The glass plate then is washed with an organosilane having terminal hydrophilic groups or chemically reactable groups such as amino groups. The hydrophobic organosilane binds to the spots of exposed glass with the resulting glass plate having an anay of hydrophilic or reactable spots (located in the areas of the original photoresist) across a hydrophobic surface. The array of spots of hydrophilic groups provides a substrate for non-specific and non-covalent binding of certain cells, including those of neuronal origin (Klienfeld et al., J. Neurosci. 8:4098-4120, 1988). Reactive ion etching has been similarly used on the surface of silicon wafers to produce surfaces patterned with two different types of texture (Craighead et al., Appl. Phys. Lett. 37:653, 1980-relevant portions of which are incoφorated by reference herein; Craighead et al., J. Vac. Sci. Technol. 20:316, 1982-relevant portions of which are incoφorated by reference herein; Suh et al. Proc. SPIE 382:199, 1983-relevant portions of which are incoφorated by reference herein).
In another method based on specific yet non-covalent interactions, photoresist stamping is used to produce a gold surface coated with protein adsoφtive alkanethiol. (Singhvi et al., Science 264:696-698, 1994). The bare gold surface is then coated with polyethylene-terminated alkanethiols that resist protein adsoφtion. After exposure of the entire surface to laminin, a cell-binding protein found in the extracellular matrix, living hepatocytes attach uniformly to, and grow upon, the laminin coated islands (Singhvi et al. 1994). An elaboration involving strong, but non-covalent, metal chelation has been used to coat gold surfaces with patterns of specific proteins (Sigal et al., Anal. Chem. 68:490-497, 1996). In this case, the gold surface is patterned with alkanethiols terminated with nitriloacetic acid. Bare regions of gold are coated with tri(ethyleneglycol) to reduce protein adsoφtion. After adding Ni2+, the specific adsoφtion of five histidine-tagged proteins is found to be kinetically stable.
More specific uniform cell-binding can be achieved by chemically crosslinking specific molecules, such as proteins, to reactable sites on the patterned substrate (Aplin and Hughes, Analyt. Biochem. 113:144-148, 1981). Another elaboration of substrate patterning optically creates an anay of reactable spots. A glass plate is washed with an organosilane that chemisorbs to the glass to coat the glass. The organosilane coating is inadiated by deep UV light through an optical mask that defines a pattern of an anay. The inadiation cleaves the Si- -C bond to form a reactive Si radical. Reaction with water causes the Si radicals to form polar silanol groups. The polar silanol groups constitute spots on the anay and are further modified to couple other reactable molecules to the spots, as disclosed in U.S. Pat. No. 5,324,591 , incoφorated by reference herein. For example, a silane containing a biologically functional group such as a free amino moiety can be reacted with the silanol groups. The free amino groups can then be used as sites of covalent attachment for biomolecules such as proteins, nucleic acids, carbohydrates, and lipids. Other methods for patterning the adhesion of mammalian cells to surfaces using self-assembled monolayers on a surface include Lopez et al, "Convenient Methods for Patterning the Adhesion of Mammalian Cells to Surfaces Using Self-Assembled Monolayers of Alkanethiolates on Gold," J. Am. Chem. Soc, 1993, 115, 5877-5878, Georger et al, "Coplanar Patterns of Self-assembled Monolayers for Selective Cell-adhesion and Outgrowth,"Thin Solid Films 210 (1-2): 716-719 APR 30 1992, and Spargo et al, PNAS 91 (23): 11070-11074 (1994).
The non-patterned covalent attachment of a lectin, known to interact with the surface of cells, to a glass substrate through reactive amino groups has been demonstrated (Aplin and Hughes, Analyt. Biochem. 113:144-148, 1981). The optical method of forming a uniform anay of cells on a support requires fewer steps and is faster than the photoresist method, (i.e., only two steps), but it requires the use of high intensity ultraviolet light from an expensive light source. Cells can also be cultured or grown on surfaces that require no additional derivatization. Surfaces of this type well known in the art include Becton-Dickinson Falcon plates and others.
In all of these methods the resulting anay of cells or surface-attached cell layer is uniform, since the biochemically specific molecules are bound to the micro-patterned chemical anay uniformly. In the photoresist method, cells bind to the anay of hydrophilic spots and/or specific molecules attached to the spots, which, in turn, bind cells. Thus cells bind to all spots in the array in the same manner. In the optical method, cells bind to the array of spots of free amino groups by adhesion. Methods for attaching a variety of cell types to the same substrate for simultaneously binding against these cell types also exist and can be used.
Nucleic Acid Arrays
Nucleic acid arrays are useful in a number of biological and clinical studies in which one or more genes are analyzed in parallel using the anay. Genetic disease is often caused by genes that are inappropriately transcribed ~ either too much or too little — or which are missing altogether. Such defects are especially common in cancers, which can occur when regulatory genes are deleted, inactivated, or become constitutively active. Unlike some . genetic diseases (e.g. cystic fibrosis) in which a single defective gene is always responsible, cancers that appear clinically similar can be genetically heterogeneous. For example, prostate cancer (prostatic adenocarcinoma) may be caused by several different, independent regulatory gene defects even in a single patient. In a group of prostate cancer patients, every¬ one may have a different set of missing or damaged genes, with differing implications for prognosis and treatment of the disease.
Comparative hybridization can serve two puφoses in studying cancer: it can pinpoint the transcription differences responsible for the change from normal to cancerous cells, and it can distinguish different patterns of abnormal transcription in heterogeneous cancers. Understanding the diverse basis of a cancer is crucial for inventing therapies targeted to the different varieties of the disease, so that each patient receives the most appropriate and effective treatment. Cancers are common examples of genetically heterogeneous diseases, but they are by no means the only ones. Diabetes, heart disease, and multiple sclerosis are among the diseases for which genetic risk factors are known to be heterogeneous.
Peptide-nucleic acids In a specific embodiment, peptide nucleic acids or oligomers, which are analogs of nucleic acids in which, for example, the peptide-like backbone is replaced with an uncharged backbone, can be used with the present invention. PNAs are well known in the art. References below give extensive reviews of the use of these nucleic acid analogs in a wide range of applications, including surface and anay-based hybridization wherein PNAs are attached to surfaces and allowed to bind with sequence-complementary DNAs or RNAs.
For instance, oligomers of PNA can be used as the surface-attached probe components instead of DNA oligomers. A key advantage to using PNAs is that the hybridization reaction with DNAs or RNAs, for example, (containing charged phosphate groups) is only weakly dependent (eg., the melting temperature) on ionic strength because there is much less charge repulsion as found with conventional DNA-DNA, etc. hybridization. Thus, one can use the surface-selective nonlinear optical technique to follow a probe-target hybridization at any desired ionic strength. The PNAs are commercially available (for instance via Applied Biosystems, Foster City, CA) or other analogs of DNA can be synthesized and used. The following references are broad reviews of the use of PNAs:
Nielsen, et al. "Peptide nucleic acids (PNA): Oligonucleotide analogues with a polyamide backbone" Antisense Research and Applications (1992) 363-372
Nielsen, et al. "Peptide nucleic acids (PNAs): Potential Antisense and Anti-gene Agents." Anti-Cancer Drug Design 8 (1993) 53-63
Buchardt, et al. "Peptide nucleic acids and their potential applications in biotechnology" TIBTECH 11 (1993) 384-386
Nielsen, P.E., Egholm, M. and Buchardt, O. "Peptide Nucleic Acid (PNA). A DNA mimic with a peptide backbone" Bioconjugate Chemistry 5 (1994) 3-7 Nielsen "Peptide nucleic acid (PNA): A lead for gene therapeutic drugs" Antisense Therapeutics 4 (1996) 76-84
Nielsen, P.E. "DNA analogues with nonphosphodiester backbones" Annu.Rev.Biophys.Biomol.Struct. 24 (1995) 167-183
Hyrup, B. and Nielsen, P.E. "Peptide Nucleic Acids (PNA): Synthesis , Properties and Potential Applications" Bioorg. Med. . 4 (1996) 5-23
Mesmaeker, A.D., Airman, K.-H., Waldner, A. and Wendeborn, S. "Backbone modifications in oligonucleotides and peptide nucleic acid systems" Cun. Opin. Struct. Biol. 5 (1995) 343- 355
Noble, et al. "Impact on Biophysical Parameters on the Biological Assessment of Peptide Nucleic Acids, Antisense Inhibitors of Gene Expression" Drag.Develop.Res. 34 (1995) 184- 195
Dueholm, K.L. and Nielsen, P.E. "Chemistry, properties, and applications of PNA (Peptide Nucleic Acid)" New J. Chem. 21 (1997) 19-31
Knudsen and Nielsen "Application of Peptide Nucleic Acid in Cancer Therapy" Anti-Cancer Drug 8 (1997) 113-118
Nielsen, P.E. "Design of Sequence-Specific DNA-Binding Ligands" Chem. Eur. J. 3 (1997) 505-508
Corey "Peptide nucleic acids: expanding the scope of nucleic acid recognition" TIBTECH 15 (1997) 224-229
Nielsen, P.E. and 0rum, H. "Peptide nucleic acid (PNA), a new molecular tool." In Molecular Biology: Cunent Innovations and Future Trends, Part2. Horizon Scientific Press, (1995) 73- 89
Nielsen, P.E. and Haaima, G. "Peptide nucleic acid (PNA). A DNA mimic with a pseudopeptide backbone" Chem. Soc. Rev. (1997) 73-78
0rum, H., Kessler, C. and Koch, T. "Peptide Nucleic Acid" Nucleic Acid Amplification Technologies: Application to Disease Diagnostics (1997) 29-48 Wittung, P., Nielsen, P. and Norden, B. "Recognition of double-stranded DNA by peptide nucleic acid" Nucleosid. Nucleotid. 16 (1997) 599-602
Weisz, K. "Polyamides as artificial regulators of gene expression" Angew. Chem. Int. Ed. Eng 36 (1997) 2592-2594
Nielsen, P.E. "Structural and Biological Properties of Peptide Nucleic Acid (Pna)" Pure & Applied Chemistry 70 (1998) 105-110
Nielsen, P.E. "Sequence-specific recognition of double-stranded DNA by peptide nucleic acids" Advances in DNA Sequence-Specific Agents 3 (1998) 267-278
Nielsen "Antisense Properties of Peptide Nucleic Acid" Handbook of Experimental Pharmacology 131 (1998) 545-560
Nielsen "Peptide Nucleic Acids" Science and Medicine (1998) 48-55
Uhlmann, E. "Peptide nucleic acids (PNA) and PNA-DNA chimeras: from high binding affinity towards biological function"Biol Chem 379 (1998) 1045-52
Wang "DNA biosensors based on peptide nucleic acid (PNA) recognition layers. A review" Biosens Bioelectron 13 (1998) 757-62
Uhlmann, E., Peyman, A., Breipohl, G. and Will, D.W. "PNA: Synthetic polyamide nucleic acids with unusual binding properties" Angewandte Chemie-International Edition 37 (1998)
2797-2823
Nielsen, P.E. "Applications of peptide nucleic acids" Curr Opin Biotechnol 10 (1999) 71-75
Bakhtiar, R. "Peptide nucleic acids: deoxyribonucleic acid mimics with a peptide backbone" Biochem. Educ 26 (1998) 277-280
Lazurkin, Y.S. "Stability and specificity of triplexes formed by peptide nucleic acid with DNA" Mol. Biol. 33 (1999) 79-83
Nielsen and Egholm "Peptide Nucleic Acids: Protocols and Applications" (1999) 266 pp.
Eldrup and Nielsen "Peptide nucleic acids: potential as antisense and antigene drugs" Adv. Amino Acid Mimetics Peptidomimetics 2 (1999) 221-245 Bentin, T. and Nielsen, P.E. "Triplexes involving PNA" Triple Helix Form. Oligonucleotides (1999) 245-255
Falkiewicz, B. "Peptide nucleic acids and their structural modifications" Acta Biochim. Pol. 46 (1999) 509-529.
The following references are descriptions of the use of PNAs in anay-based detection, including means for attaching the PNA probes to the solid surface.
Hoffmann, R., et al. "Low scale multiple anay synthesis and DNA hybridization of peptide nucleic acids" Pept. Proc Am. Pept. Symp., 15th (1999) 233-234
Matysiak, S., Hauser, N.C., Wurtz, S. and Hoheisel, J.D. "Improved solid supports and spacer/linker systems for the synthesis of spatially addressable PNA-libraries" Nucleosides Nucleotides 18 (1999) 1289-1291.
5.2 ADDITIONAL EMBODIMENTS
The drawings illustrate various specific embodiments of an apparatus and sample using second or higher harmonic, sum or difference frequency generation.
Figure 1 illustrates an embodiment wherein second harmonic light is generated by reflecting incident fundamental light from the surface. Light source 5 provides the fundamental light necessary to generate second harmonic light at the sample. Typically this will be a picosecond or femtosecond laser, either wavelength-tunable or not tunable, and commercially available. Light at the fundamental frequency (ω) exits the laser and its polarization is selected using, for example a half-wave plate 10 appropriate to the frequency and intensity of the light (eg., available from Melles Griot, Oriel or Newport Coφ.). The beam is then focused by lens 15 and passes through a pass filter 20 designed to pass the fundamental light but block the nonlinear light (eg., second harmonic). This filter is used to prevent back-reflection of the second harmonic beam into the laser cavity which can cause disturbances in the lasing properties. The beam is reflected from a minor 25 and impinges at a specific location and with a specific angle θ on the surface. The minor 25 can be scanned if required using a galvanometer-controlled minor scanner, a rotating polygonal minor scanner, a Bragg diffractor, acousto-optic deflector, or other means known in the art to allow control of a minor's position. The sample surface 30 can be mounted on an x-y translation stage 35 (computer controlled) to select a specific location on the surface for generation of the second harmonic beam. The surface can be glass, plastic, silicon or any other solid surface that reflects the fundamental or second harmonic beams. The sample surface can be enclosed and the surface in contact with liquid. Furthermore, the sample 30 can be fed or drained by microcapiUary or other liquid-transporting channels (not shown), pumps or electrophoretic elements, and these devices can be computer-controlled. The fundamental and the second harmonic outgoing beams (at specific angles with respect to the surface, i.e. θι - they are typically nearly colinear in direction) then reflected from the surface and the fundamental is filtered using a pass-filter 45 for the second harmonic beam, leaving only the harmonic beam (2ω). The second harmonic is reflected from minor 40, its polarization selected if necessary by polarizing optic 50, and is focused using a lens 55 onto a detector 60. The lenses 15 and 55 can also be any combination of lenses known in the art for focusing or beam shaping. If required, a monochromator 60 can also be used to select a specific wavelength within the spectral band of the second harmonic beam. The detector can be a photomultiplier tube, a CCD anay, or any other detector device known in the art for high sensitivity. For instance, a photomultiplier tube operated in single-photon counting mode can be used. At the detector, the light generates a voltage proportional to its intensity. Data is recorded for each location on the anay surface as it is translated by the stage, scanned (or a combination thereof) and an image is built up of the second harmonic intensity generated from each region on the surface.
Applicant envisions the use of sum or difference frequencies, where an apparatus set- up similar to Fig. 1 could be used, with the single light source 5 replaced by two light sources with two fundamental light beams at frequencies ωl5 and ω2. The sum or difference frequency (Ω) would then be Ω = (0\ ± ω2. In the case where the sample surfaces are anays comprised of discrete elements, a single element or more than one in parallel can be addressed with the fundamental light. Furthermore, detection can be made on a single element or many in parallel depending on the specific apparatus set-up.
Figure 2 illustrates an embodiment in which total internal reflection (evanescent wave generation) is used to generate the second harmonic light. Fundamental light (ω) is directed on to the surface of a prism element 70. The beam is refracted at position (a) and passes through the prism, through an index matching film 75 and impinges on substrate 80. Prism 70 and substrate 80 are made of optically transparent materials and are preferably of the same type. Prism 70 can be a Dove prism or any other element which can support evanescent fields (eg., waveguides, fibers and thin metallic films). The refractive index matching film 75 can be an oil, but is preferably a compressible optical polymer such as those disclosed by Sjodin, "Optical interface means", PCT publication WO 90/05317, 1990. The prism 75 and the substrate 80 can also be a unitary, integral piece made of the same material (i.e, without the index matching film). An evanescent wave is generated at the interface between 80 and the medium in sample compartment 85 according to the indices of refraction in 80 and 85 and the angle of incidence of the beam at their interface. The electric field amplitude decays exponentially away from the substrate surface with a 1/e length ranging from nanometers to microns depending on several factors, including the surface electric potential, the counterion density in the sample compartment (if any). The sample compartment can be filled with air, a gas, or a liquid such as a solution or water. The 'x' marks on the surface of 80 facing the sample compartment emphasize that the sample of interest (eg., fabricated probes) are placed on this side. Substrate 80 can be a 'chip' which can be slid out between 75 and 85, allowing for measurement of different substrates. Element 90 in the drawing refers to a port in the sample compartment for drawing liquid or gases in and out of the compartment, for instance by pumps, electrostatic means, etc. The entire sample assembly can be mounted on an x-y translation stage 95 if necessary.
Figure 3 illustrates an embodiment in which a slab-dielectric waveguide is used to deliver the fundamental light to the sample surface (the light beams are generated, directed and detected as in Drawing I with elements 1-5 and 8-13). A parallel plate or dielectric waveguide can be used to couple the fundamental light into a waveguide propagating mode. The drawing shows two slabs (110 and 115) and region (120). If the indices of refraction of slab 115 and region 120 are less than the index of refraction of the light (for both fundamental and second harmonic), a waveguiding mode can be developed. This mode produces multiple internal reflections at the substrate which can be used to increase the amount of second harmonic light generated by the interface. The fundamental beam 100 can be coupled into the waveguide 110 using a diffraction grating 105 scribed or embossed on the top surface of the waveguide, for example. The fundamental is propagated along the length of the waveguide and makes multiple total internal reflections at the top and bottom surfaces. The 'x' marks on substrate 110 denote the surface sample to be measured (i.e., containing the probes). If this interface generates significantly more second harmonic light than the interface between materials 110 and 115, the light intensity can be neglected. For example, if SH-labeled targets are bound to immobilized probes at the 'x' locations and the atomic structure at the interface between 110 and 115 is epitaxially matched, the interface 110/120 will generate much more second harmonic light than the interface 110/115.
In a specific embodiment, a planar waveguide structure 110 is used for the solid substrate (Figure 3). In this embodiment, a thin layer of high index of refraction material 115 (the waveguide), such as TiO2 or Ta 2O5, is deposited on top of the substrate 110
(typically glass). A thin diffraction grating 115 is scribed into this waveguide and light from the laser 100 is coupled using this grating into the waveguide. Second harmonic light can be collected using lenses and filters and detected with either a PMT-type device or a CCD camera.
Figs. 4A-C illustrate an embodiment of a flow cell for caπying out probe-target reactions. The flow cell is 3220 is shown in detail. Fig. 4A is a front view, Fig. 4B is a cross sectional view, and Fig. 4C is a back view of the cavity. Referring to Fig. 4A, flow cell 3220 includes a cavity 3235 on a surface 4202 thereon. The depth of the cavity, for example, may be between about 10 and 1500 .mu.m, but other depths may be used. Typically, the surface area of the cavity is greater than the size of the probe sample, which may be about 13 x 13 mm. Inlet port 4220 and outlet port 4230 communicate with the cavity, h some embodiments, the ports may have a diameter of about 300 to 400 .mu.m and are coupled to a refrigerated circulating bath via tubes 4221 and 4231, respectively, for controlling temperature in the cavity. The refrigerated bath circulates water at a specified temperature into and through the cavity.
A plurality of slots 4208 may be formed around the cavity to thermally isolate it from the rest of the flow cell body. Because the thermal mass of the flow cell is reduced, the temperature within the cavity is more efficiently and accurately controlled.
In some embodiments, a panel 4205 having a substantially flat surface divides the cavity into two subcavities. Panel 4205, for example, may be a light absoφtive glass such as an RG1000 nm long pass filter. The high absorbance of the RG1000 glass across the visible spectrum (surface emissivity of RG1000 is not detectable at any wavelengths below 700 nm) substantially suppresses any background luminescence that may be excited by the incident wavelength. The polished flat surface of the light-absorbing glass also reduces scattering of incident light, lessening the burden of filtering stray light at the incident wavelength. The glass also provides a durable medium for subdividing the cavity since it is relatively immune to conosion in the high salt environment common in DNA hybridization experiments or other chemical reactions.
Panel 4205 may be mounted to the flow cell by a plurality of screws, clips, RTV silicone cement, or other adhesives. Referring to FIG. 4B, subcavity 4260, which contains inlet port 4220 and outlet port 4230, is sealed by panel 4205. Accordingly, water from the refrigerated bath is isolated from cavity 3235. This design provides separate cavities for conducting chemical reaction and controlling temperature. Since the cavity for controlling temperature is directly below the reaction cavity, the temperature parameter of the reaction is controlled more effectively.
Substrate 130 is mated to surface 4202 and seals cavity 3235. Preferably, the probe array on the substrate is contained in cavity 3235 when the substrate is mated to the flow cell, hi some embodiments, an O-ring 4480 or other sealing material may be provided to improve mating between the substrate and flow cell. Optionally, edge 4206 of panel 4205 is beveled to allow for the use of a larger seal cross section to improve mating without increasing the volume of the cavity. In some instances, it is desirable to maintain the cavity volume as small as possible so as to control reaction parameters, such as temperature or concentration of chemicals more accurately. In additional, waste may be reduced since smaller volume requires smaller amount of material to perform the experiment.
Referring back to FIG. 4A, a groove 4211 is optionally formed on surface 4202. The groove, for example, may be about 2 mm deep and 2 mm wide. In one embodiment, groove 4211 is covered by the substrate when it is mounted on surface 4202. The groove communicates with channel 4213 and vacuum fitting 4212 which is connected to a vacuum pump. The vacuum pump creates a vacuum in the groove that causes the substrate to adhere to surface 4202. Optionally, one or more gaskets may be provided to improve the sealing between the flow cell and substrate.
FIG. 4D illustrates a specific technique for mating the substrate to the flow cell. When mounted to the flow cell, a panel 4290 exerts a force that is sufficient to immobilize substrate 130 located therebetween. Panel 4290, for example, may be mounted by a plurality of screws 4291, clips, clamps, pins, or other mounting devices. In some embodiments, panel 4290 includes an opening 4295 for exposing the sample to the incident light. Opening 4295 may optionally be covered with a glass or other substantially transparent or translucent materials. Alternatively, panel 4290 may be composed of a substantially transparent or translucent material.
In reference to FIG. 4A, panel 4205 includes ports 4270 and 4280 that communicate with subcavity 3235. A tube 4271 is connected to port 4270 and a tube 4281 is connected to port 4280. Tubes 4271 and 4281 are inserted through tubes 4221 and 4231, respectively, by connectors 4222. Connectors 4222, for example, may be T-connectors, each having a seal 4225 located at opening 4223. Seal 4225 prevents the water from the refrigerated bath from leaking out through the connector. It will be understood that other configurations, such as providing additional ports similar to ports 4220 and 4230, may be employed.
Tubes 4271 and 4281 allow selected fluids to be introduced into or circulated through the cavity. In some embodiments, tubes 4271 and 4281 may be connected to a pump for circulating fluids through the cavity. In one embodiment, tubes 4271 and 4281 are connected to an agitation system that agitates and circulates fluids through the cavity.
Referring to FIG. 4C, a groove 4215 is optionally formed on the surface 4203 of the flow cell. The dimensions of groove, for example, may be about 2 mm deep and 2 mm wide. According to one embodiment, surface 4203 is mated to the translation stage. Groove 4211 is covered by the translation stage when the flow cell is mated thereto. Groove 4215 communicates with channel 4217 and vacuum fitting 4216 which is connected to a vacuum pump. The pump creates a vacuum in groove 4215 and causes the surface 4203 to adhere to the translation stage. Optionally, additional grooves may be formed to increase the mating force. Alternatively, the flow cell may be mounted on the translation stage by screws, clips, pins, various types of adhesives, or other fastening techniques.
In a further specific embodiment, a suspension of beads, cells, liposomes or other objects comprise the probes (130) as shown in Figures 5A-C. The scattered nonlinear light from such a sample - eg., an isotropic sample in which each individual beads or other objects are about a coherence length or farther apart - is generated in various directions with some distribution in intensity. Fundamental light is transmitted through the suspension (130) and the nonlinear radiation collected. A number of modes of collecting the scattered nonlinear light is available. For example, collection of the second harmonic can be in the forward direction (A), at a right angle to the fundamental light (B), or using an integrating sphere approach (C). Part C shows an integrating sphere 165 with the sample 150 placed inside. Fundamental light (145) enters the entrance port (170), passes through the sample (150), undergoes a reflection at the sphere wall, and is stopped by baffle (175). The scattered second harmonic light is collected from the sphere surface through exit port (155) and coupled out of the sphere by a fiber optic line (160). Cells are a convenient and natural system of study for conformational changes in receptors, cell surface molecules and other biological components. Beads can support phospholipid bilayers (eg., with membrane proteins) or probes such as proteins or nucleic acids can be attached to their surface. The beads provide a large amount of distributed surface area in the sample and can be a useful alternative to planar surface geometries, especially when the fundamental and nonlinear light is used in the transmission mode.
hi a specific embodiment (Figure 6), the excitation light is tranformed from a pointlike shape into some other shape using various optics. For instance, the point-like beam shape of the fundamental beam can be transformed into a line shape, useful for scanning the sample surface. However, because the intensity of the nonlinear beam depends on, among other factors, the intensity of the fundamental (typically a quadratic dependence on the fundamental intensity), this transformation will result in less nonlinear light intensity generated at a given location. To generate a line-shape in the fundamental (which can typically be a round point of - 2 mm diameter), one can direct the fundamental beam into a microscope objective which has a magnification power of about 10 followed by a 150 mm achromat to coUimate the beam as well known in the prior art and as disclosed in detail in U.S. Pat. No. 5,834,758. As shown in Figure 6, the fundamental light 180 is a beam of typically 2-3 mm diameter. This beam is directed through a microscope objective 185. The objective, which has a magnification power of 10, expands the beam to about 30 mm. The beam then passes through a lens 190. The lens, which can be a 150 mm achromat, collimates the beam. Typically, the radial intensity of the expanded collimated beam has a Gaussian profile. To minimize intensity variations in the beam, a mask 195 can be inserted after lens 190 to mask the top and bottom of the beam, thereby passing only the central portion of the beam, h one embodiment, the mask passes a horizontal band that is about 7.5 mm. Thereafter, the beam passes through a cylindrical lens 200 having a horizontal cylinder axis, which can be a 100 mm f.l. made by Melles Griot. The cylindrical lens expands the beam spot vertically. Alternatively, a hyperbolic lens can be used to expand the beam vertically while resulting in a flattened radial intensity distribution. From the cylindrical lens, the light passes through a lens 205. Optionally, a planar minor can be inserted after the cylindrical lens to reflect the excitation light toward lens 205. To achieve a beam height of about 15 mm, the ratio of the focal lengths of the cylindrical lens 200 and lens 205 is approximately 1 :2, thus magnifying the beam to about 15 mm. Lens 205, which in some embodiments is a 80 mm achromat, focuses the light to a line of about 15 mm x 50 microns at the sample surface 210.
In a specific embodiment shown in Figures 7A-B, probes are patterned in a two- dimensional anay (A, top view of anay on surface) where each region on the surface - {1,35} in this example — can be a different oligonucleotide or protein sequence (or a combination of the same and different sequences). Part B shows a side-view of the sample surface (220) in a well (215) containing the targets (225) shown here as protein objects with second-harmonic-active labels (X) attached. The well can hold liquid or buffer and serves to physically separate the contents of the well from other parts of the substrate or other elements in a substrate anay. The fundamental light can be multiplexed and each resultant beam can be guided by individual minors to simultaneously scan different lines or regions within the anay, thus increasing even further the potential of the technique for high-throughput studies.
In a specific embodiment, the method of Levicky et al. "Using Self- Assembly to Control the Structure of DNA Monolayers on Gold: A Neutron Reflectivity Study," Journal of the American Chemical Society 120: 9787-9792 (1998), or the method of Chrisey et al, "Covalent Attachment of Synthetic DNA to Self- Assembled Monolayer Films", Nucleic Acids Research 24, 3031, (1996), is used to attach the probe DNA to the substrate. In the method of Chrisey et al, as illustrated in Figure 8, a fused silica or oxidized silicon substrate is used (230) and derivatized with N-(2-aminoethyl)-3-aminopropyltrimethoxysilane (EDA) (235). In one embodiment, the EDA-modified surface is then treated with the heterobifunctional crosslinker (SMPB), whose succinimide ester moiety reacts with the primary amino group of EDA (240). A thiol-DΝA oligomer subsequently (245) of base-pair sequence (xzzy) (where 'xzzy' represents the entire sequence) reacts with the maleimide portion of the SMPB crosslinker, to yield the covalently bound species shown (250).
h a specific embodiment, DΝA oligo probes are attached to a substrate, e.g. in a microarray format. DΝA targets labeled with nonlinear active moieties are allowed to react from solution with these surface-attached probes. There will be specific (complementary) hybridization between probes and targets depending on sequence, and there will be some degree of non-specific binding of the targets to regions between the patterned probes (i.e., where there is no DNA probe). Non-bound targets are washed away. Application of an external electric field across the surface (for example, using a glass or SiO2 surface on top of an electrode for the DNA probe attachement and a second electrode in solution) leads to further alignment of the nonlinear-active labels - however, the labels associated with non- specifically bound targets will not be able to align as fully as those associated with hybridized target oligos because there is less ordering of the targets that are bound in a non-specific manner and less freedom of motion of their attached labels. By contast, probes can be attached to the surface in ordered ways (e.g., through the use of photolithography) and the hybridized targets will be less tangled, with their labeled ends pointing into solution, allowing more freedom to orient with the applied field. The result is a further discrimination in signal between specific and non-specific targets through measurement of physical properties of the nonlinear optical radiation (e.g., intensity of second harmonic light).
In a specific embodiment, elements in the surface anay are physically separated as illustrated in Figure 9, allowing for different targets, target solutions, etc. to be added selectively to any or all of the elements. Part (A) is a top-view of the substrate (255) with partitions or walls (260) separating the different well regions - in this example, 16 wells. Part (B) shows a side-view of a well (265) with attached probes (270). Such anays are commonly found in the art, such as the 96-well plates, etc. and are commercially available (Fisher Scientific, Inc. etc.)
In a specific embodiment, a glass substrate surface can be coated with a layer of a reflective metal such as silver. The metallic layer will increase nonlinear optical generation and collection. Biomolecules or other particles can be attached to derivatized layers built on top of the metal. For instance, the metal can be coated with a layer of silicon dioxide (SiO ), then with a layer of aminosilane such as 3-amino-octyl-trimethoxysilane. Oligonucleotides or polynucleotides can then be attached to the aminosilane layer using linkers which connect the 3' or 5' end of the oligo to the amine group. Alternatively, the oligos or polynucleotides can be adsorbed to the aminosilane layer. Figure 10 illustrates an embodiment of this type where a glass substrate (275) is derivatized with a Ag layer (280). A thin coat of SiO2 is then deposited on top of the silver layer (285) and derivatized with the aminosilane (290).
In a specific embodiment, nucleic acid or PNA microaπays can be obtained commercially or constructed according to public literature (eg., http://cmgm.stanford.edu pbrown/mguide/index.html). The surface chemistry to be used is that found in Chrisey et al, "Covalent Attachment of Synthetic DNA to Self- Assembled Monolayer Films", Nucleic Acids Research 24, 3031, (1996), in which oligonucleotides are attached to self-assembled monolayer silane films on fused silica slides. Silanization is accomplished via N-(2-aminoethyl)-3-aminopropyltrimethoxysilane.
hi other embodiments, oligonucleotides or PΝAs can be attached to the solid substrate via light-directed synthesis (S.A. Fodor, Science 277 (1997), 393) or via chemical synthesis (e.g., Chrisey et al, "Covalent Attachment of Synthetic DΝA to Self-Assembled Monolayer Films", Nucleic Acids Research 24, 3031, (1996)).
In stilll other embodiments, surfaces or microaπays microanays of oligonucleotides or PNAs can be obtained commercially or constructed according to public literature (eg., http ://cmgm. Stanford, edu/pbrown/mguide/index.html) .
DNA microarrays can be obtained commercially or constructed, for example, according to public literature (e.g., http://cmgm.stanford.edu/pbrown/mguide/index.html). The surface chemistry preferably to be used is that found in Chrisey et al. , "Covalent Attachment of Synthetic DNA to Self- Assembled Monolayer Films", Nucleic Acids Research 24, 3031, (1996), in which oligonucleotides are attached to self-assembled monolayer silane films on fused silica slides. Silanization is done via N-(2-aminoethyι)-3- aminopropyltrimethoxysilane.and Hoheisel, J.D. "Improved solid supports and spacer/linker systems for the synthesis of spatially addressable PΝA-libraries" Nucleosides Nucleotides 18 (1999) 1289-1291 on glass or silica. The buffer or solution in contact with the PNA oligonucleotides can be chosen from a range of those known in the art. Hybridization and wash solutions are found in the art. For example, the web site: cmgm.stanford.edu/pbrown/protocols gives detailed instructions for probe-target hybridization.
A specific embodiment of the invention is the detection of targets binding or hybridizing to probes patterned in a microanay or array format on a substrate. For example, one of the problems with fluorescence-based methodology with DNA microanays is that the ratio of signal to background (specific to non-specific binding - often defined in the art as: [Signal - Background]/ [Standard Dev.(Background)] ) is quite low (3:1 - 5:1). Using a surface-selective nonlinear optical technique — which is sensitive to the net orientation of a label (surface density of oriented or partially oriented labels) - one can discriminate specific or non-specifically bound target DNA with more precision. This is partly because DNA probes (if they are attached in some specific way to the surface) will tend to align the complementary target DNAs (and thus, their nonlinear active labels). But, by applying an external electric field across the surface, one can further discriminate between specific and non-specific bound targets because the specifically bound targets' labels will be more free to orient in the electric field (increasing the measured nonlinear active signal, for instance- ie., the intensity of measured light) than the labels associated with the non-specifically bound target DNA. This is because the non-specific DNA will often form a tangled film, so that very little if any labels within the film will have freedom of motion to orient in the electric field.
Microanays can be mounted on an x-y translation stage and driven by personal computer (PC control) using a motorized translator (acquired from Oriel, h e) or using one of the many procedures in the art (e.g., V.G. Cheung et al., "Making and reading microanays", Nature Genetics (Suppl.), 1999, 21: 15-19).
In a specific embodiment, the invention can be used for studying binding processes between other biological components: cells with viruses; viruses with receptors (e.g., in membranes or purified), protein-protein interactions; protein-ligand; cell-ligand; protein- drugs, nucleic acid-drugs, cell-small molecule; cell-nucleic acid; peptide-cell, oligo or polynucleotides, virus-cell, protein-small molecule, etc. Biomimetic membranes such as phospholipid supported bilayers (eg., egg phosphatidylcholine) can also be used and are particularly useful when studies comprise membrane proteins as probes.
In an embodiment, the invention can be used for drug screening or high-throughput screening where a candidate drug is tested for its effect on probe-target binding, i.e., to reduce or enhance probe-target binding. In other cases, for example, a drug can be tested for efficacy by its ability to bind to a receptor or other molecule on the surface of a biological cell.
In a specific embodiment, the properties of a drug, small molecule or other moiety is examined for its effect on the properties or state of an ion channel - upon binding to it directly, or to a secondary messenger receptor in a cell membrane for example. An indicator is used to optically detect changes in the cell surface potential and charge density (transiently if necessary) if the drug or other molecule (e.g., small molecule, agonist, antagonist, partial agonist, etc.) modulates the ion channel properties (e.g., opens, closes or blocks ion channels). An applied electric field can be used to examine this probe-target reaction as a function of transmembrane electric potential. For example, one can study the binding of a drug to a G-coupled protein receptor using the modulation in associated ion channel properties it produces as a result of a binding interaction.
In an alternate embodiment, the invention is used for drug screening or high- throughput screening where a candidate drug is tested for its ability to activate or inhibit a probe (e.g., a receptor, ion channel protein, etc.). A drug candidate is tested for its ability to activate a conformational change in a probe - in this case, one seeks agonists of the probe. In another case, compounds that are potential inhibitors of an agonist to a receptor are screened by testing for removal of a conformational change induced by the agonist when the receptor and agonist are also in the presence of an inhibitor candidate (the agonist can be a natural molecule, synthetic, etc.).
hi this alternative embodiment, the properties or state of a voltage-gated or ligand- gated ion channel in a cell or liposome as a function of applied electric field can be measured using the present invention. The cells can be in suspension (e.g., in a buffer) or attached to some surface. An electric field is applied across the cells using a sandwich structure of indium tin oxide electrodes of the type, for example, depicted in Figure 17. An indicator dye (a substantially membrane-impermeant dye such as PyMPO, for example) is placed in the medium (e.g, buffer) which immerses the cells. The orientation of the dye at the cell surface produces a background signal in some physical property of the nonlinear radiation (e.g., intensity); this signal is modulated as ions flow into or out of ion channels as a function of applied electric field, drugs, second messenger signalling, etc. An applied electric field across the sample of cells (in the presence or absence of other stimuli of the ion channels - e.g., drugs, second messengers, ligands, neurotransmitters, small molecules, etc.) will increase the transmembrane potential across some ion channels and decrease it across others, depending on the orientation of the individual ion channel with respect to the applied field - the effect of the applied electric field will be orientationally averaged on the ion channels in the cell membrane will occur. Thus, some ion channels will be hypeφolarized and some will be depolarized leading to changes in the nonlinear optical response of the indicator dyes — e.g., a permanent or transient change in intensity, wavelength, etc. of the nonlinear optical radiation. Thus, the present invention can be used to detect the properties of an ion channel as a function of applied electric field - analogous to the control one has in electrophysiological (e.g., patch clamping) techniques.
In a specific embodiment, the nonlinear optical, surface-selective apparatus can comprise a unit without the light excitation source (e.g., with sample compartment, filters, detectors, monochromator, computer interface, software, or other parts) so that the user can supply his own excitation source and adapt its use to the methods described herein.
Other specific embodiments of the invention's use with surface-attached biological components include the surface attacment of cells, proteins, DNA, etc. to a substrate. Many methods exist in the art for coupling biological components (eg., nucleic acid, protein and cells) to solid supports or substrates. A wide degree of flexibility may be used in providing the means by which the anays are created. They can comprise, for example, covalent or noncovalent coupling to the substrate or surface directly, to a chemically derivatized substrate, to an intermediate layer of some kind (e.g., self-assembled monolayer, a hydrogel or other bio- compatible layer known in the art). The identity of the probes (e.g., protein structure or oligonucleotide sequence) can vary from site to site across the solid surface, or the same probe can uniformly cover the surface. Targets can be of a single identity or a combination of targets with different identities. The anays can be prepared in variety of ways including,, but not limited to, ink-jet printing, photolithography, micro-contact printing, or any other manner known to one skilled in the art of fabricating them.
A specific embodiment of the present invention can also be used with cells containing ion channel proteins or receptors in the cell membranes (e.g., oocytes with expressed ion channel proteins). Cells can be suspended in some medium, a buffer medium for example. Indicators can also be suspended in the medium. Irradiation of the suspension (in transmission mode) with a fundamental beam leads to generation of the nonlinear optical signal at the cell-medium interface. The ion channel can be of the ligand-gated type. A background nonlinear optical signal is measured at time to; ligand is added to the suspension which serves to modulate the ion channel state or its properties (e.g., opens or closes the ion channel, increases or decreases the ionic permeability of the channel, etc.) which, in turn, leads to a change in the cellular surface electric potential and thus a change in the properties (e.g., intensity) of the nonlinear optical radiation generated near the surface by water molecules, solvent molecules or indicators. The ligand binding to a receptor can be measured quantitatively by following the intensity of nonlinear optical radiation generated as a function of ligand concentration; furthermore, the effect can be monitored in the presence of drug candidates which may, for instance, block or otherwise change the ligand-receptor binding interaction; the binding process can also be measured in real-time to dynamically resolve opening or closing of ion channels. In general, any component can be added to the medium to study its effect on the ligand-receptor interaction using the surface-selective nonlinear optical method described herein.
In a specific embodiment, bead-based fiber-optic arrays can be used (ref. 34) in which light beams (eg., fundamental and second harmonic) travel via total internal reflection along the path of the fiber. The fundamental light is coupled into the bundle or individual optical fibers and second harmonic light is generated at the tip surface and collected back through the fiber. Figures 11 A-B illustrate a fiber-optic bundle array. Part (A) shows a bundle of fiber optic cables (295) with wells at the distals ends for placement of beads (300). Part (B) shows a close-up view of a single optical fiber. Fundamental light travels (ω) toward the distal end with the bead (305). Some fundamental light is scattered back from the bead along with second harmonic light (2ω) and travels back through the fiber to the proximal end where an optical train and detection system (not shown) separates the fundamental radiation from the second harmonic radiation. Bead (310) is covered with probes.
In a specific embodiment, green fluorescent protein (GFP) or nonlinear-active mutants thereof are used to label proteins in- vivo via mutagenesis according to procedures well known in the art. The GFP or mutants thereof are second-harmonic active and can serve as a built-in label of proteins. For example: a cell membrane receptor can be labeled with GFP via mutagenesis. Cells containing this GFP-tagged receptor produce some background second harmonic light when illuminated with a fundamental beam in a surface-selective nonlinear optical technique. When ligands or other compounds which bind to the receptor and induce activation - and a concomitant conformational change - the intensity and/or spectrum and/or time-course of the second harmonic light will change (due, for example, to a change in overall net orientation of the GFP protein) as the GFP label moves slightly due to the conformational change on the receptor. The change in measured nonlinear optical properties are thus conelated with conformational change and ligand binding.
The technique can be used to time-resolve probe-target binding reactions or their effects, using but not limited to the following alternative embodiments of the present invention: gating the fundamental beam incident on the sample, gating the detection, gating the fundamental light, pulsing or gating the electric field or stop-flow mixing of the probes and targets (or agonists, antagonists or other drugs or molecules which modulate the probe- target reactions).
In a specific embodiment, the detector (65) of the nonlinear radiation in Figure 1 is a photomultiplier tube operated in single-photon counting mode. Photocurrent pulses can be voltage converted, amplified, subjected to discrimination using a Model SR445 Fast Preamplifier and Model SR 400 Discriminator (supplied by Stanford Research Systems, Inc.) and then sent to a counter (Model 3615 Hex Sealer supplied by Kinetic Systems). Photon counter gating and galvo control through a DAC output (Model 3112, 12-Bit DAC supplied by Kinetic Systems) can be synchronized using a digital delay/pulse generator (Model
DG535 supplied by Stanford Research Systems, Inc.). Communication with a PC computer 29 can be accomplished using a parallel register (Model PR-604 supplied by DSP Technologies, Inc.), a CAMAC controller card (Model 6002, supplied by DSP Technologies, hie.) and a PC adapter card (Model PC-004 supplied by DSP Technologies, Inc.).
In a specific embodiment, a bandpass, notch, or color filter is placed in either or all of the beam paths (eg., fundamental, second harmonic, etc.) allowing, for example, for a wider spectral bandwidth or more light throughput.
hi a specific embodiment, an interference, notch-pass, bandpass, reflecting, or absorbant filter can be used in place of the filters in the figures in order to either pass or block the fundamental or nonlinear optical beams.
According to another embodiment, detection of the nonlinear optical light is achieved using a charge coupled detector (CCD) in place of a photomultiplier tube or other photodetector. The CCD subsystem communicates with and is controlled by a data acquisition board installed in a computer. Data acquisition board may be of the type that is well known in the art such as a CIO-DAS16/Jr manufactured by Computer Boards hie The data acquisition board and CCD subsystem, for example, may operate in the following manner. The data acquisition board controls the CCD integration period by sending a clock signal to the CCD subsystem. In one embodiment, the CCD subsystem sets the CCD integration period at 4096 clock periods, by changing the clock rate, the actual time in which the CCD integrates data can be manipulated. During an integration period, each photodiode accumulates a charge proportional to the amount of light that reaches it. Upon termination of the integration period, the charges are transfened to the CCD's shift registers and a new integration period commences. The shift registers store the charges as voltages which represent the light pattern incident on the CCD anay. The voltages are then transmitted at the clock rate to the data acquisition board, where they are digitized and stored in the computer's memory. In this manner, a strip of the sample is imaged during each integration period. Thereafter, a subsequent row is integrated until the sample is completely scanned.
In a specific embodiment, the nonlinear spectrum of a sample is measured by measuring the nonlinear radiation (e.g., second harmonic radiation) at two or more spectral points or bands, using a monochromator, filter or other wavelength-selecting device to accomplish this.
In a specific embodiment, a monochromator (60) can be placed before the detecting element in the device, in order to spectrally resolve the nonlinear optical radiation (Figure 1).
In a specific embodiment, imaging techniques described in the art (Peleg et al, "Nonlinear optical measurement of membrane potential around single molecules at selected cellular sites," Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. V. 96, 1999, 6700-6704, or Campagnola et al, "High- resolution nonlinear optical imaging of live cells by second harmonic generation," Biophysical Journal 77 (6), 3341-3349 (1999), can be perfonned using SHG-labeled components (such as labeled ligands or receptors) instead of the membrane-intercalating dyes used in the art. These imaging techniques can be used to image solid surfaces, cell surfaces or other interface using SHG-labeled components.
In a specific embodiment, channels (or microfluid) channels can be used to introduce the components into the sample cell via positive displacement, pumping, electrophoretic means or other means known in the art for manipulating the flow of components into and out of a reaction chamber.
In a specific embodiment, the apparatus can be assembled into a user-closed product with a user-controlled interface (an LED panel, for example, or PC-based software) with the option of inserting and removing disposable substrates (e.g., biochips) with the attached probes.
In a specific embodiment, a photodiode, avalanche photodiode or other photoelectric detector (65) in Figure 1 is used as the light detection means. In a specific embodiment, a surface anay can be used that is in a fixed position and the incident light beam scanned across the surface using methods well known in the art, such as a galvanometer minor or a polygonal minor.
A specific embodiment comprises a scanning or imaging method where a physical property of the nonlinear radiation is measured as function of position (x,y,z) in a sample. The scanning method can comprise a combination of both stage translation (x-y) and beam scanning, wherein, for example, the latter controls the incident position of the fundamental beam on the array surface.
In a specific embodiment, a stop-flow mixing chamber is used to rapidly mix the components in the sample cell.
hi a specific embodiment, the proportionality constant (calibration curve of intensity of second harmonic light vs. concentration of targets bound to attached probes) is determined by measuring the concentration of targets using another method such as radiolabeling or fluorescence labels of the targets. Once the calibration curve is known, for a given probe and target type (e.g., cDNA, RNA, size of oligos, etc.), the concentration of bound target is determined using this relation and the measured second harmonic intensity. This embodiment can be generalized to any other nonlinear light beam emanating from the sample, including third harmonic, sum or difference frequency light.
In a specific embodiment, the nonlinear optical, surface-selective apparatus can comprise a unit without the light excitation source (e.g., with sample compartment, filters, detectors, monochromator, computer interface, software, or other parts) so that the user can supply his own excitation source and adapt its use to the methods described herein.
In a specific embodiment, measurable information can be recorded in real time.
Various configurations of an apparatus using the surface-selective nonlinear optical technique in the present invention.
The apparatus for detection of the probe-target reactions or their effects can assume a variety of configurations. In its most simple form, the apparatus will comprise the following: i) a source of the fundamental light ii) a detector for measuring the intensity of the second harmonic or other nonlinear optical beams. A wide degree of flexibility is expected in the design of the apparatus including, but not limited to, the source of the fundamental light, the optical train necessary to control, focus, scan or direct the fundamental and nonlinear light beams, the design of the anay, the detection system, and the use of a grating or filters and collection optics. The mode of generation (inadiation) or collection can be varied including, for example, the use of evanescent wave (total internal reflection), planar wave guide, reflection or transmission geometries, optical cavity, fiber-optic, near-field illumination, confocal techniques or the use of a microcavity or integrating detection system. A number of art methods for scanning a microaπay on a solid surface are described. Examples include U.S. Pat. No.'s Trulson et al. (1998- relevant portions of which are incoφorated by reference herein), Trulson et al. (2000), Stem et al. (1997) and Sampas (2000). (2000- relevant portions of which are incoφorated by reference herein), Stem et al. (1997- relevant portions of which are incoφorated by reference herein) and Sampas (2000- relevant portions of which are incoφorated by reference herein). In a specific embodiment, a plurality of lasers and micro- controlled minors for adjusting the position of each beam on the surface can be used as in U.S. Pat. No. 6,121,983.
More elaborate versions of the apparatus will employ, for example: a monochromator (for wavelength selection), a pass-filter, color filter, interference or other spectral filter (for wavelength selection or to separate the fundamental(s) from the higher harmonics), one or more polarizing optics, a means of applying an electric field, one or more minors or lenses for directing and focusing the beams, computer control, software, etc.
The mode of delivering or generating the nonlinear optical light (e.g., SHG) can be based on one or more of the following means: TER. (Total internal reflection), Fiber optics (with or without attached beads), Transmission (fundamental passes through the sample), Reflection (fundamental is reflected from the sample), scanning imaging (allows one to scan a sample), confocal imaging or scanning, resonance cavity for power build-up, multiple-pass set-up.
Measured information can take the form of a vector which can include one or more of the following parameters: {intensity of light (typically converted to a photo voltage by a PMT or photodiode), wavelength of light (determined with a monochromator and or filters), time, substrate position (for anay samples, for instance, where different sub-samples are encoded as function of substrate location and the fundamental is directed to various (x,y) locations}. Two general configurations of the apparatus are: image scanning (imaging of a substrate - intensity, wavelength, etc. as a function of x,y coordinate) and spectroscopic (measurement of the intensity, wavelength, etc. for some planar surface or for a suspension of cells, liposomes or other particles).
The fundamental beam can be delivered to the sample in a variety of ways. Figs. 12-
16 are schematics of various modes of delivering the fundamental and generating second harmomc beams. It is understood that in sum- or difference-frequency configurations, the fundamental beams will be comprised of two or more beams, and will generate, at the interfaces, the difference or sum frequency beams. For the pmposes of illustration, only the second harmonic generation case is described in detail herein. Furthermore, it shall be understood that the sample cell 3 in all cases can be mounted on a translation stage (1-, 2-, or 3-dimensional degrees of freedom) for selecting precise locations of the interfacial interaction volume. The sample cell in all cases can be fitted with flow ports and tubes which can serve to introduce (or flush out) components such as molecules, particles, cells, etc.
Transmission
Fig. 12A is a schematic of a configuration relying on transmission of the fundamental and second harmonic beams. The fundamental 320 (ω) passes through the sample cell 330 and interacts within a volume element (denoted by the circle) in which are contained one or more interfaces capable of generating the second harmonic beam 325 (2ω). The fundamental and second harmonic beams are substantially co-linear as denoted by beam 325. The sample cell can contain suspended beads, particles, liposomes, biological cells, etc. in some medium, providing interfacial area capable of generating second harmonics in response to the fundamental beam. As shown, the second harmonic is detected co-linearly with the fundamental direction, but could alternatively be detected off-angle from the fundamental, for instance at 90° to the fundamental beam.
Fig. 12B is a schematic of another configuration relying on transmission of the fundamental and second harmonic beams. The fundamental 335 is directed onto a sample cell 345 and the second harmonic waves are generated at the top surface — this surface can be derivatized with immobilized probes or with adsorbed particles, liposomes, cells, etc. The second harmonic waves 340 are generated within a volume element denoted by the circle at the interface between the top surface and the medium contained within cell. Fig. 12C is a schematic of a configuration substantially similar to the one depicted in Fig. 2 A except that the bottom surface of the sample cell 3, rather than the top, is used to generate the second harmonic waves.
Total Internal Reflection Fig. 13A is a schematic of a waveguide 4 capable of acting as a total internal reflection waveguide which refracts the fundamental 365 and directs it to a location at the interface between the waveguide 380 and a sample cell 375. At this location, denoted by the circle, the fundamental will generate the second harmonic waves and undergo total internal reflection; the second harmonic beam will propagate substantially colinearly with the fundamental and exit the prism 380. Waveguide 380 will typically be in contact with air. In this illustration, the waveguide 380 is a Dove prism.
Fig. 13B is a schematic of a configuration similar to the one depicted in Fig. 13A except that the waveguide 400 allows for multiple points of total internal reflection between the waveguide 4 and the sample cell 395, increasing the amount of second harmonic light generated from the fundamental beam.
Fiber Optic
Fig 14 depicts various configurations of a fiber optic means of delivering or collecting the fundamental or second harmonic beams. In Fig. 14A, the coupling element 410 between a source of the fundamental wave and the fiber optic is depicted. The fundamental, thus coupled into the fiber optic waveguide 405, proceeds to a sample cell 415. In Fig. 14A, the tip of the fiber can serve as the interface of interest capable of generating second harmonic waves, or the tip can serve merely to introduce the fundamental beam to the sample cell containing suspended cells, particles, etc. In Fig. 14A, the second harmonic light is collected back through the fiber optic.
Fig. 14B is identical to Fig. 14A except that a bead is attached to the tip of the fiber optic (according to means well known in the art). The bead can serve to both improve collection efficiency of the second harmonic light or be derivatized with probes or adsorbed species and presenting an interface with the medium of sample cell 425 capable of generating the second harmonic light. Fig. 14C is identical to both Figs. 14A and 14B except that collection of the second harmonic light is effected using a solid-angle detector 450.
Optical Resonance Cavity
An optical resonance cavity is defined between at least two reflective elements and has an intracavity light beam along an intracavity beam path. The optical cavity or resonator consists of two or more minored surfaces ananged so that the incident light can be trapped bouncing back and forth between the minors. In this way, the light inside the cavity can be many orders of magnitude more intense than the incident light. This phenomenon is well known and has been exploited in various ways (see, for example, Yariv A. "Introduction to Optical Electronics", 2nd Ed., Holt, Reinhart and Winston, NY 1976, Chapter 8). The sample cell can be present in the optical cavity or it can be outside the optical resonance cavity.
Fig. 15 is a schematic of an optical resonance power build-up cavity configuration. Fig. 15A is a schematic of an optical resonance cavity in which the sample cell 465 is positioned intracavity and the fundamental and second harmonic beams are transmitted through it - a useful configuration for sample cells containing suspended particles, cells, beads, etc. The fundamental beam 455 enters the optical resonance cavity at reflective optic 460 and builds up in power between reflective elements 460 and 462 (intracavity beam). Minor 460 is preferably tilted (not peφendicular to the direction of the incident fundamental 455) to prevent direct reflection of the intracavity beam back into the light source. The natural reflectivity and transmisiyity of 460 and 462 can be adjusted so that the fundamental builds up to a convenient level of power within the cavity. The fundamental generates second harmonic light in a volume element within the sample cell denoted by the circle. Reflective optic 460 can reflect the fundamental and the second harmonic, while reflective optic 462 will substantially reflect the fundamental but allow the pass-through of the second harmonic beam 475 which is subsequently detected. U.S. Pat. No. 5,432,610 (King et al.) describes a diode-pumped power build-up cavity for chemical sensing and it and the references it makes are hereby incoφorated by reference herein.
Fig. 15B is a schematic of an optical resonance power build-up cavity configuration in which the fundamental beam 475 enters the optical cavity by reflection from optic 480. A second reflective optic element 482 defines the optical resonance cavity. Element 490 is a waveguide (such as a prism) in contact with the sample cell 485 and allows total internal reflection of the fundamental beam at the interface between the waveguide and sample cell surfaces, generating the second harmonic light. Element 482 substantially reflects the fundamental beam but passes through the second harmonic beam 495 which is subsequently detected.
Reflection Fig. 16A is a schematic of a configuration involving reflection of the fundamental and second harmonic beams. A substrate 525 is coated with a thin layer of a reflective material 520, such as a metal, and on top of this is deposited at layer 515 suitable for attachment of the probes or adsoφtion of particles, cells, etc. (e.g., SiO2). This layer is in contact with the sample cell 510. The fundamental 500 passes through the sample cell 510 and generates a second harmonic wave at the interface between layers 515 and 520. The fundamental and second harmonic waves 505 are reflected back from the surface of layer 520.
Fig. 16B is substantially similar to Fig. 15A except that the second harmonic and fundamental beams are reflected 535 from the interface between the medium contained in sample cell 540 and layer 545. Layer 545 is reflective or partly reflective layer deposited on substrate 550 and is suitable for adsoφtion of particles, cells, etc. or attachment of probes.
Fig. 16C is a schematic illustrating that only the sample cell 565 need be used for a reflective geometry. The sample cell 565 is partly filled with some medium 570 and the fundamental and second harmonic beams are reflected 560 from the gas-liquid or vapor- liquid interface at the surface of 570.
Modes of detection
Charge-coupled detectors (CCD) anay detectors can be particularly useful when information is desired as a function of substrate location (x,y). CCDs comprise an array of pixels (i.e., photodiodes), each pixel of which can independently measuring light impinging on it. For a given apparatus geometry, nonlinear light arising from a particular substrate location (x,y) can be determined by measuring the intensity of nonlinear light impinging on a CCD array location (Q,R) some distance from the substrate - this can be determined because of the coherent, collimated (and generally co-propagating with the fundamental) nonlinear optical beam) compared with the spontaneous, stochastic and multidirectional nature of fluorescence emission. With a CCD array, one or more anay elements {Q,R} in the detector will map to specific regions of a substrate surface, allowing for easy determination of information as a function of substrate location (x,y). Photodiode detector and photomultiplier tubes (PMTs), avalanche photodiodes, phototransistors, vacuum photodiodes or other detectors known in the art for converting incident light to an electrical signal (i.e., cunent, voltage, etc.) can also be used to detect light intensities. For CCD detector, the CCD communicates with and is controlled by a data acquisition board installed in the apparatus computer. The data acquisition board can be of the type that is well known in the art such as a CIO-DAS16/Jr manufactured by Computer Boards Inc. The data acquisition board and CCD subsystem, for example, can operate in the following manner. The data acquisition board controls the CCD integration period by sending a clock signal to the CCD subsystem, hi one embodiment, the CCD subsystem sets the CCD intregration period at 4096 clock periods. By changing the clock rate, the actual time in which the CCD integrates data can be manipulated. During an integration period, each photodiode accumulates a charge proportional to the amount of light that reaches it. Upon termination of the integration period, the charge is transfened to the CCD's shift registers and a new integration period commences. The shift registers store the charges as voltages which represent the light pattern incident on the CCD anay. The voltages are then trasmitted at the clock rate to the data acquisition board, where they are digitized and stored in the computer's memory. In this manner, a strip of the sample is imaged during each integration period. Thereafter, a subsequent row is integrated until the sample is completely scanned.
Sample substrates and sample cells Sample substrates and cells can take a variety of forms drawing from, but not limited to, one or more of the following characteristics: fully sealed, sealed or unsealed and connected to flow cells and pumps, integrated substrates with a total internal reflection prism allowing for evanescent generation of the nonlinear beam, integrated substrates with a resonant cavity for fundamental power build-up, an optical set-up allowing for multiple passes of the fundamental for increased nonlinear response, sample cells containing suspended biological cells, particles, beads, etc.
Data analysis
Data analysis operates on the vectors of information measured by the detector. The information can be time-dependent and kinetic. It can be dependent on the concentration of one or more biological components, inhibitors, antagonists, agonists, drugs, small molecules, etc. which can be changed during a measurement or between measurements. It can also be dependent on wavelength, etc. In general, the intensity of nonlinear light will be transformed into a concentration or amount of a particular state (for example, the surface-associated concentration of a component or the amount of opened or closed ion-channels in cell membranes) via the detected change in nonlinear optical properties that are conelated to conformational changes induced in the sample.
Details of the data analysis can vary from experiment to experiment. There is a large literature available for making conelations between conformation and fluorescence intensity (see the references by Glauner et al., Nature 402, 813 (1999), Ghanouni et al., Proc. Natl.. Acad. Sci., v.98, 5997 (2001), and Ghanouni et al., Journal of Biological Chemistry, v.276, 24433 (2001), and references therein). Analogous procedures are constructed for the nonlinear optical techniques. For instance, the square root of the intensity of second harmonic light (proportional to electric field amplitude of the light) is proportional to the number of nonlinear-active species in a sample times the orientational average of the hypeφolarizability of the species. This is a well known relationship that can be used to quantify conformational change (and in turn binding affinity to a probe) with intensity of a nonlinear beam. Kinetics and equilibrium properties of the reactions of interest can be determined via the measurements and appropriate data analysis.
Screening for Candidate Binding Partners
Candidate binding partners for binding a test molecule can be screened with the present invention. Conformational changes induced in a candidate binding partners upon binding to a test molecule can also be screened using the present invention. The method of screening one or more candidate binding partners for binding to a test molecule comprises measuring the one or more physical properties of the one or nonlinear optical light beams emanating from said sample comprising the test molecule and the one or more candidate binding partners, where a change in the one or more physical properties of the nonlinear light beams relative to a value measured in the absence of exposure to the one or more candidate binding partners is an indication of a binding event having occurred, with a field applied to the sample. In a prefened embodiment the candidate binding partner is not attached to the surface.
The probes or targets of the present invention that can be used include but are not limited to naturally occurring, artificially altered, or genetically engineered, biological species or non-biological species. The candidates for probes or targets also include but are not limited to one or more of the following components: a nucleic acid, protein, small molecule, organic molecule, biological cell, virus, molecular beacon, liposome, receptor, antibody, agonist, antagonist, inhibitor, hapten, ligand, antigen, oocyte, hormone, protein, peptide, receptor, drug, lipid, ganglioside, enzyme, nucleotide, carbohydrate, cDNA, oligonucleotide, nucleoside, polynucleoside, polynucleotide, lipid, ganglioside, oligosaccharide, peptide nucleic acid (PNA), toxin, nucleic acid analog, ion channel receptor, G coupled-protein receptor. In a specific embodiment, the probes can be patterned in an anay format on a substrate or solid surface, with the properties or chemical identity of the probes remaining constant or varying among regions of the array.
In one embodiment of the selection of candidate binding partners, an external electric field can be applied to the samples to create the non-centrosymmetric condition required for the nonlinear optical techniques. For example, proteins (e.g., solubilized GPCRs) that are labeled with a nonlinear-active label can be partially oriented in the electric field. A background nonlinear light signal is measured. When a ligand that binds to the protein is added to the medium, it triggers a conformational change in the protein (well known to those skilled in the art) that results in a change in the properties of the nonlinear light signal (e.g., a change in intensity). This scheme can be very useful in screening libraries of ligands (small molecules, drugs, etc) for binding to proteins — i.e., high-throughput drug screening. In a prefened embodiment, the proteins are GPCRs, a well known as a class of proteins that are implicated in disease, and for which drugs can be developed. Drugs can be agonists, antagonists, inhibitors, etc. that interact (e.g., bind) with the receptors in some way. The following references (and references therein) describe different exemplary GPCRs that can be used:
P. Ghanouni et al., "Agonist-induced conformational changes in the G-protein-coupling domain of the β2 adrenergic receptor", Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci., v.98, 5997 (2001).
P. Ghanouni et al., "Functionally Different Agonists Induce Distinct Conformations in the G Protein Coupling Domain of the β2 Adrenergic Receptor", Journal of Biological Chemistry, v.276, 24433 (2001).
C. Bieri et al., "Micropatterned immobilization of a G protein-coupled receptor and direct detection of G protein activation", Nature Biotechnology, 17, 1105 (1999).
Helmreich, E.J.M. and Hofinann, KP, "Structure and Function of Proteins in G-protein- coupled signal transfer", Biochimica et Biophysica Acta 1286, 285 (1996). Gether et al. (1995) J Biol Chem 270, 28628-28275, Fluorescent labeling of purified .beta..sub.2 Adrenergic receptor.
Turcatti et al. (1996) J Biol Chem 271, 19991-19998, Probing the Structure and Function of the Tachykinin Neurokinin-Receptor through Biosynthetic incoφoration of flourescent amino acids at specific sites.
Liu et al. (1996) Biochemistry 35, 11865-11873, Site-Directed fluorescent labeling of P- glycoprotein on cysteine residues in the nucleotide binding domains.
Lodish, Harvey, et al, Molecular Cell Biology (4th ed., 2000).
Screening for Modulators The invention provides a method of screening one or more candidate modulator molecules for the ability to modulate the interaction between a test molecule and its binding partner. The action of modulator and inhibitor molecules have been previously described. Any change in the one or more physical properties of the nonlinear light beam emanating from a sample comprising the test molecule, its binding partner and the modulator, relative to what was measured in the absence of exposure of the test molecule to the binding partners, serves as an indicator of the ability of the candidate modulator molecules to modulate the interaction between the test molecule and its binding partner (i.e. to increase or decrease their binding).
The invention can be used, for example, to monitor gene expression or for studies involving drag screening or high-throughput screening where a candidate drug is tested for binding, or its effect on probe-target binding, i.e., to reduce or enhance probe-target binding, hi other cases, for example, a drug can be tested for efficacy by its ability to bind to a receptor or other molecule on the surface of a biological cell, hi another specific embodiment, compounds that are potential inhibitors of an agonist to a receptor are screened by testing for blocking of the agonist binding to the receptor, i.e., removal of a conformational change induced by the agonist when the receptor and agonist are also in the presence of an inhibitor candidate.
In a specific embodiment, the invention is used for drug screening or high-throughput screening where a candidate drug is tested for its ability to activate or inhibit a probe (e.g., a receptor, ion channel protein, etc.). A drug candidate is tested for its ability to activate a conformational change in a probe - in this case, one seeks agonists of the probe.
hi a specific embodiment, target-probe interactions can be measured in the presence of some modulator of the interactions - the modulator being, for example, a small molecule, drug, or other moiety, molecule or particle which changes in some way the target-probe interactions (e.g., has some affinity for the probe and blocks or inhibits target binding). The effect of a modulator on probe-target binding, where the target is known to bind to the probes, is investigated using the nonlinear optical method. The modulator can be added before, during or after the time in which the probe-target interactions occur.
In a specific embodiment, a biological probe-target binding reaction can be measured in the presence of agonists, antagonists, drags, or small molecules which can block, initiate or otherwise modulate the binding strength (e.g., equilibrium constant) of the said probe-target binding reaction. This embodiment can be useful in many cases, for example when one would like to know the efficacy of a drug's ability to block or modulate a certain probe-target reaction for medical uses or basic research.
Detection of Conformational Changes
Conformational changes can be studied by the present invention at an interface or in the bulk, where the conformational change leads to a change in one or more physical properties of one or more nonlinear light beams emanating from the sample. The conformational change can be initiated by a biological or chemical binding event, or by a biological component, drug, small molecule, agonist or antagonist binding to a molecule or a particle, and can be assayed as described herein for binding interactions.
In a specific embodiment, a change in orientation or dipole moment occurs in the interfacial region possessing a nonlinear susceptibility as a result of some probe-target interaction. A nonlinear-active label can be attached to the probe of interest and binding of the probe to some target (such as a drug candidate tested for its ability to activate the probe and thereby induce a conformational change) in solution results in a change in orientation or dipole moment and this changes the nonlinear susceptibility of the interfacial region, and thus the properties of the nonlinear beams (e.g., intensity, polarization, wavelength). In another embodiment, a non-centrosymmetric region is created by application of an external field (EFISH technique). The region can be interfacial, bulk or some combination thereof. Probes or targets (the probes, targets or both are nonlinear-active, either intrinsically or labeled using a nonlinear-active label) are poled by the electric field and this results in a background. When a binding reaction occurs between the probes and targets, this can activate a conformational change in one or both species or result in a change in dipole moment of species, resulting in a change in the measured nonlinear optical signals.
For use with nucleic acid hybridization (oligonucleotide, polynucleotide, RNA, etc.), target oligonucleotides can be exposed to a surface of an anay on which are situated probe oligonucleotides. At the probe oligonucleotide sequences in the anay (conesponding to known locations) where sequence-complementary hybridization and an accompanying conformational change occurs, the fundamental light would give rise to a change in nonlinear optical signal, or a change in the background of such a signal. This can be detected and conelated with the spatial location of the anay element and hence the oligonucleotide sequence. For example, two major applications of nucleic acid microanays are:
1) identification of sequence (gene or gene mutation) - monitoring of DNA variations, for example; and 2) determination of expression level (abundance) of genes. There are many formats that can be used for preparing the anays. For example, in one case probe cDNA (500-5000 base pairs long) can be immobilized to a solid surface such as glass using robot spotting and exposed to a set of targets either separately or in a mixture (R. Ekins, F.W. Chu, Trends in Biotechnology, 1999, 17, 217). Another format comprises synthesizing oligonucleotides (20-25 mer oligos) or peptide nucleic acids probes in-situ (on the solid substrate, Fodor et al, "Light-directed, Spatially Addressable Parallel Chemical Synthesis," Science 251 (4995): 767-773 FEB 15 1999) or by conventional synthesis followed by on-chip immobilization. The anay is then exposed to target DNA, hybridized, and the identity or abundance of complementary sequences are determined.
Protein arrays can be prepared (see for example, G. MacBeath and S.L. Schreiber, "Printing Proteins as Microanays for High-Throughput Function Determination", Science 2000, 289, 1760-1763) to determine whether a given target protein binds to the immobilized probe protein on the surface. These anays can be used to study small molecule binding to the probe proteins. Many reviews of microanay technology and applications are available in the art. For instance, those of: Ramsay, "DNA chips - states-of-the-art," Nature Biotechnology 1998, 16(1), 40-44 (relevant portions of which are incoφorated by reference herein); Marshall et al., "DNA chips - an array of possibilities," Nature Biotechnology 1998, 16(1), 27-31 (relevant portions of which are incoφorated by reference herein); S.A. Fodor, Science 277 (1997), 393 (relevant portions of which are incoφorated by reference herein); D.H. Duggan et al., Nature Genet. 21 (Suppl.) (1999), 10 (relevant portions of which are incoφorated by reference herein); M. Schena et al., Science 270 (1995), 467 (relevant portions of which are incoφorated by reference herein); L. McAllister et al., Am. J. Hum. Genet. 61 (Suppl.) (1997), 1387 (relevant portions of which are incoφorated by reference herein); and A.P. Blanchard et al., Biosens. And Bioelectron. 11 (1996) 687 (relevant portions of which are incoφorated by reference herein).
The conformational changes also allow enable studying the degree or extent of binding between a probe and a target, utilizing the surface selective nonlinear optical techniques, through measuring the conformational effect the binding induces. In a specific embodiment, probes that are labeled with a nonlinear-active label are attached to a solid surface or substrate. When the probes bind to a target, the conformation of the probe changes, and the orientation of the label with respect to the surface, and fundamental beam changes also. In a prefened embodiment the candidate binding partners (probes) are not attached to the surface. In another embodiment the nonlinear active label or moiety is attached to the target or probe molecules in vitro. The degree of probe-target binding can be conelated via the amount of change of a measured property of the nonlinear optical radiation (e.g., intensity). For example, labeled oligonucleotides are attached to a solid substrate according to means well known in the art and exposed to targets to test for hybridization. When hybridization to a target occurs, the orientation of the label on the oligonucleotide changes. Microarrays known in the art (varying sequence of oligos in different surface locations) or substrates with uniform oligonucleotide sequences can be used. Binding between surface-attached proteins and targets - other proteins, ligands, etc. wherein the binding reaction triggers a conformational change are another exemplary embodiment with the present invention. In general, any surface-attached species that undergoes a conformational change when binding or interacting with any other species or stimulus can be studied with the present invention. Furthermore, the surface-attached probes need not be labeled when using indicators which are sensitive to minute changes in electric charge density or changes thereof. If the conformational change in a probe results in a change in the arrangement of electric charges on a surface - even if this change is transient - indicators near the interface can be used to detect these changes and report on the conformational change.
In a specific embodiment, a MB analogue probe, described above, is used to detect the degree or extent of binding. For instance, by labeling the molecular beacon probe with a nonlinear-active label and measuring whether the label's orientation changes (via changes in nonlinear optical intensity) at some interface, or in the bulk, one can study whether target strands are complementary, and the extend to which they are complementary since the amount of change that is measured in nonlinear optical intensity can be conelated with the degree of hybridization. In a specific embodiment, an Au nanoparticle is used to enhance the intensity of nonlinear optical radiation, such as second harmonic generation scattered by an oxazole dye by several orders of magnitude when the nanoparticle and oxazole dye are in proximity to each other. Upon hybridization of the probe to a complementary target, the intensity of the nonlinear optical radiation decreases and this decrease can be quantitatively related to the amount of probe-target hybridization. The sensitivity of the technique is determined by, among other factors, the background nonlinear optical signal before hybridization occurs.
Variations on Uses of the Invention Although the present invention can be used in many scientific areas of analysis and in particular, in the chemical and biological arts, the present invention can be especially useful in drug discovery or in fundamental studies where compounds (targets) are tested for binding and and ability to activate probes, wherein the probes are ion channel proteins, GPCR proteins, or other receptors, or other molecules.
A wide flexibility is provided for the apparatus. Scanning, imaging, detection techniques at a fixed position, etc. can all be readily used with the present invention. Scanning of microanays in the art includes confocal-based schemes and non-confocal based schemes. U.S. Pat. No. 5,834,758 (Trulson et al. - relevant portions of which are incoφorated by reference herein) describes a non-confocal based scheme for imaging a microanay using fluorescence detection. However, the sample should lie very flat in order to image only within a single focal plane for good out-of-plane discrimination. Therefore, a very finely adjustable translation stage requiring specialized components is preferably be used for this puφose adding to the cost of the instrument and possibly the lifetime as well. The image quality of this type of apparatus can be sensitive to mechanical vibrations. Furthermore, discrimination of the out-of-plane (non-surface bound) fluorophores places a limit on the sensitivity of the technique. U.S. Pat. No. 6,134,002 (Stimson et al. - relevant portions of which are incoφorated by reference herein) is an example of a confocal scanning microscope device for imaging a sample plane, i.e. a microanay. Although the confocal- based techniques have good depth discrimination, the scan rate may be low due to descanning requirements and the light throughput can be low, reducing the overall signal to noise ratio and the sensitivity of the technique.
The invention can be used for studying binding processes between other biological components: cells with viruses; protein-protein interactions; protein-ligand; cell-ligand; protein-drugs, nucleic acid-drugs, cell-small molecule; cell-nucleic acid; peptide-cell, oligo or polynucleotides, virus-cell, protein-small molecule, etc., and in general, any binding reaction which results in a conformational change. Biomimetic membranes such as phospholipid supported bilayers (eg., egg phosphatidylcholine) can also be used and are particularly useful when studies comprise membrane protein probes.
Probes, targets, receptors, etc. can be rendered nonlinear-active (made to possess a hypeφolarizability) by direct labeling or by using a decorator molecule or other candidate that has a binding affinity for the probes or targets, and is itself intrinsically or rendered nonlinear-active, and which will respond to a conformational change on the probes or targets by shifting its position, by virtue of the molecular bond that binds the decorator to the probe or target. An antibody to a receptor is an example of such a decorator molecule. The decorator molecule should not itself block the active region of the receptor so that potential agonists, inhibitors, activators, etc. can bind to and produce action on the receptor.
Another example of the invention's use is to label receptors or other components that have an affinity for some virus. When the virus binds or interacts with the receptor or other component, this interaction will affect the orientation of the label with respect to the direction of the fundamental beam, and thus change the properties of the measured nonlinear optical light (e.g., the intensity of the nonlinear light).
Other examples of the technique's use with anays include cellular anays, supported lipid bilayer anays with or without membrane or attached proteins, etc. Many methods exist in the art for coupling biomolecules (eg., nucleic acid, protein and cells) to solid supports in anay format. A wide degree of flexibility may be used in providing the means by which the anays are created. They can comprise, for example, covalent or non-covalent coupling to the substrate directly, to a chemically derivatized substrate, to an intermediate layer of some kind (e.g., self-assembled monolayer, a hydrogel or other bio-compatible layer known in the art). The identity of the probes (e.g., protein structure or oligonucleotide sequence) can vary from site to site across the solid surface, or the same probe can uniformly cover the surface. Targets can be of a single identity or a combination of targets with different identities. The anays can be prepared in a variety of ways including, but not limited to, ink-jet printing, photolithography, micro-contact printing, or any other manner known to one skilled in the art of fabricating them.
Because the binding process can be measured in real time and in the presence of bulk biological components due to the surface-selectivity of the nonlinear optical technique, equilibrium binding curves and kinetics can be measured, the bulk concentration of the components can be varied, and a "wash-away" step to remove unbound components, as is used with fluorescence-based detection, may he unnecessary.
A wide degree of flexibility is expected in the design of the apparatus including, but not limited to, the source of the fundamental light, the optical train necessary to control, focus or direct the fundamental and nonlinear light beams, the design of the array, the detection system, and the use of a grating or filters and collection optics. The mode of generation (inadiation) or collection can be varied including, for example, the use of evanescent wave (total internal reflection), planar wave guide, reflection, or transmission geometries, fiberoptic, near-field illumination, confocal techniques or the use of a microcavity for power build-up, or integrating detection system such as an integrating sphere. A number of methods for scanning a microanay on a solid surface can be adapted for use. Examples include U.S. Pat. No.'s 5,834,758 to Trulson et al. (1998), 6,025,601 to Trulson et al. (2000), 5,631,734 Stem et al. (1997), and 6,084,991 to Sampas (2000)- relevant portions of which are incoφorated by reference herein.
Because the second harmonic light beam makes a definite angle to the surface plane, one can read-out the properties of the nonlinear optical radiation, for instance, as a function of fundamental incidence position in a two-dimensional anay format, without needing to mechanically translate the detector or sample and without extensive collection optics, hi the 'beam scanning' embodiment, a mechanical translation of sample surface or detector is not required - only a change in a direction and/or angle of the fundamental incidence on the sample (for a fixed sample and detector) - the apparatus offers much faster scanning capability, improved ease of manufacturing and a longer lifetime.
When using the present invention to study an interface, the interface can comprise a silica, glass, silicon, silicon nitride, polystyrene, nylon, plastic, a metal, semiconductor or insulator surface, or any mixtures thereof, or any surface to which probes, such as biological components, can adsorb or be attached. The interface can also include biological cell and liposome surfaces. The attachment or immobilization can occur through a variety of techniques well known in the art. For example, oligonucleotides can be prepared via techniques described in "Microanay Biochip Technology", M. Schena (Ed.), Eaton Publishing, 1998- relevant portions of which are incoφorated by reference herein. And, for example with proteins, the surface can be derivatized with aldehyde silanes for coupling to amines on surfaces of biomolecules (G. MacBeath and S.L. Schreiber, "Printing Proteins as Microanays for High-Throughput Function Determination", Science 2000, 289, 1760-1763 - relevant portions of which are incoφorated by reference herein). BSA-NHS (BSA-N- hydroxysuccinimide) surfaces can also be used by first attaching a molecular layer of BSA to the surface and then activating it with N,N'-disuccinimidyl carbonate. The activated lysine, aspartate or glutamate residues on the BSA react with surface amines on the proteins.
The present invention can be applied to an ensemble of molecules or to a single molecule - i.e., ensemble reaction measurements or a single-molecule reaction measurement.
Supported phospholipid bilayers can also be used, with or without membrane proteins or other membrane-associated components as, for example, in Salafsky et al., Architecture and function of membrane proteins in planar supported bilayers: A study with photosynthetic reaction centers'" Biochemistry 35 (47): 14773-14781 (1996)- relevant portions of which are incoφorated by reference herein, "Biomembranes", Gennis, Springer- Verlag, Kalb et al., 1992 and Brian et al, "Allogeneic Stimulation of Cyto-toxic T-cells by Supported Planar Membranes," PNAS - Biological Sciences 81 (19): 6159-6163 (1984)-relevant portions of which are incoφorated herein. Supported phospholipid bilayers are well known in the art and there are numerous techniques available for their fabrication, with or without associated membrane proteins. These supported bilayers typically should be submerged in aqueous solution to prevent their destruction when they become exposed to air. Probes can be part of a biological cell, liposome, bead, etc. that naturally form an interface capable of generating nonlinear optical radiation due to their size (although they are nominally centrosymmetric, their diameter is of the order of the wavelength of light in the visible spectrum and this allows for generation of the nonlinear optical light according to well known art). Alternatively, probes can be molecules or particles (e.g., detergent-solubilized receptors) that are induced to orient by the application of an electric field. The use of electric fields to create a non-centrosymmetric region capable of generating nonlinear radiation - e.g., second harmonic, sum frequency or difference frequency generation, is well known in the prior art. One aspect of this prior art is often called 'EFISH' - electric field-induced second harmonic generation, i a specific embodiment, an applied electric field is used to pole molecules within a region to create an ordered (non-centrosymmetric) region within a phase or material; the resulting region is then capable of generating nonlinear optical radiation.
In a specific embodiment, the probe-target hybridization can be measured by detecting the intensity of nonlinear optical light (e.g., second harmonic light) at some position on a substrate with surface-attached probes; the intensity of the second harmonic light changes as labeled targets bind to the probes at the surface and become partially oriented because of the binding, thus satisfying the non-centrosymmetric condition for generation of second harmonic light at the interface. Modeling of the intensity of light with concentration of probe-target binding complexes at the interface can be accomplished using a variety of methods, for instance by calibrating the technique for a given probe-target interaction using radiolabels or fluorescence tags. Controls for non-specific binding of targets to the surface can be performed according to procedures well known to one skilled in the art, for example: i) addition of deliberately non-complementary targets and measuring for surface-selective nonlinear optical signal, or ii) adding blockers which are known to prevent probe-target binding, adding complementary targets and measuring the resulting surface-selective nonlinear optical signal. In case i) the surface-selective nonlinear optical signal change upon addition of non-complementary targets will be substantially lower than upon addition of complementary targets. In case ii) the signal change will be significantly lower in the presence of blocker than in the absence of blocker.
Measurements can be made at a wide variety of interfaces known in the art, such as a solid-liquid interface, an air-liquid interface, a liquid-liquid interface, etc. For example, in the case of an air-liquid interface, nonlinear-active, labeled probes are introduced to the liquid and allowed to assemble at the interface; addition of targets that bind to the probes causes a change in the measured properties of the nonlinear optical beams reflected from the air-liquid interface.
6. EXAMPLES Example 6.1
A Molecular Beacon analogue (MB analogue) that is a peptide-nucleic analogue (PNA) oligonucleotide, coupled to a nonlinear-active dye, and purified, is purchased from a commercial source such as Midland Certified Reagent Company (Midland, TX). The nonlinear-active oxazole dye used is oxazole (SE) l-(3-(succinimidyloxycarbonyl) benzyl)-4- (5-(4-methoxyphenyl) oxazol-2-yl)pyridinium bromide (PyMPO, SE: Molecular Probes Coφ.) attached via an amine group at the 3' end.
The oligonucleotide is placed into the sample well of an EFISH cell. There are a variety of EFISH cells available in the art. The sample cell described in the publication by C.G. Bethea ('Experimental technique of dc induced SHG in liquids: measurements of the nonlinearity of CH2I2", Applied Optics 1975, 14, 1447) is used. The direction of the applied electric field is parallel to the electric field of the laser beam. A commercial femtosecond mode-locked system (Mira 900 and Verdi 5W) is used as the fundamental source. The fundamental is directed into the region of the cell between the electrodes. The back-reflected second harmonic is blocked from entering the oscillator using a color filter; fundamental light beyond the sample is blocked using a color filter. The second harmonic light is collected and focused onto a monochromator (CM110 CVI Laser) using plano-convex lenses (Melles Griot Inc.). The light is detected using a Hamamatsu photomultiplier tube with a Bertan power supply. The signals from the photomultiplier are sent to a Stanford Research Systems SR400 photon counting unit and processed using a PC. An electric field is applied using a Bertan power supply and home-built electronics to pulse and synchronize the field with the laser pulses.
The dye-labeled MB analogue probes are poled by application of the electric field when it is on. By comparing the average second harmonic intensity of the poled MB analogues in the absence and presence of target, the binding affinity (or sequence if it is unknown) of the target to the MB analogue can be measured. The SHG signal in the absence of target represents a background measurement that is used as a 'baseline' to compare with the signal in the presence of the target. Upon addition of a perfect complementary target, the MB analogue probe is activated and this leads to a conformational change and therefore to a change in the average orientation of the nonlinear-active dye. Because the intensity of the measured SHG light is proportional to the average orientation of the nonlinear-active dye, a change in dye orientation results in a change in the intensity of the second harmonic beam. Targets with less than perfect complementarity to the MB analogue probe sequence will bind with a lower affinity to the MB analogue probe and will therefore activate a lower proportion of the MB analogue probe molecules and cause a smaller amount of the conformational change. A relationship between binding affinity and the intensity of the second harmonic beam can be readily developed according to procedures known in the art that relate a change in nonlinear intensity to concentration of the nonlinear-active species.
Example 6.2
The β2 adrenergic receptor, a GPCR protein, is purified and detergent-solubilized according to well known procedures (e.g., Ghanouni et al, 98(11): 5997 PNAS). The protein is labeled at an endogenous cysteine (Cys-265) with l-(2,3-epoxypropyl)-4-(5-(4- methoxyphenyl)oxazol-2-yl)pyridinium trifluoromethanesulfonate (PyMPO epoxide, Molecular Probes), a nonlinear-active dye, at 1 :1 stoichiometry following standard procedures and using the work of Ghanouni et al, 98(11): 5997 PNAS, as a guide. The nonlinear-active dye is attached to a part of the protein that undergoes a conformational change when the protein is activated. After separation of the non-covalently bound dye, the receptor is placed in a medium situated between two electrodes and through which passes a fundamental beam (e.g., output of -1W avg. Power, -150 fs pulses from a Ti:Sapphire system such as the Verdi-Mira commercial system from Coherent Inc). The apparatus and sample preparation (e.g., application of electric field, electric field induced second harmonic generation - EFISH) are well known to one of ordinary skill in the art - standard optics are used to focus the fundamental on the sample and to collect the second harmonic radiation. Fig. 18 depicts the apparatus set-up and Fig. 17 depicts the sample holder with applied electric field. An electric field is applied across the medium according to Fig. 17, partially aligning the receptor and its bound dye and creating a non-centrosymmetric condition necessary for observation of SHG. A background signal intensity is measured at 400 nm using a color filter (BG-39, CVI Laser) to block the fundamental, a monochromator to select wavelength (CM110, CVI Laser), a PMT (Hamamatsu) and single-photon counting electronics (SR-400, Stanford Research Systems). The wavelength 400 nm is selected to create a resonance enhancement effect via an electronic transition of the dye. Ligand is added to the medium - a drug candidate that is tested for binding, for example; if the ligand (drug) binds to the receptor, a conformational change in the probe (the receptor) is induced which changes the nonlinear optical signal intensity. Known ligands (isoproterenol) and partial agonists (epinephrine, salbutamol and dobutamine) are used to calibrate the nonlinear optical response with amount of conformational change, i.e. binding affinity.
In an alternate embodiment, the labeling reaction can be carried out using various coupling chemistries and/or stoichiometries (labehprobe) to determine which coupling chemistry gives the optimal signal in the nonlinear optical measurement. For instance, it may not be known a priori which sub-parts of the probes actually undergo a conformational change (positional shift) due to target activation and by undertaking a variety of labeling reactions (known in the art to be necessary to find optimal labeling conditions in fluorescence labeling, etc.), it can be determined which chemistries lead to a label that undergoes conformational change when the probe is activated.
In a specific embodiment, ion channels or receptors such as GPCR receptors are labeled directly in biological cells with nonlinear-active labels and/or enhancers. For instance, the publication by Glauner et al. (Nature, v.402 813 (1999)) demonstrates fluorescent labeling of a Shaker potassium ion channel in whole cells. A background signal is measured. When agonist binds to the receptors, it induces a conformational change in the receptors, changing the orientation of the labels and thus the nonlinear optical signal (e.g., the signal intensity). A surface-selective nonlinear optical apparatus is used thus to measure ligand-gated conformational changes in the receptors via the labels and/or enhancers in whole cells. Fundamental light is focused onto a cell layer that has been cultured on Becton- Dickinson Falcon plates, for instance — and the second or higher harmonic is collected according to procedures well known in the art. In a specific embodiment, the labeled cells are suspended in a medium and fundamental light is focused into a region of the sample containing these cells. Fig. 18 depicts an embodiment of this apparatus. Second harmonic light is collected according to procedures known in the art, for instance at 0 or 90 degrees with respect to the fundamental beam.
In a specific embodiment, enhancers or decorators or both, are suspended or dissolved in the medium with labeled cells or molecules to enhance the nonlinear response of the cells or molecules. In a specific embodiment, probes are placed in artificial membranes or liposomes. If probes are expressed in cells, then can be purified and reconstituted into these membranes according to procedures well known in the art.
In a specific embodiment, the probes are in contact with, cultured on or patterned on surface that is itself in contact with a prism (or is the underside of the prism). The prism allows total internal reflection of the fundamental at the interface containing the probes and thus high Fresnel factors (electric field amplitudes) leading to higher nonlinear optical signals. In this mode of the set-up, the fundamental beam undergoes total internal reflection at the interface containing the probes and its evanescent wave is used to generate the nonlinear light. Figure 2 illustrates an embodiment of this type, hi Figure 2, an index matching material or liquid (75) is used to couple the prism (70) to a substrate containing the microarray (80) in contact with solution containing targets (85), whereby total internal reflection occurs at the interface between material (80) and solution (85). The prism material can be, for example, BK7 type glass (Melles Griot) and the index matching material obtained commercially from Coming Coφ. or Nye Coφ.
In a specific embodiment, the experimental set-up is as described in Salafsky and Eisenthal, "Protein adsoφtion at interfaces detected by second harmonic generation," J. Phys. Chem. B, 104 (32): 7752-7755 (2000), Salafsky and Eisenthal, "Second harmomc spectroscopy: detection and orientation of molecules at a biomembrane interface," Chem. Phys.Lett. 319 (5-6): 435-439 (2000), and references set forth therein. A femtosecond pulsed laser (Mail-Tai, Spectra-Physics) is used as the source of fundamental light at 800 nm operating at 80 MHz with <200 fs pulses at 1 W average power. The laser beam directed onto the entrance aperture of a Dove prism (Melles Griot, BK-7) and focused with a concave lens (Oriel) (spot size - 50 micron diameter). The Dove prism is mounted in a teflon holder and in contact with buffer or distilled water. The beam undergoes total internal reflection (evanescent wave generation) within the prism and the fundamental and second harmonic beams emerge roughly collinearly from the exit aperture. A color filter is used to block the fundamental light while passing the second harmonic to a monochromator (2 nm bandwidth slit). The monochromator is scanned from 380 - 500 nm to detect the second harmonic spectrum. If necessary, the fundamental light wavelength can be tuned as well. A single photon counting detector and photomultiplier tube are used to detect the output of the monochromator and a PC with software are used to record the data and control the monochromator wavelength. A background second harmonic signal is measured before addition of ligand or other stimulus to produce or test for conformational change in the probes.
Example 6.3
Oligodeoxyribonucleotides with suitable structures for molecular beacons are selected and synthesized according to procedures known to one of ordinary skill in the art with a primary amine at the 3' end and a disulfide group at the 5' end and a biotin group that replaces a dT. The following MB analogue can be used, for example: 5'-CCT AGC TCT AAA TCG CTA TGG TCG CGC(Biotin dT)AG G-3' (SEQ ID NO: 6). The amine-reactive nonlinear-active oxazole dye: oxazole (SE) l-(3-(succinimidyloxycarbonyl) benzyl)-4-(5-(4- methoxyphenyl) oxazol-2-yl)pyridinium bromide (PyMPO, SE: Molecular Probes Coφ.) is conjugated to the primary amine. hi this coupling reaction, a lOOμl solution containing 100 μM oligonucleotide dissolved in 0.1 M sodium bicarbonate is reacted with 0.1 mg of the succinimidyl ester of the dye dissolved in 100 μl of dimethyl sulfoxide. The reaction mixture is stined at room temperature for 2 hours. The reaction product is purified with a Sephadex column (NAP-5; Amersham Pharmacia Biotech) equilibrated with 10 ml of 0.1 M triethylammonium acetate (pH 6.5). After purification, the 5 '-end disulfide is cleaved and the free sulfhydryl is covalently attached to a 1.4 nm diameter gold cluster that serves to enhance the nonlinear response of the oxazole dye (Nanogold; Nanoprobes), and which comes with one N-propylmaleimide and has been passivated with water-soluble phosphine ligands. The coupling of the Au particle is achieved according to procedures well known to one of ordinary skill in the art. For example: the disulfide bond is cleaved with dithiothreitol (DTT), and the oligonucleotide is purified of excess DTT before coupling to the gold. An amount of 10 μl of 1 M DTT is added to 25 μl of oligonucleotide mixed with 75 μl of sodium bicarbonate, pH 8.3. After a one hour incubation, the oligonucleotide solution is purified using reverse-phase chromatography, as described. The fractions containing the activated oligonucleotide are purified using a Sephadex column (NAP-5) equilibrated with water. Part of the elution product (37 pmol to 370 pmol of DNA, suspended in 180 μl of water) is immediately reacted with 6 nmol of the monomaleimido-gold particles (Nanoprobes) in aqueous 20 mM NaH2PO4, 150 mM NaCl, 1 mM ethylenediamine tetraethyl acetate (EDTA) buffer, pH 6.5, containing 10% isopropanol at 4°C for 24 h. Reaction products are analyzed by gel electrophoresis on a 10% nondenaturing acrylamide gel performed in Tris-borate EDTA (TBE) at 10 V/cm.
The biotinylated MB analogue with attached nonlinear-active dye and gold nanoparticles are coupled to streptavidin-derivatized glass according to well known procedures. For example, the biotinylated MB analogues are immobilized on the etched portion of a glass fiber. A batch of optical fibers is used in a single immobilization cycle. About 2 cm of cladding is stripped away from the core by chemical etching at one end of the fiber probe. The fiber probe is peφendicularly dipped into a 49% hydrofluoric acid solution for 12 min. The HF solution is covered by heptane solvent. The etched fiber probe is washed with ultrapure water before being used for the subsequent immobilization experiment.
Biotinylated MB analogues are immobilized on the etched portion of the fiber for DNA sensing. The etched fiber probes are first cleaned by immersion in a 1:1 v/v concentrated HCl/MeOH mixture for 30 min., rinsed in water, and submerged in concentrated sulfuric acid for 30 min. Further rinsing and then boiling in water for 8-10 min follows. Silanization of the fibers is performed by immersing them in a freshly prepared 1 % (v/v) solution of DETA (Trimethoxysilylpropyϊdiethylenetriamine purchased from United Chemical Technologies, Bristol PA) in ImM acetic acid for 20 min at room temperature. The DETA-modified fiber probes are thoroughly rinsed with water to remove excess DETA. The silanized fiber probes are dried under nitrogen and fixed by heating in a 120 °C oven for 5 min. Then the silanized fibers are immersed in 0.5 mg/ml NHS-LC-biotin
(sulfosuccinimidyl-6-(biotinamido) hexanoate purchased from Pierce, Rockford IL) in 0.1 M bicarbonate buffer (pH 8.5) for 3 hours at room temperature. Streptavidin (Sigma, St. Louis MO) is bound to the fiber surface by incubating the biotinylated fibers overnight at 4°C in a solution containing 1.0 mg/ml of the streptavidin. The streptavidin-immobilized optical fibers are then immersed with a biotinylated MB analogue solution (10"6 M in lOmM phosphate buffer at pH 7.0) for as long as 20 min or overnight at 4°C to allow the biotinylated MB analogue to be immobilized on the surface.
The optical fibers are intenogated optically using second harmonic generation by propagating a fundamental beam down the fiber and measuring the intensity of the second harmonic beam back-reflected after it interacts evanescently with the MB analogue at the distal end of the fiber. In the absence of complementary targets, the oligonucleotide produces a large amount of second harmonic light due to the proximity of the oxazole dye and the Au particle in the haiφin-loop structure of the MB analogue; the intensity of the second harmonic light in this case can serve as a background. In the presence of complementary targets, the hybridization reaction causes the dye and the Au particle to spatially separate, greatly reducing the intensity of the second harmonic light detected. A linear relationship can be constructed between the amount of hybridization that occurs and the intensity of the second harmonic light and thus the derivatized optical fibers with detection system serves as an optical device for detection of complementary targets to the selected probe.
Example 6.4
Glass microspheres which are optically encoded with fluorescent dyes are derivatized with the MB analogues and an anay of microspheres with distinct oligonucleotide probes is prepared at the distal end of an optical fiber as found in the art (e.g., U.S. Pat. No. 5,250,264, Walt et al.; U.S. Pat. No. 5,298,741 Walt et al.; U.S. Pat. No. 5,252,494 Walt et al; U.S. Pat. No. 6,023,540 Walt et al.; U.S. Pat. No. 5,814,524 Walt et al.; U.S. Pat. No. 5,244,813 Walt et al.; U.S. Pat. No. 5,512,490 Walt et al. and commercially (Illumina Coφoration, for example). These anays can be used to detect multiple target sequences. Alternatively, the optical encoding can be accomplished using nonlinear-active dyes with different spectral characteristics from the beacon-associated nonlinear-active dye so that the both the encoding and the hybridization detection can be made using a nonlinear optical technique such as second harmonic generation.
If the nonlinear MB analogues are used in homogeneous solution, an applied electric field can be applied to the MB analogues in an EFISH method to create the required non- centrosymmetric condition.
In a specific embodiment, one is interested in finding drugs, antagonists, agonists or other species which block or reduce the binding of the MB analogues with targets - these compounds may be refened to as 'inhibitors' or 'blockers.' In this application, labeled targets are bound to probes at the interface. The inhibitors are added to the sample, and if the particular species being tested is successful in blocking or reducing the probe-target binding, the nonlinear optical light measured will change - the background radiation in this embodiment is due to target-probe binding; the displacement of the targets from the probes at the interface by the inhibitors leads to a change in the nonlinear optical light measured, for instance as a decrease in intensity of the nonlinear radiation generated by the interface or a wavelength shift in the nonlinear radiation spectrum. In an optional embodiment, controls to determine degree of non-specific nonlinear optical signals (e.g., not due to specific probe-target binding) can be performed according to standard procedures well known to one skilled in the art. n nucleic acid microanays, for example, the intensity of the nonlinear optical signal at regions between the probe-containing regions will produce a background signal that can increase somewhat (but is substantially smaller than the signal due to specific probe-target binding reactions) upon addition of targets that are either complementary or non-complementary to the probes. This background signal can be accounted for by, for example, adding only non-complementary probes and measuring the nonlinear optical signal in regions containing probes and not containing probes. Measuring the nonlinear optical signals in the presence of blockers known to prevent probe- target binding is another control technique well known to one skilled in the art for determining the amount of background or artifactual signal present in a larger signal of interest, in this case the specific probe-target binding reaction.
hi another embodiment of the invention, the amine-reactive oxazole dye (SE) l-(3- (succinimidyloxycarbonyl) benzyl)-4-(5-(4-methoxyphenyl) oxazol-2-yl)pyridinium bromide (PyMPO, SE: Molecular Probes Coφ.) is reacted with a 1:1 molar ratio of ethylenediamine under the conditions specified by the Molecular Probes direction and is allowed to react to completion. The oxazole-based dye now contains a single amine group. This can be coupled to the primary amine on an oligonucleotide using a homobifunctional crosslinking agent (Pierce, Rockford IL).
In a specific embodiment, a nonlinear-active dye with attached biotin can be synthesized according to procedures known to one of ordinary skill in the art to create dye- biotin molecules that are the nonlinear-active analogues of the biotin-fluorescent dye molecules useful for immobilization of oligonucleotides.
Example 6.5
A peptide-nucleic analogue (PNA) molecular beacon (haiφin-loop structure) of 18-25 base-pairs sequence is labeled with PyMPO, SE (Molecular Probes Coφ.) at the 3' or 5' end (or, alternatively, at cytosine base-pair locations) according to procedures well established in the art. The PNA is placed in purified water solution and oriented with an applied electric field to generate a non-centrosymmetric region. Addition of PNA molecules with complementary sequence to the labeled PNA will cause a conformational change and thus a change in measured properties of the nonlinear optical beams.
PNAs (linear, non-haiφin loop) can also be attached to glass or silica surfaces according to procedures well known to those skilled in the art. Addition of sequence- complementary DNA to purified water in contact with the glass surface containing the PNAs results in a conformational change in the PNAs on the surface, and thus a change in the measured physical properties of the nonlinear optical light beam.
Example 6.6
7. MISCELLANEOUS The present invention is not to be limited in scope by the specific embodiments described herein. Indeed, various modifications of the invention in addition to those described herein will become apparent to those skilled in the art from the foregoing description. Such modifications are intended to fall within the scope of the appended claims.
All references cited herein are incoφorated herein by reference in their entirety and for all puφoses to the same extent as if each individual publication, patent or patent application was specifically and individually indicated to be incoφorated by reference in its entirety for all puφoses.
The citation of any publication is for its disclosure prior to the filing date and should not be construed as an admission that the present invention is not entitled to antedate such publication by virtue of prior invention.
8. REFERENCES
U.S. Patent Documents
5,324.591 Jan.. 1994 Georger, Jr. et al..
5.215.899 Jun„ 1993 Dattagupta
6,030,787 Feb., 2000 Livak et al.
5.834.758 Nov.. 1998 Trulson et al.
6.025.601 Feb., 2000 Trulson et al.
5.631.734 May. 1997 Stem et al.
6,084,991 July. 2000 Sampas
5,633.724 May. 1997 King et al. 6,121.983 Sept., 2000 Fork et al. 5,485,277 Jan., 1996 Foster et al. 5.324.633 June, 1994 Fodor et al. 6.124.102 Sept., 2000 Fodor et al. 5.847,400 Dec, 1998 Kain et al. 5,432,610 July, 1995 King et al. 5.320,814 June, 1994 Walt et al. 5.250,264 Oct., 1993 Walt et al. 5.298,741 March, 1994 Walt et al. 5,252,494 Oct.. 1993 Walt et al. 6.023.540 Feb.. 2000 Walt et al. 5.814,524 Sept., 1998 Walt et al. 5.244,813 Sept.. 1993 Walt et al. 5.512,490 April. 1996 Walt et al. 6.095.555 July. 2000 Fiekowskv et al. 6.134.002 Oct., 2000 Stimson et al. 6.110,426 Dec, 1997 Shalon et al. 6,040,586 March. 2000 Slettnes et al. Scientific References
1. J.S. Salafsky, K.B. Eisenthal, "Second Harmonic Spectroscopy: Detection and Orientation of Molecules at a Biomembrane Interface", Chemical Physics Letters 2000, 319, 435-439.
2. J.S. Salafsy, K.B. Eisenthal, "Protein Adsoφtion at Interfaces Detected by Second
Harmonic Generation", Journal of Physical Chemistry B, 2000, 104, 7752-7755.
3. R. Ekins, F.W. Chu, Trends in Biotechnology, 1999, 17, 217.
4. G. MacBeath and S.L. Schreiber, "Printing Proteins as Microanays for High- Throughput Function Determination", Science 2000, 289, 1760-1763.
5. N.J. Harrick, "Intemal Reflection Spectroscopy", John Wiley & Sons, Inc., New
York, 1979.
6. Groves, J.T., Ulman, N., Boxer, S.G., "Micropatterning fluid bilayers on solid supports", Science, 1997, 275, 651-3. 7. Fodor et al., "Light-directed Spatially-addressable Parallel Chemical Synthesis," Science, 1991, 251, 767-773.
8. Ramsay, G. DNA chips - states-of-the-art. Nature Biotechnology 1998, 16(1), 40- 44.
9. Marshall, A.; Hodgson, J. DNA chips - an anay of possibilities. Nature
Biotechnology 1998, 16(1), 27-31.
10. S.C. Case-Green et al., Curr. Opin. Chem. Biol. 2 (1998), 404.
11. S.A. Fodor, Science 277 (1997), 393.
12. D.H. Duggan et al., Nature Genet. 21 (Suppl.) (1999), 10.
13. M. Schena et al., Science 270 (1995), 467.
63. P.O. Brown and D. Botstein, Nature Genet. 21 (Suppl.) (1999), 33.
64. L. McAllister et al., Am. J. Hum. Genet. 61 (Suppl.) (1997), 1387,
16. A.P. Blanchard et al., Biosens. And Bioelectron. 11 (1996) 687.
17. G. J. Zhang et al, Anal. Lett. 32, 2725 (1999).
18. F. Kleinjung et al, Anal. Chim. Acta 350, 51 (1997).
19. A. H. Uddin et al, Nucleic Acids Res. 25, 4139 (1997).
20. .P. A. E. Piunno et al., Anal. Chem. 67, 2635 (1995).
21. F. F. Bier et al., Sens. Actuators B Chem. 38, 78 (1997).
22. A. P. Abel et al., Anal. Chem. 68, 2905 (1996).
23. J. A. Ferguson et al., Nature Biotechnol. 14, 1681 (1996).
24. P. Pantano and D. R. Walt, Chem. Mater. 8, 2832 (1996).
25. K. L. Michael et al., Anal. Chem. 70, 1242 (1998).
26. R. J. Fulton et al., Clin. Chem. 443, 1749 (1997). 27. M. Chee and D. R. Walt, unpublished results.
28. F. J. Steemers et al., Nature Biotechnol. 18, 91 (2000).
29. N. P. Gerry et al, J. Mol. Biol. 292, 251 (1999).
30. J. Liu and W. H. Tan, Anal. Chem. 71, 5054 (1999).
31. D.R. Walt, Science 287, (2000) 451.
[14] "Nonlinear optical measurement of membrane potential around single molecules at selected cellular sites", G. Peleg, A. Lewis, M. Linial, L.M. Loew, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. V. 96, 1999, 6700-6704.
[15] G. Boyd, T. Rasing, R. Leite, Y. Shen (1984) Phys. Rev. B 30, 519-526.
[16] C, Chen, T.F. Heinz, D. Richard, Y. Shen (1981) Phys. Rev. Lett. 46, 1010-1012.
Milan Mrksich and George M. Whitesides, "Using Self- Assembled Monolayers to Understand the Interactions of Man-Made Surfaces with Proteins and Cells," Annu. Rev. Biophys. Biomol. Struct., 1996, 25:55-78.
V.G. Cheung et al., "Making and reading microanays", Nature Genetics (Suppl.), 1999, 21: 15-19.
L.A. Chrisey, G.U. Lee, C.E. O'Fenall, "Covalent Attachment of Synthetic DNA to Self- Assembled Monolayer Films", Nucleic Acids Research 24, 3031, (1996).
Gabriel P. Lopez, Mark W. Albers, Stuart L. Schreiber, Reed Carroll, Ernest Peralta and George M. Whitesides, Convenient Methods for Patterning the Adhesion of Mammalian Cells to Surfaces Using Self- Assembled Monolayers of Alkanethiolates on Gold, J. Am. Chem. Soc, 1993, 115, 5877-5878.
Rahul Singhvi, Amit Kumar, gabriel P. Lopez, Gregory N. Stephanopoulos, Daniel LC. Wang, George M. Whitesides and Donald E. frigber, "Engineering Cell Shape and Function," Science, vol. 264, Apr. 29, 1994, 696-698. Levicky R, Heme TM, Tarlov MJ, and Satija SK (1998). "Using Self-Assembly to Control the Stracture of DNA Monolayers on Gold: A Neutron Reflectivity Study." Journal of the American Chemical Society 120: 9787-9792.
Ion channel, G-protein receptor references K.S. Glauner, L.M. Mannuzzu, C.S. Gandhi, E.Y. Isacoff, "Spectrosopic mapping of voltage sensor movement in the Shaker potassium channel", Nature 402, 813 (1999).
P. Ghanouni et al., "Agonist-induced conformational changes in the G-protein- coupling domain of the β2 adrenergic receptor", Proc. Natl.. Acad. Sci., v.98, 5997 (2001).
P. Ghanouni et al., "Functionally Different Agonists Induce Distinct Conformations in the G Protein Coupling Domain of the β2 Adrenergic Receptor", Journal of Biological Chemistry, v.276, 24433 (2001).
E. Perozo et al., "Structural reanangements underlying K+ channel activation gating.", Science 285, 73-79 (1999).
Yellen, G., :"The moving parts of voltage-gated ion channels", Q. Rev. Biophys. 31, 239 (1998).
Aggarwal, S. et al., "Contribution of the S4 segment to gating charge in the Shaker K+ channel", Neuron 16, 1169 (1996).
Larsson et al., "Transmembrane movement of the Shaker K+ channel S4", Neuron 16, 387 (1996).
Mannuzzu, L.M. et al., "Direct physical measure of conformational rearrangement underlying potassium channel gating", Science 271, 213 (1996).
Cha, A. and Bezanilla, F., "Characterizing voltage-dependent conformational changes in the Shaker K+ channel with fluorescence", Neuron 19, 1127 (1997).
C. Bieri et al., "Micropatterned immobilization of a G protein-coupled receptor and direct detection of G protein activation", Nature Biotechnology, 17, 1105 (1999).
Helmreich, E.J.M. and Hofmann, KP, "Stracture and Function of Proteins in G- protein-coupled signal transfer", Biochimica et Biophysica Acta 1286, 285 (1996). Mannuzzu et al. (1996) Science 271, 213-216, Direct physical measure of conformational reanangement underlying potassium channel gating.
Gether et al. (1995) J Biol Chem 270, 28628-28275, Fluorescent labeling of purified β2 adrenergic receptor.
Turcatti et al. (1996) J Biol Chem 271, 19991-19998, Probing the Stracture and
Function of the Tachykinin Neurokinin-Receptor through Biosynthetic incoφoration of flourescent amino acids at specific sites.
Liu et al. (1996) Biochemistry 35, 11865-11873, Site-Directed fluorescent labeling of P-glycoprotein on cysteine residues in the nucleotide binding domains. Lodish, Harvey, et al., Molecular Cell Biology (4th ed., 2000).

Claims

WHAT IS CLAIMED IS :
1. A method for screening one or more candidate binding partners for binding to a test molecule comprising:
(a) applying an external force field to a sample in homogeneous phase, said sample comprising a test molecule exposed to one or more candidate binding partners;
(b) illuminating said sample with one or more light beams at one or more fundamental frequencies; and
(c) measuring one or more physical properties of a nonlinear optical light beam emanating from said sample; wherein a change in the value of said one or more physical properties measured in step (c) relative to a value for said one or more physical properties measured in the absence of exposure of said test molecule to said one or more candidate binding partners indicates that said one or more candidate binding partners bind said test molecule.
2. The method of claim 1 , wherein said test molecule is bound to one or more nonlinear-active labels.
3. The method of claim 2 further comprising the step of binding said labels to said test molecule prior to step (a).
4. The method of claim 2, wherein said one or more labels are covalently attached.
5. The method of claim 2, wherein said test molecule is non-covalently bound to a molecule that is nonlinear-active.
6. The method of claim 2, wherein said test molecule and one of said nonlinear- active labels form a fusion protein.
7. The method of claim 2, wherein said one or more labels comprise green fluorescent protein or derivatives or mutants of said protein that are nonlinear-active.
8. The method of claim 2, wherein said labels are caged.
9. The method of claim 2, wherein said labels are molecular beacon analogues.
10. The method of claim 2, wherein ultraviolet light acts to cleave a bond between said nonlinear-active label and said test molecule.
11. The method of claim 2, wherein the nonlinear-active properties of said labels can be changed by exposure to a chemical agent or one or more light beam.
12. The method of claim 1, wherein said candidate binding partners are bound to one or more nonlinear-active labels.
13. The method of claim 12 further comprising the step of binding said labels to said candidate binding partners prior to step (a).
14. The method of claim 12, wherein said one or more labels are covalently attached.
15. The method of claim 12, wherein said candidate binding partners are non- covalently bound to a molecule that is nonlinear-active.
16. The method of claim 12, wherein said candidate binding partner and one of said nonlinear-active labels form a fusion protein.
17. The method of claim 12, wherein said one or more labels comprise green fluorescent protem or derivatives or mutants of said protein that are nonlinear-active.
18. The method of claim 12, wherein said labels are caged.
19. The method of claim 12, wherein said labels are molecular beacon analogues.
20. The method of claim 12, wherein ultraviolet light acts to cleave a bond between said nonlinear-active label and said candidate binding partners.
21. The method of claim 12, wherein the nonlinear-active properties of said labels can be changed by exposure to a chemical agent or one or more light beam.
22. The method of claim 1 , wherein the one or more physical properties are intensities.
23. The method of claim 1 , wherein the one or more physical properties are polarization directions.
24. The method of claim 1 , wherein said test molecule is nonlinear-active in the absence of an exogenous nonlinear-active label bound to the test molecule.
25. The method of claim 1 , wherein said one or more light beams have a wavelength in the range of 10 to 10000 nanometers.
26. The method of claim 1, which further comprises comparing the value of said physical properties measured in step (c) with the value of the physical properties measured in the absence of exposure to said one or more candidate binding partners.
27. The method of claim 1, wherein said test molecule or said candidate binding partners are bound to at least two distinguishable nonlinear-active lahels, wherein said one or more light beams are multiple light beams, and step (c) comprises measuring one or more physical properties of at least two nonlinear optical light beams emanating from said sample.
28. The method of claim 1 , wherein said test molecule is purified.
29. The method of claim 1 , wherein said test molecule is a G protein-coupled receptor (GPCR).
30. The method of claim 29, wherein said GPCR is bound to a nonlinear-active label.
31. The method of claim 1 , wherein said test molecule is a labeled GPCR.
32. The method of any claims 1 , wherein said nonlinear optical light beam is second harmonic generated light.
33. The method of claim 1, wherein said external force field is a magnetic field, fluid flow or some combination thereof.
34. The method of claim 33, wherein said external force field is an electric field that is stationary in time, time- varying, or some combination thereof.
35. The method of claim 1 , wherein said one or more nonlinear optical light beams are second harmonics, third harmonics, sum frequencies or difference frequencies of the one or more fundamental frequencies.
36. The method of claim 1, which further comprises measuring said one or more physical properties of the nonlinear optical light beam in the absence of either the test molecules or the candidate binding partners in said sample.
37. The method of claim 1, wherein the step of illuminating involves reflection, transmission, evanescent wave, multiple internal reflection, near-field optics, confocal, optical cavity, planar waveguide, fiber-optic or dielectric-slab waveguide.
38. The method of claim 1 , wherein the step of measuring involves reflection, transmission, evanescent wave, multiple internal reflection, near-field optics, confocal, optical cavity, planar waveguide, fiber-optic or dielectric-slab waveguide.
39. The method of claim 1, wherein said one or more candidate binding partners are molecular beacon analogues.
40. The method of claim 1, wherein the step of measuring is repeated over different periods of time.
41. The method of claim 1 , wherein the one or more physical properties of the nonlinear optical light beam measured indicate thermodynamic or kinetic properties of said binding.
42. The method of claim 1, wherein said binding involves a chemical bond, an electrostatic force, physisoφtion, chemical affinity, chemisoφtion, molecular recognition, physico-chemical binding, hydrogen bond or hybridization process.
43. The method of claim 1 , wherein the nonlinear optical light beam is circularly polarized.
44. The method of claim 1 , wherein the sample further comprises one or more substances selected from the group consisting of decorator molecules, decorator particles, enhancers, modulators, inhibitors, molecular beacon analogues, and indicators.
45. The method of claim 1 , wherein the mode of generation, collection or detection of the nonlinear optical light beam is one or more modes selected from the group consisting of reflection, transmission, evanescent wave, multiple internal reflection, near- field optical techniques, confocal, optical cavity, planar waveguide, fiber-optic and dielectric- slab waveguide, and near-field techniques.
46. The method of claim 1, wherein said test molecule is a drug or blocking agent.
.
47. A method for screening one or more candidate binding partners for binding to a test molecule comprising:
(a) applying an external force field to a sample at an interface, said sample comprising a test molecule exposed to one or more candidate binding partners, wherein one or more nonlinear active labels or one or more decorators are bound to one or both of said test molecule and candidate binding partners, and wherein said sample is not nonlinear active in the absence of said one or more nonlinear active labels or one or more decorators; (b) illuminating said sample with one or more light beams at one or more fundamental frequencies; and
(c) measuring one or more physical properties of a nonlinear optical light beam emanating from said sample; wherein a change in the value of said one or more physical properties measured in step (c) relative to a value for said one or more physical properties measured in the absence of exposure of said test molecule to said one or more candidate binding partners indicates that said one or more candidate binding partners bind said test molecule.
48. The method of claim 47, wherein said test molecule is bound to one or more nonlinear-active labels.
49. The method of claim 48 further comprising the step of binding said labels to said test molecule prior to step (a).
50. The method of claim 48, wherein said one or more labels are covalently attached.
51. The method of claim 48, wherein said test molecule is non-covalently bound to a molecule that is nonlinear-active.
52. The method of claim 48, wherein said test molecule and one of said nonlinear- active labels form a fusion protein.
53. The method of claim 48, wherein said one or more labels comprise green fluorescent protein or derivatives or mutants of said protein that are nonlinear-active.
54. The method of claim 48, wherein said labels are caged.
55. The method of claim 48, wherein said labels are molecular beacon analogues.
56. The method of claim 48, wherein ultraviolet light acts to cleave a bond between said nonlinear-active label and said test molecule.
57. The method of claim 48, wherein the nonlinear-active properties of said labels can be changed by exposure to a chemical agent or one or more light beam.
58. The method of claim 47, wherein said candidate binding partners are bound to one or more nonlinear-active labels.
59. The method of claim 58 further comprising the step of binding said labels to said candidate binding partners prior to step (a).
60. The method of claim 58, wherein said one or more labels are covalently attached.
61. The method of claim 58, wherein said candidate binding partners are non- covalently bound to a molecule that is nonlinear-active.
62. The method of claim 58, wherein said candidate binding partner and one of said nonlinear-active labels form a fusion protein.
63. The method of claim 58, wherein said one or more labels comprise green fluorescent protein or derivatives or mutants of said protein that are nonlinear-active.
64. The method of claim 58, wherein said labels are caged.
65. The method of claim 58, wherein said labels are molecular beacon analogues.
66. The method of claim 58, wherein ultraviolet light acts to cleave a bond between said nonlinear-active label and said candidate binding partners.
67. The method of claim 58, wherein the nonlinear-active properties of said labels can be changed by exposure to a chemical agent or one or more light beam.
68. The method of claim 47, wherein the one or more physical properties are intensities.
69. The method of claim 47, wherein the one or more physical properties are polarization directions.
70. The method of claim 47, wherein said one or more light beams have a wavelength in the range of 10 to 10000 nanometers.
71. The method of claim 47, which further comprises comparing the value of said physical properties measured in step (c) with the value of the physical properties measured in the absence of exposure to said one or more candidate binding partners.
72. The method of claim 47, wherein said test molecule or said candidate binding partners are bound to at least two distinguishable nonlinear-active labels, wherein said one or more light beams are multiple light beams, and step (c) comprises measuring one or more physical properties of at least two nonlinear optical light beams emanating from said sample.
73. The method of claim 47, wherein said test molecule is purified.
74. The method of claim 47, wherein said test molecule is a G protein-coupled receptor (GPCR).
75. The method of claim. 74, wherein said GPCR is bound to said one or more nonlinear-active labels.
76. The method of claim 47, wherein said test molecule is a labeled GPCR.
77. The method of any claims 47, wherein said nonlinear optical light beam is second harmonic generated light.
78. The method of claim 47, wherein said external force field is a magnetic field, fluid flow or some combination thereof.
79. The method of claim 78, wherein said external force field is an electric field that is stationary in time, time- varying, or some combination thereof.
80. The method of claim 47, wherein said one or more nonlinear optical light beams are second harmonics, third harmonics, sum frequencies or difference frequencies of the one or more fundamental frequencies.
81. The method of claim 47, wherein said test molecule is part of a cell, liposome or membrane surface.
82. The method of claim 47, which further comprises measuring said one or more physical properties of the nonlinear optical light beam in the absence of either the test molecules or the candidate binding partners in said sample.
83. The method of claim 47, wherein said test molecule is part of a natural or artificial membrane.
84. The method of claim 47, wherein said one or more candidate binding partners are part of a supported membrane, liposome or a biological cell.
85. The method of claim 47, wherein said one or more candidate binding partners are coupled or conjugated in vitro to a solid surface.
86. The method according to claim 85, wherein said solid surface supports a phospholipid or artificial bilayer membrane.
87. The method according to claim 86, wherein said phospholipid or artificial bilayer comprises membrane proteins.
88. The method of claim 47, wherein said one or more candidate binding partners comprise a portion of a surface of biological cells, liposomes, vesicles, beads, metal particles, or non-metal particles.
89. The method of claim 47, wherein said one or more candidate binding partners are patterned on a solid surface.
90. The method of claim 89, wherein said oligonucleotides or polynucleotides are attached to regions on the surface of size nanometers to microns in dimension.
91. The method of claim 47, wherein said one or more candidate binding partners are patterned in an anay format on a solid surface.
92. The method of claim 91 , wherein said one or more candidate binding partners comprise a plurality of different oligonucleotides or polynucleotides, said different oligonucleotides or polynucleotides each comprising a different sequence and attached to a different region on a solid surface.
93. The method of claim 92, wherein the oligonucleotides or polynucleotides are patterned in a microarray format.
94. The method of claim 47, wherein said one or more candidate binding partners comprise a plurality of different proteins, said different proteins each comprising a different amino acid sequence and attached to a different region on a solid surface.
95. The method of claim 94, wherein said one or more candidate binding partners comprising a different amino acid sequence are each attached to a different region on a surface of size 1 to 1000 nanometers.
96. The method of claim 94, wherein said proteins are attached to regions on the surface of size 1 to 1000 microns.
97. The method of claim 47, wherein said one or more candidate binding partners comprise proteins patterned in an array format.
98. The method of claim 47, wherein the step of illuminating involves reflection, transmission, evanescent wave, multiple internal reflection, near-field optics, confocal, optical cavity, planar waveguide, fiber-optic or dielectric-slab waveguide.
99. The method of claim 47, wherein the step of measuring involves reflection, transmission, evanescent wave, multiple internal reflection, near-field optics, confocal, optical cavity, planar waveguide, fiber-optic or dielectric-slab waveguide.
100. The method of claim 47, wherein said one or more candidate binding partners are molecular beacon analogues.
101. The method of claim 47, wherein said one or more candidate binding partners are attached to a surface.
102. The method of claim 101, wherein said surface is a metal surface, a semiconductor surface, a glass surface, a latex surface, a gel substrate, a fiber-optic surface, a silica surface or a bead surface.
103. The method of claim 101, wherein said surface is a non-planar surface.
104. The method of claim 101, wherein said surface is chemically derivatized.
105. The method of claim 104, wherein said surface is derivatized with a self- assembled monolayer.
106. The method of claim 104, wherein said surface is derivatized with an organosilane.
107. The method of claim 47, wherein the step of measuring is repeated over different periods of time.
108. The method of claim 47, wherein said one or more candidate binding partners is attached to a self-assembled monolayer.
109. The method of claim 108, wherein the self-assembled monolayer is in the chemical family of silanes or terminal-functional silanes.
110. The method of claim 47, wherein the one or more physical properties of the nonlinear optical light beam measured indicate thermodynamic or kinetic properties of said binding.
111. The method of claim 47, wherein said binding involves a chemical bond, an electrostatic force, physisoφtion, chemical affinity, chemisoφtion, molecular recognition, physico-chemical binding, hydrogen bond or hybridization process.
112. The method of claim 47, wherein the nonlinear optical light beam is circularly polarized.
113. The method of claim 47, wherein the sample is on an interface comprising a cell, liposome, vesicle surface, or a solid surface.
114. The method of claim 47, wherein the sample further comprises one or more substances selected from the group consisting of decorator molecules, decorator particles, enhancers, modulators, inhibitors, molecular beacon analogues, and indicators.
115. The method of claim 47, wherein the mode of generation, collection or detection of the nonlinear optical light beam is one or more modes selected from the group consisting of reflection, transmission, evanescent wave, multiple internal reflection, near- field optical techniques, confocal, optical cavity, planar waveguide, fiber-optic and dielectric- slab waveguide, and near-field techniques.
116. The method of claim 47, wherein said test molecule is a drag or blocking agent.
117. A method for screening one or more candidate modulator molecules for the ability to modulate an interaction between a test molecule and its binding partner comprising:
(a) applying an external force field to a sample in homogeneous phase, said sample comprising said test molecule exposed to (i) said binding partner, and (ii) said one or more candidate modulator molecules;
(a) illuminating said sample with one or more light beams at one or more fundamental frequencies; and
(b) measuring one or more physical properties of a nonlinear optical light beam emanating from said sample; wherein a change in the value of said one or more physical properties measured in step (c) relative to the value for said one or more physical properties measured in the absence of exposure to said one or more candidate modulator molecules indicates that said one or more candidate modulator molecules modulate the interaction between said test molecule and its binding partner.
118. The method of claim 117, wherein the one or more physical properties are intensities.
119. The method of claim 117, wherein the one or more physical properties are polarization directions.
120. The method of claim 117, wherein said test molecule is nonlinear-active in the absence of an exogenous nonlinear-active label bound to the test molecule.
121. The method of claim 117, wherein said one or more light beams have a wavelength in the range of 10 to 10000 nanometers.
122. The method of any claims 117, wherein said nonlinear optical light beam is second harmonic generated light.
123. The method of claim 117, wherein the step of illuminating involves reflection, transmission, evanescent wave, multiple internal reflection, near-field optics, confocal, optical cavity, planar waveguide, fiber-optic or dielectric-slab waveguide.
124. The method of claim 117, wherein the step of measuring involves reflection, transmission, evanescent wave, multiple internal reflection, near-field optics, confocal, optical cavity, planar waveguide, fiber-optic or dielectric-slab waveguide.
125. The method of claim 117, wherein the step of measuring is repeated over different periods of time.
126. The method of claim 117, wherein the one or more physical properties of the nonlinear optical light beam measured indicate thermodynamic or kinetic properties of said binding.
127. The method of claim 117, wherein said binding involves a chemical bond, an electrostatic force, physisoφtion, chemical affinity, chemisoφtion, molecular recognition, physico-chemical binding, hydrogen bond or hybridization process.
128. The method of claim 117, wherein the sample further comprises one or more substances selected from the group consisting of decorator molecules, decorator particles, enhancers, modulators, inhibitors, molecular beacon analogues, and indicators.
129. The method of claim 117, wherein the mode of generation, collection or detection of the nonlinear optical light beam is one or more modes selected from the group consisting of reflection, transmission, evanescent wave, multiple internal reflection, near- field optical techniques, confocal, optical cavity, planar waveguide, fiber-optic and dielectric- slab waveguide, and near-field techniques.
130. The method of claim 117, wherein said test molecule is purified.
131. The method of claim 117, wherein said test molecule is a G protein-coupled receptor (GPCR).
132. The method of claim 117, wherein said GPCR is bound to a nonlinear-active label.
133. The method of claim 117, wherein said test molecule is a labeled GPCR.
134. The method of claim 117, wherein said external force field is a magnetic field, fluid flow or some combination thereof.
135. The method of claim 134, wherein said external force field is an electric field that is stationary in time, time-varying, or some combination thereof.
136. The method of claim 117, wherein said one or more nonlinear optical light beams are second harmonics, third harmonics, sum frequencies or difference frequencies of the one or more fundamental frequencies.
137. The method of claim 117, wherein said sample further comprises one or more candidate binding partners.
138. The method of claim 137, which further comprises comparing the value of said physical properties measured in step (c) with the value of the physical properties measured in the absence of exposure to said one or more candidate binding partners.
139. The method of claim 137, wherein said test molecule or said candidate binding partners are bound to at least two distinguishable nonlinear-active labels, wherein said one or more light beams are multiple light beams, and step (c) comprises measuring one or more physical properties of at least two nonlinear optical light beams emanating from said sample.
140. The method of claim 137, wherein said one or more candidate binding partners are molecular beacon analogues.
141. A method for screening one or more candidate modulator molecules for the ability to modulate an interaction between a test molecule and its binding partner comprising: (a) applying an external force field to a sample at an interface, said sample comprising said test molecule exposed to (i) said binding partner, (ii) said one or more candidate modulator molecules, wherein one or more nonlinear active labels or one or more decorators are bound to one or both of said test molecule and candidate binding partners, and wherein said sample is not nonlinear active in the absence of said one or more nonlinear active labels or one or more decorators;
(b) illuminating a sample with one or more light beams at one or more fundamental frequencies; and
(c) measuring one or more physical properties of a nonlinear optical light beam emanating from said sample; wherein a change in the value of said one or more physical properties measured in step (c) relative to the value for said one or more physical properties measured in the absence of exposure to said one or more candidate modulator molecules indicates that said one or more candidate modulator molecules modulate the interaction between said test molecule and its binding partner.
142. The method of claim 141, wherein the one or more physical properties are intensities.
143. The method of claim 141, wherein the one or more physical properties are polarization directions.
144. The method of claim 141 , wherein said test molecule is nonlinear-active in the absence of an exogenous nonlinear-active label bound to the test molecule.
145. The method of claim 141, wherein said one or more light beams have a wavelength in the range of 10 to 10000 nanometers.
146. The method of any claims 141, wherein said nonlinear optical light beam is second harmonic generated light.
147. The method of claim 141, wherein the step of illuminating involves reflection, transmission, evanescent wave, multiple internal reflection, near-field optics, confocal, optical cavity, planar waveguide, fiber-optic or dielectric-slab waveguide.
148. The method of claim 141, wherein the step of measuring involves reflection, transmission, evanescent wave, multiple internal reflection, near-field optics, confocal, optical cavity, planar waveguide, fiber-optic or dielectric-slab waveguide.
149. The method of claim 141, wherein the step of measuring is repeated over different periods of time.
150. The method of claim 141 , wherein the one or more physical properties of the nonlinear optical light beam measured indicate thermodynamic or kinetic properties of said binding.
151. The method of claim 141, wherein said binding involves a chemical bond, an electrostatic force, physisoφtion, chemical affinity, chemisoφtion, molecular recognition, physico-chemical binding, hydrogen bond or hybridization process.
152. The method of claim 141, wherein the sample further comprises one or more substances selected from the group consisting of decorator molecules, decorator particles, enhancers, modulators, inhibitors, molecular beacon analogues, and indicators.
153. The method of claim 141, wherein the mode of generation, collection or detection of the nonlinear optical light beam is one or more modes selected from the group consisting of reflection, transmission, evanescent wave, multiple internal reflection, near- field optical techniques, confocal, optical cavity, planar waveguide, fiber-optic and dielectric- slab waveguide, and near-field techniques.
154. The method of claim 141, wherein said test molecule is purified.
155. The method of claim 141, wherein said test molecule is a G protein-coupled receptor (GPCR).
156. The method of claim 141, wherein said GPCR is bound to said one or more nonlinear-active labels.
157. The method of claim 141, wherein said test molecule is a labeled GPCR.
158. The method of claim 141, wherein said external force field is a magnetic field, fluid flow or some combination thereof.
159. The method of claim 158, wherein said external force field is an electric field that is stationary in time, time- varying, or some combination thereof.
160. The method of claim 141, wherein said one or more nonlinear optical light beams are second harmonics, third harmonics, sum frequencies or difference frequencies of the one or more fundamental frequencies.
161. The method of claim 141, wherein said sample further comprises one or more candidate binding partners.
162. The method of claim 161, which further comprises comparing the value of said physical properties measured in step (c) with the value of the physical properties measured in the absence of exposure to said one or more candidate binding partners.
163. The method of claim 161, wherein said test molecule or said candidate binding partners are bound to at least two distinguishable nonlinear-active labels, wherein said one or more light beams are multiple light beams, and step (c) comprises measuring one or more physical properties of at least two nonlinear optical light beams emanating from said sample.
164. The method of claim 161, wherein said one or more candidate binding partners are patterned in an anay format on a solid surface.
165. The method of claim 161, wherein said one or more candidate binding partners comprise a plurality of different oligonucleotides or polynucleotides, said different oligonucleotides or polynucleotides each comprising a different sequence and attached to a different region on a solid surface.
166. The method of claim 165, wherein the oligonucleotides or polynucleotides are patterned in a microanay format.
167. The method of claim 161, wherein said one or more candidate binding partners comprise proteins patterned in an array format.
168. The method of claim 161, wherein said one or more candidate binding partners are molecular beacon analogues.
169. The method of claim 161, wherein said one or more candidate binding partners are attached to a surface.
170. The method of claim 169, wherein said surface is a metal surface, a semiconductor surface, a glass surface, a latex surface, a gel substrate, a fiber-optic surface, a silica surface or a bead surface.
171. The method of claim 169, wherein said surface is a non-planar surface.
172. The method of claim 169, wherein said surface is chemically derivatized.
173. The method of claim 172, wherein said surface is derivatized with a self- assembled monolayer.
174. The method of claim 172, wherein said surface is derivatized with an organosilane.
175. A method for detecting a conformational change in a test molecule upon binding of the test molecule to a binding partner comprising:
(a) contacting said test molecule with one or more candidate binding partners, wherein the test molecule or the one or more candidate binding partners is labeled with a nonlinear-active moiety that is not native to the test molecule or the one or more candidate binding partners, respectively; (b) applying an external force field to said contacted test molecule;
(c) illuminating said contacted test molecule with one or more light beams at one or more fundamental frequencies; and
(d) measuring one or more physical properties of a nonlinear optical light beam emanating from said sample; wherein a change in the value of said one or more physical properties measured in step (d) relative to the value for said one or more physical properties measured in the absence of said one or more candidate binding partners indicates that at least one of said one or more candidate binding partners bind to said test molecule and that said binding induces a conformational change in said candidate binding partners, in said test molecule, or in both said candidate binding partners and said test molecule.
176. The method of claim 175, wherein the one or more physical properties are intensities.
177. The method of claim 175, wherein the one or more physical properties are polarization directions.
178. The method of claim 175, wherein said test molecule is nonlinear-active in the absence of an exogenous nonlinear-active label bound to the test molecule.
179. The method of claim 175, wherein said one or more light beams have a wavelength in the range of 10 to 10000 nanometers.
180. The method of claim 175, which further comprises comparing the value of said physical properties measured in step (d) with the value of the physical properties measured in the absence of exposure to said one or more candidate binding partners.
181. The method of claim 175, wherein said test molecule or said candidate binding partners are bound to at least two distinguishable nonlinear-active labels, wherein said one or more light beams are multiple light beams, and step (d) comprises measuring one or more physical properties of at least two nonlinear optical light beams emanating from said sample.
182. The method of claim 175, wherein said test molecule is purified.
183. The method of claim 175, wherein said test molecule is a G protein-coupled receptor (GPCR).
184. The method of claim 183, wherein said GPCR is bound to a nonlinear-active label.
185. The method of any claims 175, wherein said nonlinear optical light beam is second harmonic generated light.
186. The method of claim 175, wherein said external force field is a magnetic field, fluid flow or some combination thereof.
187. The method of claim 186, wherein said external force field is an electric field that is stationary in time, time- varying, or some combination thereof.
188. The method of claim 175, wherein said one or more nonlinear optical light beams are second harmonics, third harmonics, sum frequencies or difference frequencies of the one or more fundamental frequencies.
189. The method of claim 175, wherein said one or more candidate binding partners are patterned in an anay format on a solid surface.
190. The method of claim 189, wherein said one or more candidate binding partners comprise a plurality of different oligonucleotides or polynucleotides, said different oligonucleotides or polynucleotides each comprising a different sequence and attached to a different region on a solid surface.
191. The method of claim 189, wherein the oligonucleotides or polynucleotides are patterned in a microanay format.
192. The method of claim 175, wherein said one or more candidate binding partners comprise proteins patterned in an array format.
193. The method of claim 175, wherein the step of illuminating involves reflection, transmission, evanescent wave, multiple internal reflection, near-field optics, confocal, optical cavity, planar waveguide, fiber-optic or dielectric-slab waveguide.
194. The method of claim 175, wherein the step of measuring involves reflection, transmission, evanescent wave, multiple internal reflection, near-field optics, confocal, optical cavity, planar waveguide, fiber-optic or dielectric-slab waveguide.
195. The method of claim 175, wherein said one or more candidate binding partners are molecular beacon analogues.
196. The method of claim 175, wherein said one or more candidate binding partners are attached to a surface.
197. The method of claim 196, wherein said surface is a metal surface, a semiconductor surface, a glass surface, a latex surface, a gel substrate, a fiber-optic surface, a silica surface or a bead surface.
.
198. The method of claim 196, wherein said surface is a non-planar surface.
199. The method of claim 196, wherein said surface is chemically derivatized.
200. The method of claim 199, wherein said surface is derivatized with a self- assembled monolayer.
201. The method of claim 199, wherein said surface is derivatized with an organosilane.
202. The method of claim 175, wherein the step of measuring is repeated over different periods of time.
203. The method of claim 175, wherein said one or more candidate binding partners is attached to a self-assembled monolayer.
204. The method of claim 203, wherein the self-assembled monolayer is in the chemical family of silanes or terminal-functional silanes.
205. The method of claim 175, wherein the one or more physical properties of the nonlinear optical light beam measured indicate thermodynamic or kinetic properties of said binding.
206. The method of claim 175, wherein said binding involves a chemical bond, an electrostatic force, physisoφtion, chemical affinity, chemisoφtion, molecular recognition, physico-chemical binding, hydrogen bond or hybridization process.
207. The method of claim 175, wherein the sample further comprises one or more substances selected from the group consisting of decorator molecules, decorator particles, enhancers, modulators, inhibitors, molecular beacon analogues, and indicators.
208. The method of claim 175, wherein the mode of generation, collection or detection of the nonlinear optical light beam is one or more modes selected from the group consisting of reflection, transmission, evanescent wave, multiple internal reflection, near- field optical techniques, confocal, optical cavity, planar waveguide, fiber-optic and dielectric- slab waveguide, and near-field techniques.
209. The method of claim 175, wherein a nonlinear-active label is covalently bound to said test molecule or to said one or more candidate binding partners.
210. The method of claim 175, wherein a nonlinear-active label is covalently bound to a molecule that is noncovalently bound to said test molecule or to said one or more candidate binding partners.
211. The method of claim 175, which further comprises comparing the value of said one or more physical properties measured in step (d) relative to the value of the one or more physical properties measured in the absence of said one or more candidate binding partners.
212. A method for detecting the degree or extent of the conformational change induced by binding between a test molecule and one or more candidate binding partners comprising:
(a) contacting said test molecule with one or more candidate binding partners, wherein the test molecule or the one or more candidate binding partners is labeled with a nonlinear-active moiety that is not native to the test molecule or the one or more candidate binding partners, respectively; (b) applying an external force field to said contacted test molecule;
(c) illuminating said contacted test molecule with one or more light beams at one or more fundamental frequencies; and
(d) measuring one or more physical properties of a nonlinear optical light beam emanating from said sample; wherein the extent of the change in the value of said one or more physical properties measured in step (d) relative to the value for said one or more physical properties measured in the absence of said one or more candidate binding partners indicates the degree or extent of the conformational change that said binding induces.
213. The method of claim 212, wherein the one or more physical properties are intensities.
214. The method of claim 212, wherein the one or more physical properties are polarization directions.
215. The method of claim 212, wherein said test molecule is nonlinear-active in the absence of an exogenous nonlinear-active label bound to the test molecule.
216. The method of claim 212, wherein said one or more light beams have a wavelength in the range of 10 to 10000 nanometers.
217. The method of claim 212, which further comprises comparing the value of said physical properties measured in step (d) with the value of the physical properties measured in the absence of exposure to said one or more candidate binding partners.
218. The method of claim 217, wherein said test molecule or said candidate binding partners are bound to at least two distinguishable nonlinear-active labels, wherein said one or more light beams are multiple light beams, and step (d) comprises measuring one or more physical properties of at least two nonlinear optical light beams emanating from said sample.
219. The method of claim 212, wherein said test molecule is purified.
220. The method of claim 212, wherein said test molecule is a G protein-coupled receptor (GPCR).
221. The method of claim 220, wherein said GPCR is bound to a nonlinear-active label.
222. The method of any claims 212, wherein said nonlinear optical light beam is second harmonic generated light.
223. The method of claim 212, wherein said external force field is a magnetic field, fluid flow, or some combination thereof.
224. The method of claim 223, wherein said external force field is an electric field that is stationary in time, time- varying, or some combination thereof.
225. The method of claim 212, wherein said one or more nonlinear optical light beams are second harmonics, third harmonics, sum frequencies or difference frequencies of the one or more fundamental frequencies.
226. The method of claim 212, wherein said one or more candidate binding partners are patterned in an array format on a solid surface.
227. The method of claim 226, wherein said one or more candidate binding partners comprise a plurality of different oligonucleotides or polynucleotides, said different oligonucleotides or polynucleotides each comprising a different sequence and attached to a different region on a solid surface.
228. The method of claim 226, wherein the oligonucleotides or polynucleotides are patterned in a microanay format.
229. The method of claim 212, wherein said one or more candidate binding partners comprise proteins patterned in an anay format.
230. The method of claim 212, wherein the step of illuminating involves reflection, transmission, evanescent wave, multiple internal reflection, near-field optics, confocal, optical cavity, planar waveguide, fiber-optic or dielectric-slab waveguide.
231. The method of claim 212, wherein the step of measuring involves reflection, transmission, evanescent wave, multiple internal reflection, near-field optics, confocal, optical cavity, planar waveguide, fiber-optic or dielectric-slab waveguide.
232. The method of claim 212, wherein said one or more candidate binding partners are molecular beacon analogues.
233. The method of claim 212, wherein said one or more candidate binding partners are attached to a surface.
234. The method of claim 233, wherein said surface is a metal surface, a semiconductor surface, a glass surface, a latex surface, a gel substrate, a fiber-optic surface, a silica surface or a bead surface.
235. The method of claim 233, wherein said surface is a non-planar surface.
236. The method of claim 233, wherein said surface is chemically derivatized.
237. The method of claim 236, wherein said surface is derivatized with a self- assembled monolayer.
238. The method of claim 236, wherein said surface is derivatized with an organosilane.
239. The method of claim 212, wherein the step of measuring is repeated over different periods of time.
240. The method of claim 212, wherein said one or more candidate binding partners is attached to a self-assembled monolayer.
241. The method of claim 240, wherein the self-assembled monolayer is in the chemical family of silanes or terminal-functional silanes.
242. The method of claim 212, wherein the one or more physical properties of the nonlinear optical light beam measured indicate thermodynamic or kinetic properties of said binding.
243. The method of claim 212, wherein said binding involves a chemical bond, an electrostatic force, physisoφtion, chemical affinity, chemisoφtion, molecular recognition, physico-chemical binding, hydrogen bond or hybridization process.
244. The method of claim 212, wherein the sample further comprises one or more substances selected from the group consisting of decorator molecules, decorator particles, enhancers, modulators, inhibitors, molecular beacon analogues, and indicators.
245. The method of claim 212, wherein the mode of generation, collection or detection of the nonlinear optical light beam is one or more modes selected from the group consisting of reflection, transmission, evanescent wave, multiple internal reflection, near- field optical techniques, confocal, optical cavity, planar waveguide, fiber-optic and dielectric- slab waveguide, and near-field techniques.
246. The method of claim 212, wherein a nonlinear-active label is covalently bound to said test molecule or to said one or more candidate binding partners.
247. The method of claim 212, wherein a nonlinear-active label is covalently bound to a molecule that is noncovalently bound to said test molecule or to said one or more candidate binding partners.
248. The method of claim 212, which further comprises comparing the value of said one or more physical properties measured in step (d) relative to the value of said one or more physical properties measured in the absence of said one or more candidate binding partners.
PCT/US2002/022681 2001-07-17 2002-07-17 Method and apparatus using a nonlinear optical technique for detection of probe-target interactions in a field WO2003064991A2 (en)

Priority Applications (1)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
AU2002365214A AU2002365214A1 (en) 2001-07-17 2002-07-17 Method and apparatus using a nonlinear optical technique for detection of probe-target interactions in a field

Applications Claiming Priority (6)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US30604001P 2001-07-17 2001-07-17
US60/306,040 2001-07-17
US34782101P 2001-10-23 2001-10-23
US60/347,821 2001-10-23
US35466802P 2002-02-06 2002-02-06
US60/354,668 2002-02-06

Publications (2)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2003064991A2 true WO2003064991A2 (en) 2003-08-07
WO2003064991A3 WO2003064991A3 (en) 2006-05-11

Family

ID=27670593

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/US2002/022681 WO2003064991A2 (en) 2001-07-17 2002-07-17 Method and apparatus using a nonlinear optical technique for detection of probe-target interactions in a field

Country Status (2)

Country Link
AU (1) AU2002365214A1 (en)
WO (1) WO2003064991A2 (en)

Cited By (13)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
EP2101168A1 (en) * 2008-03-12 2009-09-16 Ecole Normale Superieure De Lyon Surface plasmon resonance enhanced nonlinear microscopy
US8497073B2 (en) 2002-01-24 2013-07-30 Biodesy, Llc Method using a nonlinear optical technique for detection of interactions involving a conformational change
WO2013115867A1 (en) * 2012-02-05 2013-08-08 Biodesy, Llc Methods for identifying modulators of ras using nonlinear techniques
US9383361B2 (en) 2012-04-25 2016-07-05 Biodesy, Inc. Methods for detecting allosteric modulators of protein
US9395358B2 (en) 2012-02-05 2016-07-19 Biodesy, Inc. Methods for detecting allosteric modulators of protein
US9428789B2 (en) 2011-03-21 2016-08-30 Biodesy, Inc. Classification of kinase inhibitors using nonlinear optical techniques
CN107075575A (en) * 2014-06-30 2017-08-18 比奥德赛公司 System and method for the high throughput analysis of the conformation in biological entities
US9880172B2 (en) 2008-08-04 2018-01-30 Biodesy, Inc. Nonlinear optical detection of molecules comprising an unnatural amino acid possessing a hyperpolarizability
US10670521B2 (en) 2015-02-10 2020-06-02 University Court Of The University Of St Andrews System, devices and methods using an integrated sphere light collector
US10672502B2 (en) 2015-04-02 2020-06-02 Biodesy, Inc. Methods for determining protein structure using a surface-selective nonlinear optical technique
US10768174B2 (en) 2014-12-23 2020-09-08 Bluelight Therapeutics, Inc. Attachment of proteins to interfaces for use in nonlinear optical detection
US11486881B2 (en) 2016-05-09 2022-11-01 Quanta Therapeutics, Inc. Methods and devices for detection of peripheral membrane protein interactions using nonlinear optical techniques
CN118050349A (en) * 2024-02-26 2024-05-17 苏州大弘兴半导体检测技术有限公司 Method and device for detecting adsorbate on surface of thin film circuit by using higher harmonic

Citations (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US5800992A (en) * 1989-06-07 1998-09-01 Fodor; Stephen P.A. Method of detecting nucleic acids
US6096497A (en) * 1998-06-15 2000-08-01 Biosensor Systems Design, Inc. Electrostatic enzyme biosensor
US6180415B1 (en) * 1997-02-20 2001-01-30 The Regents Of The University Of California Plasmon resonant particles, methods and apparatus
US6455303B1 (en) * 1997-06-04 2002-09-24 Cellectricon Ab Detection of biologically active molecules by use of pre-activated cell-based biosensors in liquid-based separation systems

Patent Citations (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US5800992A (en) * 1989-06-07 1998-09-01 Fodor; Stephen P.A. Method of detecting nucleic acids
US6180415B1 (en) * 1997-02-20 2001-01-30 The Regents Of The University Of California Plasmon resonant particles, methods and apparatus
US6455303B1 (en) * 1997-06-04 2002-09-24 Cellectricon Ab Detection of biologically active molecules by use of pre-activated cell-based biosensors in liquid-based separation systems
US6096497A (en) * 1998-06-15 2000-08-01 Biosensor Systems Design, Inc. Electrostatic enzyme biosensor

Non-Patent Citations (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Title
DELPRINCIPE ET AL: 'Two Photo and US laser flash photolysis of Ca cage and dimethoxynitrophenyl-EGTA-4' CELL CALCIUM vol. 25, 1999, page 85 *

Cited By (23)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US8497073B2 (en) 2002-01-24 2013-07-30 Biodesy, Llc Method using a nonlinear optical technique for detection of interactions involving a conformational change
EP2101168A1 (en) * 2008-03-12 2009-09-16 Ecole Normale Superieure De Lyon Surface plasmon resonance enhanced nonlinear microscopy
WO2009112431A1 (en) * 2008-03-12 2009-09-17 Ecole Normale Superieure De Lyon Surface plasmon resonance enhanced nonlinear microscopy
US9880172B2 (en) 2008-08-04 2018-01-30 Biodesy, Inc. Nonlinear optical detection of molecules comprising an unnatural amino acid possessing a hyperpolarizability
US9428789B2 (en) 2011-03-21 2016-08-30 Biodesy, Inc. Classification of kinase inhibitors using nonlinear optical techniques
WO2013115867A1 (en) * 2012-02-05 2013-08-08 Biodesy, Llc Methods for identifying modulators of ras using nonlinear techniques
GB2520111A (en) * 2012-02-05 2015-05-13 Biodesy Inc Methods for identifying modulators of Ras using nonlinear techniques
US9395358B2 (en) 2012-02-05 2016-07-19 Biodesy, Inc. Methods for detecting allosteric modulators of protein
US9938560B2 (en) 2012-02-05 2018-04-10 Biodesy, Inc. Methods for identifying modulators of Ras using nonlinear techniques
US9383361B2 (en) 2012-04-25 2016-07-05 Biodesy, Inc. Methods for detecting allosteric modulators of protein
EP3161168A4 (en) * 2014-06-30 2018-04-04 Biodesy, Inc. Systems and methods for high throughput analysis of conformation in biological entities
CN107075575A (en) * 2014-06-30 2017-08-18 比奥德赛公司 System and method for the high throughput analysis of the conformation in biological entities
US9989534B2 (en) 2014-06-30 2018-06-05 Biodesy, Inc. Systems and methods for high throughput analysis of conformation in biological entities
US10451630B2 (en) 2014-06-30 2019-10-22 Biodesy, Inc. Systems and methods for high throughput analysis of conformation in biological entities
GB2531213B (en) * 2014-06-30 2020-09-16 Biodesy Inc Systems and methods for high throughput analysis of conformation in biological entities
EP3936622A1 (en) * 2014-06-30 2022-01-12 Bluelight Therapeutics, Inc. Methods for high throughput analysis of conformation in biological entities
US10768174B2 (en) 2014-12-23 2020-09-08 Bluelight Therapeutics, Inc. Attachment of proteins to interfaces for use in nonlinear optical detection
US10670521B2 (en) 2015-02-10 2020-06-02 University Court Of The University Of St Andrews System, devices and methods using an integrated sphere light collector
US10677727B2 (en) 2015-02-10 2020-06-09 University Court Of The University Of St Andrews Scattered light integrating collector
EP3256840B1 (en) * 2015-02-10 2023-08-09 University Court of The University of St Andrews Systems and methods using an integrated sphere light collector
US10672502B2 (en) 2015-04-02 2020-06-02 Biodesy, Inc. Methods for determining protein structure using a surface-selective nonlinear optical technique
US11486881B2 (en) 2016-05-09 2022-11-01 Quanta Therapeutics, Inc. Methods and devices for detection of peripheral membrane protein interactions using nonlinear optical techniques
CN118050349A (en) * 2024-02-26 2024-05-17 苏州大弘兴半导体检测技术有限公司 Method and device for detecting adsorbate on surface of thin film circuit by using higher harmonic

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
WO2003064991A3 (en) 2006-05-11
AU2002365214A1 (en) 2003-09-02
AU2002365214A8 (en) 2006-11-02

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
US8497073B2 (en) Method using a nonlinear optical technique for detection of interactions involving a conformational change
US20020094528A1 (en) Method and apparatus using a surface-selective nonlinear optical technique for detection of probe-target interations
Tan et al. Molecular beacons: a novel DNA probe for nucleic acid and protein studies
US20020127563A1 (en) Method and apparatus using a surface-selective nonlinear optical technique for detection of probe-target interactions without labels
EP1540006B1 (en) Nanoparticle polyanion conjugates and methods of use thereof in detecting analytes
EP2217928B1 (en) Alternate labeling strategies for single molecule sequencing
WO2003064991A2 (en) Method and apparatus using a nonlinear optical technique for detection of probe-target interactions in a field
US20050118731A1 (en) Method and apparatus using a surface-selective nonlinear optical technique for detection of probe-target interactions without labels
WO2002044412A1 (en) Method and apparatus using a surface-selective nonlinear optical technique for detection of probe-target interactions
JP2007524347A (en) Label-free gene expression profiling using universal nanoparticle probes in microarray format assays
JP2004521323A (en) Method and apparatus for detecting probe-target interactions using surface selective nonlinear optical techniques
Vo-Dinh Biosensors for medical applications
JP2007178439A (en) Method of detecting biochemical reactant and biochip
JP4050540B2 (en) Biochemical reactant detection method and biochip
JP2003329676A (en) Method of detecting biochemical sample and detection chip
JP4194794B2 (en) Biochemical reactant detection method
AU2001276947A1 (en) Method and apparatus using a surface-selective nonlinear optical technique
Nolan Molecular Analysis Using Microparticle-Based Flow Cytometry
Allain et al. Tuan Vo-Dinh
JP2003329677A (en) Method of detecting biochemical sample and detection chip

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
AK Designated states

Kind code of ref document: A2

Designated state(s): AE AG AL AM AT AU AZ BA BB BG BR BY BZ CA CH CN CO CR CU CZ DE DK DM DZ EC EE ES FI GB GD GE GH GM HR HU ID IL IN IS JP KE KG KP KR KZ LC LK LR LS LT LU LV MA MD MG MK MN MW MX MZ NO NZ OM PH PL PT RO RU SD SE SG SI SK SL TJ TM TN TR TT TZ UA UG US UZ VN YU ZA ZM ZW

AL Designated countries for regional patents

Kind code of ref document: A2

Designated state(s): GH GM KE LS MW MZ SD SL SZ TZ UG ZM ZW AM AZ BY KG KZ MD RU TJ TM AT BE BG CH CY CZ DE DK EE ES FI FR GB GR IE IT LU MC NL PT SE SK TR BF BJ CF CG CI CM GA GN GQ GW ML MR NE SN TD TG

121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application
REG Reference to national code

Ref country code: DE

Ref legal event code: 8642

32PN Ep: public notification in the ep bulletin as address of the adressee cannot be established

Free format text: NOTING OF LOSS OF RIGHTS PURSUANT TO RULE 69(1) EPC (FORM 1205A, 01-07-04)

122 Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase
NENP Non-entry into the national phase in:

Ref country code: JP

WWW Wipo information: withdrawn in national office

Country of ref document: JP